Communications Directory

For prompt attention, please address inquiries as indicated below:

LaGrange College (general information)* 882-2911

Office of the President 81 2-7230

Director of Admission (admission, summer school) 812-7260

Director of Alumni Activities (alumni interests and gifts) 812-7245

Vice President for Advancement (bequests and gifts) 812-7257

Vice President and Controller (business matters and expenses). . . 812-7232
Vice President and Dean of the College (education program). . . . 812-7235
Director of Institutional Relations (public relations and news) . . . 812-7246
Director of Student Financial Planning (financial assistance) .... 812-7249
Dean of Student Development

(student affairs, housing, counseling) 812-7269

Registrar (transcripts, academic reports) 81 2-7237

Director of Career Planning and Placement (placement) 81 2-7286

*Area code is 706

Visitors are welcome at LaGrange College throughout the year. The admin-
istrative offices in the Quillian Building are open Monday through Friday
from 8:15 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Saturday visits may be arranged by appoint-
ment. Visitors desiring interviews with members of the staff are urged to
make appointments in advance.

The College information telephone number is (706) 882-2911 .
FAX: (706) 884-6567

Mailing address:

LaGrange College

601 Broad St.

LaGrange, Georgia 30240-2999

LaGrange College admits qualified students of any race, color, national and
ethnic origin to all the rights, privileges, programs, and activities generally
accorded or made available to students at the school. It does not discrimi-
nate on the basis of sex, race, color, national or ethnic origin in administra-
tion of its educational policies, admissions policies, scholarship and loan
programs, and athletic and other school-administered programs.

(USPS 299-300)

Entered as second class matter of the Post Office of

LaGrange, Georgia 30240, under the act of August 24, 191 2.

/I

VOLUME CLIV SEPTEMBER 1994 NUMBER!

Bulletin

LaG range, Georgia

CATALOGUE ISSUE 1994-95

/3

Contents

Communications Directory Inside Front Cover

Calendar 4

About LaGrange College, Purpose and History 7

The LaGrange College Campus 11

Admission 17

Financial Information 23

Financial Planning 27

Student Development 55

Academic Programs and Degree Requirements 65

Academic Regulations and Procedures 77

Pre-professional and Co-operative Programs 89

Departments and Courses 95

Faculty, Trustees and Administration 201

Degrees Awarded, June 1 994 214

Index 217

CHANGE OF REGULATIONS

The College reserves the right to make modifications in the degree
requirements, courses, schedules, calendar, regulations, fees and other
changes deemed necessary or conducive to the efficient operation of the
College. Such changes become effective as announced by the proper col-
lege authorities.

Note: For information, regulations and procedures for graduate study,
please see the Graduate Bulletin.

4/

Calendar, 1 994-95

Fall, 1994

September 6

Faculty assemble

September 7, 8, 9

Faculty Workshop

September 1

New students arrive

September 1 2

Registration for night classes

September 12,13

Registration for day classes

September 1 3

Night classes begin

Opening Convocation

September 14

Day classes begin

September 1 6

End drop/add, day and night classes, 5:00 p.m.

No refund for individual classes dropped after

this date. "\" grades must be changed to perma-

nent grades.

Last day for late registration

October 5

Last day to drop a class with an automatic "W".

October 1 5

Visiting Day for families of new students

November 10

Last day to drop a class

November 1 7

Last day of class

November 18

Reading (a.m.)

November

18, 19,21,22, 23

Exams

November 23

Begin term break, 5:00 p.m.

November 29

Grades due

Winter, 1995

January 2

Residence halls open

January 3

Registration for day and night classes

January 4

Classes begin (day and night)

January 6

End drop/add, day and night classes, 5:00 p.m.

January 25
February 8
March 6
March 1 3
March 14

No refund for individual classes dropped after
this date. "\" grades must be changed to perma-
nent grades.
Last day for late registration

Last day to drop a class with an automatic "W"

Midterm

Last day to drop a class

Last day of class

Reading day

/5

March 15, 16, 17, 18
March 20-24

Exams
Spring break

Spring, 1995

March 26
March 27
March 28
March 31

April 14

April 17

April 18
May 1 -6

May 6
May 24
May 31
June 1
June 2, 3,
June 9
June 10

5,6

Residence halls open

Registration

Classes begin

End drop/add, day and night classes, 5:00 p.m.
No refund for individual courses dropped after
this date. "\" grades must be changed to perma-
nent grades.
Last day for late registration

Good Friday. Classes end and offices close at
noon

Easter Monday; Faculty Workshop. No day
classes; night classes will meet.

Last day to drop a class with an automatic "W"

Community 1995 Honors Day; Senior Art
Show

May Day; Parents' Day

Last day to drop a class

Last day of class

Reading day

Exams

Baccalaureate sermon

Graduation

Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2013

http://archive.org/details/lagrangecollegeb1994lagr

17

About LaGrange College

Purpose

The mission of LaGrange College is to provide a liberating academic
environment in which students and faculty enjoy the adventure of higher
learning. This mission provides a college environment that enables stu-
dents to discover and value that which is excellent in life; an environment
which produces graduates prepared to accept responsibility in contempo-
rary society; and an environment distinguished by a faith in God and by an
understanding of humankind's place in the universe.

Since 1831 many men and women, sustained by their faith in God and
in humankind, have nurtured and promoted LaGrange College. These men
and women have studied, taught, administered and given of their resources
so that the mission of excellent Christian higher education would be real-
ized at LaGrange College, a college associated with The United Methodist
Church since 1856.

This mission of over 150 years has been the basis of the programs at
LaGrange College. Today the College continues to seek ways to achieve
this mission and fulfill its purpose:

by emphasizing undergraduate education with a firm commitment
to liberal arts. This is done through the strong general education curricu-
lum and major programs. These major programs are in the liberal arts and
sciences as well as other compatible professional areas.

by offering, where resources permit, academic study in particular
areas specifically in response to current community needs. Currently these
programs include nursing, graduate business administration, graduate
teacher education, and social work.

by fostering out-of-class enrichment (lectures, plays, exhibits, con-
certs, interest and honor groups) and extracurricular activities (intramural
and intercollegiate athletics, religious organizations and opportunities, ser-
vice organizations, social organizations and student publications).

by promoting healthy guided opportunities for physical activities.

by offering opportunities for inter-cultural experiences in the aca-
demic and social programs.

by striving to maximize student success through a strong academic
support system, counseling and placement services.

by seeking to attract and retain a faculty who are not only highly
competent in their disciplines but who also identify with the mission of the
College.

by providing a constructive influence on the local area through con-
tributing intellectual, cultural and social leadership; by offering educational

8 / About LaGrange College

opportunities to area citizens; and by encouraging faculty, staff and student
participation in local organizations.

by recruiting students who, through scholastic achievement and
potential as well as personal motivation, have indicated their desire to
undertake the LaGrange College program.

by striving to increase its resources at a rate which preserves the
financial well-being of the College, supports existing programs, including
Student Aid, and facilitates program development to meet changing needs
and to achieve improvements in quality.

Adopted by Faculty, Administration, and Board of Trustees, 1990.

History and Description

The history of LaGrange College is closely associated with the history of
the City of LaGrange and Troup County. When the vast tract of land lying
between the Flint and Chattahoochee Rivers was secured by the Indian
Springs Treaty of 1825 and was opened for settlement in 1827, one of the
five counties formed on the western border of the state was named Troup
in honor of Governor George Michael Troup.

An act was passed by the Georgia Legislature on December 24, 1827,
providing for the selection of a county seat. It was named LaGrange after
the country estate of the Marquis de Lafayette, American Revolutionary
War hero who had visited the region in 1825 as the guest of Governor
Troup. The site for the town of LaGrange was purchased in 1828 and the
town was incorporated on December 18, 1828. On December 26, 1831,
the charter for the LaGrange Female Academy was granted at the state
capitol, then in Milledgeville.

In 1831 Andrew Jackson was president of the United States. Abraham
Lincoln was 22 years old. The Creek Indians had been moved out of this
area of the state only six years earlier. The only other college in the state
was Franklin College, now the University of Georgia.

In 1 847 the charter for the school was amended and the school became
the LaGrange Female Institute with power to confer degrees. The name
was changed to LaGrange Female College in 1851 and in 1934 it was
changed to LaGrange College. The college became officially coeducational
in 1953.

The first location of the school was in a large white building at what is
now 406 Broad Street. The school moved to its present location "On The
Hill," the highest geographical point in LaGrange, after the construction of
the building now known as Smith Hall in 1842.

The College was sold to the Georgia Conference of the Methodist
Episcopal Church South in 1856. Today it is an institution of the North
Georgia Conference of The United Methodist Church.

About LaG range College 1 9

Strong in the liberal arts, LaGrange College has an outstanding reputa-
tion in pre-professional programs, including pre-medical and allied fields,
pre-law, pre-theology, and engineering.

LaGrange College offers the Bachelor of Arts degree with twenty majors,
the Bachelor of Business Administration with four concentration areas, and
the Bachelor of Science degree in three areas. The Master of Business
Administration degree and the Master of Education degree in Early
Childhood and Middle Childhood are offered. Associate of Arts degree is
offered in four areas.

LaGrange College operates on the quarter system. In addition to the day
schedule of classes in the fall, winter and spring quarters, there is an evening
session. There are also both day and evening sessions in the summer.

The college draws more than half of its student body from Georgia. With
students from more than one-third of the states and from several foreign
countries, the college has a cosmopolitan and international representation
which includes various religious and ethnic backgrounds.

While proud of its heritage, the college continues to add to and improve
its curriculum and facilities to meet the needs of its students today. LaGrange
College originated the plan for students to complete fall quarter before
Thanksgiving and have a 40-day holiday break. Georgia's leader in granting
academic credit through the College Level examination Program, the college
also offers travel seminars, field study programs and internships. The drama
department has a resident summer stock theatre company. Students in the
college's nursing division receive supervised learning experiences in many
area medical facilities. Campus art exhibitions, lectures, concerts, varsity and
intramural sports add to the cultural enrichment and recreational opportuni-
ties offered by the college.

The college is located in the town of LaGrange, Georgia, which has a
population of 25,597. Nearby are Callaway Gardens, the Warm Springs
Foundation and Franklin D. Roosevelt's Little White House. The West Point
Dam on the Chattahoochee River provides one of the largest lakes in the
region, with waterfronts and marina within the city limits of LaGrange.

Accreditation

As a coeducational, four-year liberal arts college, LaGrange College is
fully accredited by the Commission on Colleges of the Southern
Association of Colleges and Schools, approved by the United Methodist
University Senate, and has membership in the National Association of
Independent Colleges and Universities, the National Association of United
Methodist Colleges, the Georgia Association of Colleges, The Council of
Advancement and Support of Education, the Georgia Foundation for
Independent Colleges, and the Association of Private Colleges and
Universities in Georgia. The Georgia State Board of Education, which con-
fers professional certificates upon college graduates meeting requirements

1 / About LaCrange College

in early childhood, middle school, or secondary education, has awarded
highest approval to LaGrange College's program of teacher education.

The National League for Nursing, the official recognized agency for
associate degree nursing programs by the Council on Postsecondary
Accreditation, has awarded (highest) accreditation to LaGrange College's
nursing program.

The undergraduate and graduate programs in business administration are
accredited by the Association of Collegiate Business Schools and Programs.

Sessions of the College

The College operates on the quarter system. Each quarter is about ten
weeks long. There are four quarters: fall, winter, spring and summer. In the
summer quarter, day classes and evening classes meet in a seven-week term.

Both day and evening classes are available during each of these four
quarters. The day and evening classes are sessions of the same academic
program; however, with the exception of a limited number of majors it is
necessary to attend day classes at some time in order to complete degree
requirements.

/11

The LaGrange College Campus

William and Evelyn Banks Library

Completed in 1963. A modern academic learning center that provides
up-to-date resources to support and enrich the curriculum and to meet
informational needs. The library provides more than 125,000 volumes of
books, bound periodicals, and multimedia.

The Library is open seven days a week for a total of 77 hours per week,
and is staffed by three professional librarians, four paraprofessional and
part-time assistants, and many student assistants. Group study areas and a
seminar room for meetings are available for student and faculty use. The
Library is a member of the Southeastern Library Network (SOLINET) and
the Central Georgia Associated Libraries Consortium. The library sub-
scribes to the automated information retrieval system DIALOG. This system
enhances the library's reference information services.

The book collection is strengthened by substantial contributions. The
Lucy Lanier Nixon Fund has been endowed by the Wehadkee Foundation,
Inc. in memory of Mrs. Lucy Lanier Nixon. The Gula Clyde Jinks and Ruth
Tarrer Jinks Collection provides outstanding and necessary additional
resources for the Library. This Collection, established in 1987, is supported
by funds given by the Jinks family.

A service organization, Friends of the LaGrange College Library, sup-
ports the library through the awarding of grants to faculty to support the
purchase of additional library resources. The group also promotes greater
cooperation and communication between the library and the community.

The learning process is enhanced at LaGrange College by the Library's
special services to students and faculty. Reading, reference, and inter-
library loan assistance, by professionally trained librarians, is readily avail-
able. The microforms collection includes the complete New York Times
from 1851 and many other periodicals. The periodical collection in the
library is activated through the Academic Abstracts CD System.

The circulation system is fully automated, giving students and faculty
access to the full collection on line. Residence hall rooms along with most
faculty offices have access through fiber optics to the library data base.

The Library has recently installed a local area CD Network. Through this
Network, students and faculty will be able to access important reference
and research sources. Additionally, the Library is a full member of the
PeachNet-lnternet automated networks.

The Irene W. Melson Room, formerly the Special Collections Room,
houses many first editions. Also included are the Florence Grogan papers

1 2 / The LaCrange College Campus

and first editions of outstanding publications of LaGrange College alumni,
faculty and students.

The library is named in memory of a former chairman of the LaGrange
College Board of Trustees and his wife.

Cason J. Callaway Science Building

Built in 1972. Three-story brick building with latest equipment for
instruction in general science, biology, chemistry, math, and physics.
Named in memory of a former member of the College's Board of Trustees.

Fuller E. Callaway Student Center

Completed in 1981. Three-story brick building which houses Office of
Student Development, student activities and the campus post office.
Named in memory of Fuller E. Callaway, local philanthropist.

Warren A. Candler Cottage

Completed in 1929 as a home for college president. Building named in
honor of a former Methodist Church Bishop, now deceased. The building
houses the Office of Institutional Relations and the LaGrange College
Center for Community Studies.

Lamar Dodd Art Center

Completed in 1982. This building provides a physical environment and
the equipment needed for the finest in art instruction, as well as gallery
space for the college's outstanding art collection. Named in honor of
Lamar Dodd, Georgia artist who was reared in LaGrange and whose paint-
ings have won international recognition.

Louise Anderson Manget Building

Built in 1959. Contains faculty offices and classrooms. Named in memory
of an 1 894-graduate of the college who served more than forty years as a med-
ical missionary to Hoochow, China, with her husband, Dr. Fred P. Manget.

Pitts Hall

Completed in 1941. Two-story brick building. Women's dormitory. A
major renovation was completed in 1990. Pitts Hall was rededicated in
memory of Mr. and Mrs. W.I.H. Pitts and in honor of their daughter, Miss
Margaret Adger Pitts, a College trustee. The Pitts are long-time supporters
of the College.

Price Theater

Completed in 1975. Dramatic arts building with a 280-seat auditorium that
has the latest acoustical concepts. Building houses classrooms for the Depart-
ment of Theater Arts and ballet instruction, faculty offices, scenery workshop,

The LaGrange College Campus 1 1 3

dressing rooms, costume room and actors lounge. Named in memory of
Lewis Price, a long-time member of the College's Board of Trustees.

Quillian Building

Built in 1949. Now houses administrative offices president, academic
dean, registrar, business manager, and the Waights G. Henry, Jr. Collection
on the Marquis de Lafayette. Named in memory of a former president,
Hubert T. Quillian, who served from 1938-1948.

Smith Hall

Oldest building on the campus. The main portion of the building was
constructed in 1842 of handmade brick formed from native clay. Addition
was built in 1 887. Major renovation was completed in 1 989 at a cost of over
$2.5 million. Ready for the 21st century, the building now houses offices,
classrooms and seminar rooms for the departments of business administra-
tion, computer science, history and social work, as well as administrative
offices admission, advancement, alumni activities, financial planning,
evening studies, the College's computer center and campus bookstore.

Named in memory of Mrs. Oreon Smith, wife of a former president of
the College, Rufus W. Smith, who served from 1885 until his death in
1 91 5. The building is on the National Register of Historic Places.

Sunny Gables

Built in 1926, purchased by College in 1973 as headquarters for
College's Nursing Division. The handsome English Tudor building is located
at 910 Broad Street.

The Chapel

Built in 1965. The materials used link it with Christian worship in
LaGrange and other parts of the world and include two stained glass win-
dows made in Belgium more than 100 years ago; a stone from the temple
of Apollo at Corinth, Greece; a stone from the Benedictine Monastery,
lona, Scotland; a stone from St. George's Chapel, Windsor, England.
Regular worship services are held when the College is in session.

J.K. Boatwright Hall

Completed in 1962. Three-story brick building. Men's dormitory.
Named in memory of long-time member of the College's Board of Trustees
and chairman of the board's executive committee from 1 956-1 962.

Hawkes Hall

Completed in 1911. The four-story brick building is named in memory
of Mrs. Harriet Hawkes, mother of College benefactor, the late A.K.
Hawkes. After a major renovation costing $1 .4 million, the building houses
women students on second, third and fourth floors. Faculty offices and

1 4 / The LaC range College Campus

classrooms for the Education Department occupy the ground floor. The
College's Day Clinic is on the second floor.

Waights G. Henry, Jr. Residence Hall

Completed in 1970. Five-story brick building. Student dormitory.
Building named in honor of Dr. Waights G. Henry, Jr. (now deceased), who
served as president of the College from 1948-1978, and as chancellor from
1978 until his death in 1989.

William H. Turner Jr. Hall

Built in 1958. Three-story brick building. Women's dormitory. Named in
memory of William H. Turner, Jr., a textile executive of LaGrange who was a
benefactor of the College, a long-time member of the College's Board of
Trustees and chairman of the board's executive committee from 1 929-1 950.

Alfred Mariotti Gymnasium

Built in 1959. Houses physical education classrooms and facilities for
indoor athletics. Named in memory of Coach Alfred Mariotti, College's
basketball coach from 1962-1974 and member of the faculty until his
retirement in 1979.

Dining Hall

Completed in 1962. Two-story brick building that houses dining area
and kitchen. Headquarters for maintenance department on lower level.

Callaway Campus

Acquired by the College in 1992 as a gift from Callaway Foundation.
Campus includes three buildings of brick and concrete construction.

Callaway Auditorium

Built in 1941 . Building provides space for approximately 2,200 spectators.
It contains a 30 by 46 feet center elevated stage, a basketball court, conces-
sion area with full kitchen, and meeting rooms.

Aquatics Complex

Swimming pool was constructed in 1947 as an oversized pool with
dimensions of 80 feet by 150 feet. Calla-Cabana and bathhouse building
were built in 1956. The oversized pool has been divided into an outdoor
pool and a natatorium. The Calla-Cabana and bathhouse have recently been
renovated. The complex is now equipped for a year round aquatics program.

Callaway Education Building

Built in 1965 and renovated in 1994, the building houses the Music
Department, Offices of Intercollegiate and Intramural Athletics, and Offices
of the Department of Health, Physical Education and Recreation. The facil-

The LaCrange College Campus 1 1 5

ity includes state-of-the-art electronic music equipment, a recording studio,
a fitness center, a gymnasium, and faculty offices.

16/

I\7

Admission

It is the aim of LaGrange College to admit those students who demon-
strate that they can benefit from a liberal arts education. In the selection of
students, careful attention is given to the academic ability of each candidate.

PROCEDURE FOR APPLYING FOR ADMISSION

An application for admission should be submitted when the student
decides he or she would like to attend LaGrange College. The application
should be completed at least one month prior to the beginning of the quar-
ter in which the entrance is desired. Applicants may enroll any quarter.

Admission Documents Required

Freshmen Transfers

1. Application form 1. Application form

2. Application fee 2. Application fee

3. High school transcript 3. Transcripts of all previous college

work (transfers with fewer than 45
quarter hours earned must also
submit high school transcripts)

Once all required documents have been submitted, a minimum of two-
three weeks is required to complete the processing of an application. An
applicant will be notified as soon as the Admission Committee has reached
a decision. A student's acceptance is tentative, pending satisfactory com-
pletion of such work before acceptance is final.

Once an offer of admission is extended, the candidate is asked to accept
that offer by submitting an admission deposit. The amount of this deposit is
$150 for students who will live on campus, or $50 for students who will
live at home. The $50 deposit will remain on the student's account as a
credit toward the first quarter's tuition. For resident students, the additional
$100 will serve as a room reservation deposit and will reserve the-student's
room while the student is not occupying college housing. The admission
deposit is fully refundable, provided the student submits a written request
to the Office of Admission by the following dates: July 1 5 for Fall Quarter,
December 1 5 for Winter Quarter, March 1 5 for Spring Quarter.

Room reservation deposit is refundable if the student withdraws or when
the student graduates, provided there are not charges against the student at
that time.

Students interested in LaGrange College are invited to visit the campus
and may schedule an appointment by contacting the Admission Office.
The telephone number is 706/81 2-7260.

1 8 / Admission

ACADEMIC ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS

Admission to the Freshman Class. Prior to enrolling, an applicant is
expected to complete requirements for graduation from an approved high
school.

A total of 1 5 units is required with a minimum of 1 1 units within the fol-
lowing areas:

English 4

Social Studies 3

Mathematics 2

Science 2

LaGrange College students come from a diversity of public and private
secondary school backgrounds. Preference is given to applicants who have
had strong academic preparation in high school. A typical matriculant will
have completed:

English 4

Social Studies 3

College Preparatory Mathematics
(Algebra, Geometry,

Trigonometry, etc.) 3

Science 3

Foreign Language 2

Desirable electives include additional units of Language, Mathematics,
or Science. A basic understanding of Computer Science is also encouraged.

Scores from either the SAT (administered by the College Entrance
Examination Board) or ACT (administered by the American College Testing
Program) are required of all freshman applicants. Test results should nor-
mally be sent to LaGrange College in November, December, or January of
the last year in high school.

Mature students with an irregular educational background may qualify
for admission by achieving satisfactory scores on the tests of General
Educational Development, High School Level.

LaGrange College predicts a student's grade point average using a for-
mula which takes into account verbal and math scores on the SAT and the
student's high school grade point average. Students are admitted as "clear
accept" if they are predicted to be successful in the academic programs of
LaGrange College.

Clear Accept: The majority of LaGrange College students are accepted
under the clear accept category.

Early Admission: Early admission is possible for students who will have
completed the junior year of high school. To qualify, a student must have a
B+ or better high school average in his academic courses, have ten of the
eleven prescribed units, and have a total of fifteen units. Also to qualify, a
student must have a minimum score on the College Board SAT of 1050

Admission 1 1 9

combined or a composite score of 25 on the ACT. A minimum of 500 on
the Verbal SAT or a minimum of 24 in the English subject area of the ACT
is desirable. An interview is required of all early admission students.

Joint Enrollment: Recognizing that there is an increasing number of high
school students beginning their twelfth grade who need only one or two
academic units to graduate and who very often lack sufficient challenge,
LaGrange College has adopted a policy for joint Enrollment at both the
College and the student's high school. To be eligible, a student must meet
the dear-accept standard of the Admission policy and be recommended in
writing by the proper authority at the student's high school.

On-Trial Program: This program is for applicants who are unable to
qualify for dear-accept admission to LaGrange College, but who appear to
have the potential to succeed. All courses taken are for full credit. Students
in this program must earn a grade point average of 1 .6 during the first quar-
ter of college work. Further information is available from the Director of
Admission.

Transfer Students: A student who has been in attendance at another
institution may apply for transfer to LaGrange College if he or she is eligi-
ble to return to that institution at the time of entry to LaGrange College. A
student may be accepted on probation under the standard probation regu-
lations. All records including transcripts of all college work attempted,
must be complete before the student is admitted to LaGrange College.
Applicants may enroll at the beginning of any quarter. LaGrange College
does not accept D grades. Acceptable credit from a junior college is lim-
ited to 100 quarter hours. Credits from senior colleges beyond 145 quarter
hours may be accepted, but the LaGrange College residency requirements,
the general education curriculum, and appropriate major coursework must
be satisfied.

LaGrange College is accredited by the Commission on Colleges of the
Southern Association of Colleges and Schools and, accordingly, accepts
coursework from similarly regionally accredited colleges and universities.

Transient Students: Students currently enrolled in good standing at another
college, may enroll at LaGrange College as transient students. Approval of
course work must be authorized by the primary institution on the Application
for Transient Status which is available from the Admission Office.

Non-degree Undergraduate Students: Students not working toward a
degree may register as non-degree undergraduate students in any course for
which they have the necessary prerequisites. An application for non-degree
undergraduate student status may be obtained through the Admission
Office. Students classed as non-degree undergraduate students may become
regular students by meeting requirements for regular admission. No more
than ten credit hours may be earned under this classification.

20 / Admission

Readmission Students: Following an absence from LaGrange College of
four or more quarters during the academic year, any student who decides
to return must submit an Application for Readmission. This form is avail-
able from the Admission Office. Students who have been absent from
LaGrange College for three quarters or less may re-activate their file in the
Registrar's Office. These students do not need to apply for readmission.

In the event that a student seeking readmission has attended another
institution as a transfer (not transient) then that student when readmitted is
treated as a new transfer student and is subject to the Bulletin in force at the
time of transfer back to LaGrange. On the other hand, students who have
not attended another institution are generally governed by the catalog in
force at the time of their initial admission. An exception is that students who
have been out of school for four calendar years or more re-enter under the
Bulletin in force at the time of readmission and resumption of study.

International Students: Admission as an international student requires a
TOEFL examination with a minimum score of 500 for students for whom
English is not their first language. Documentation of completion of the 109
level from one of the ELS Language Centers may be substituted for the
TOEFL requirement. Also required are translated and certified documents
attesting to academic performances in secondary school and university, if
applicable. The Director of Admission should be contacted for the current
interpretation of the regulations concerning obtaining a student visa. If the
prospective student is in the United States, an interview at the college is
desirable and may often be substituted for a TOEFL score.

International students must also submit official documents certifying
their ability to pay for the cost of one full year of study at LaGrange
College. These documents include (1) A bank letter, signed by a bank offi-
cial, certifying that the student's family has sufficient funding on deposit to
cover all costs relating to one year of study at LaGrange College; and (2) a
financial support letter indicating the parents' ability and willingness to
cover all costs relating to one year of study at LaGrange College.

The above information must be submitted before an application will be
evaluated by the Admission Committee.

ADMISSION TO NURSING PROGRAM

The nursing program functions within the general admission policy of
the College and has several additional requirements:

1 . SAT scores (minimum Verbal 400 and Mathematics 350).

2. Two letters of reference, one from an educator or employer, and
one from a personal acquaintance.

3. Satisfactory completion of any remedial courses required by the
College prior to beginning the first nursing course.

4. A minimum GPA of 2.0 for any previously completed college
studies.

Admission / 2 1

An interview with a member of the nursing faculty may also be
required. Information regarding these requirements will be mailed to the
student following acceptance by the College.

A nursing course completed in another nursing program, with a grade of
75% or higher, may qualify for transfer credit depending upon course con-
tent. An audit of specified courses may be required for transfer students.
Contact the Nursing office for complete information.

Advanced placement by testing or through a transition course is avail-
able for licensed practical nurses. Further information regarding advanced
placement may be obtained from the Nursing Office.

22/

/23

Financial Information

Payment of Charges

All charges for the quarter are due and payable at registration, and
each student is expected to pay at that time.

Students who pre-register and pay in advance of the deadline each
quarter are not required to attend final registration.

LaGrange College has no plan for making monthly or deferred pay-
ments. Realizing that some families prefer to pay charges on a monthly
basis, the College has made arrangements with Academic Management
Services to offer interested parents this type service. The plan is an agree-
ment between the parent and the company; there is no involvement by
LaGrange College in the agreement. For additional information, contact the
Director of Financial Aid.

Expenses

1. Admission

Application for Admission (not refundable) $ 20.00

2. Tuition

A. (1 ) (undergraduate) per quarter hour

(2) Normal Load (1 7 Hrs.), per quarter

(3) Nursing (NSG) Courses per quarter hour

(4) Graduate (MBA, MED) Courses per quarter hour

B. Private Lesson Fees (in addition to tuition charge)
Piano (2 hrs. credit) per quarter
Voice (2 hrs. credit) per quarter*
Guitar (2 hrs. credit) per quarter
Composition/Arranging (2 hrs. credit) per quarter

C. General Fees Required for Every Student Enrolled

(1) less than 12 hours

(2) 12 hours and over

D. Course Fees Select Courses

Science Lab

Computer Science, Business Administration 440

Nursing Lab, per lab credit hour

English 010

Students enrolled in MUS 206 and 306 may take MUS 240 without tuition.

150.00

2550.00

170.00

170.00

200.00

200.00

200.00

200.00

. 35.00

75.00

60.00

40.00

15.00

200.00

24 / Financial Information

E. Summer Quarter

Summer Quarter charges are listed in the Summer
Quarter brochure. Students may write for information
regarding offerings and charges.

F. Audit (per quarter hour) $ 60.00
All requests for audit courses must be approved by

the instructor and Academic Dean. No freshman
student may audit any course during his first quarter
at LaGrange College.

3. Room and Board (per quarter) Henry, Pitts and Hawkes 1 220.00
Boatwright and Turner 1 1 95.00

(Note: All students living in dormitories are required to pay
room and board.)

4. Private rooms are available at additional charge: 200.00
After the beginning of the quarter any student occupying a double room
alone will be charged single rates. If a student occupying a double room
alone does not wish to pay the private room rate, it is that student's
responsibility to find a suitable roommate. Willingness to accept a
roommate will not constitute grounds for waiving the single room
charge.

5. Fees Miscellaneous

Graduation (Regardless of Participation) Undergraduate 40.00

Graduate 80.00

Late Registration 20.00

Personal checks failing to clear bank 1 5.00

Student Identification Card Replacement Fee 5.00

Documents Fee (International Students) 160.00

Parking Permit 15.00

Testing Fee (All New Students) 60.00

Room Deposit 100.00

Admission Deposit (New Students) 50.00

Financial Information 1 25

Summary of Standard Charge

Non-Dormitory Students:

Per Quarter

Per Year

Tuition, Undergrade

Non-Nursing

$2550.00

$7650.00

General Fees

75.00

225.00

2625.00

7875.00

Pitts

Boatwright

Hawkes

and

Dormitory Students

Henry

Turner

Tuition

2550.00

2550.00

7650.00

General Fees

75.00

75.00

225.00

Room and Board

1220.00

1195.00

3585.00

3845.00

3820.00

11460.00

All LaGrange College undergraduate degree-seeking students taking 12
hours or more who have been residents of the state of Georgia for twelve
consecutive months are eligible to receive a tuition equalization grant
regardless of need. The amount of this grant for 1994-95 is expected to be
$2000.00. Of this $1000.00 comes from the Georgia Tuition Equalization
Grant program and $1000.00 from Georgia's HOPE Grant program. State
of Georgia Tuition grants MUST be applied for at registration in order to be
processed within the time limit set by the State. Failure to apply on time
means the student will not receive the State Tuition Grant and will person-
ally have to pay the amount of the grant.

Depending on individual requirements, a student may expect to spend
$750.00 to $1000.00 per year on books and personal expenses.

The above charges are applicable to an academic year of three quarters
duration.

Summer Quarter costs and curriculum are available in a separate bulletin.

Nursing students should consult with the Nursing Division concerning
required nursing supplies and their projected costs.

All students must present proof of health insurance at the time of regis-
tration. If the student has no insurance, the college will make a charge for
limited coverage group sickness and accident insurance.

Transcripts of grades are withheld for any student who has a financial
obligation to LaGrange College.

26 / Financial Information

Refund Policy

No refund of charges of any nature will be made to any student who is
suspended or dismissed for disciplinary reasons.

No refunds will be made for courses dropped after dates established by
the school calendar.

In the event of complete withdrawal from college after registration,
refund of tuition will be made from date of registration to date of official
withdrawal on the following basis:

Regular

School Year

% Refund

100
80
60
40
No refund

Withdrawal

During Drop/Add
Within 14 days
Within 21 days
Within 28 days
After 28 days

Graduate

7-Week

Summer

Summer

% Refund

% Refund

100

100

40

60

No refund

40

No refund

Refunds are processed after the refund period has ended each quarter.

No refund for room or board will be made to any student who with-
draws from the dormitory after registration. For a student withdrawing from
college, a charge of $1 5.00 per day from date of registration to date of offi-
cial withdrawal will be made in board.

There is no refund of room deposit if student does not enroll.

A separate refund policy exists for new first quarter students (freshman
and transfers) who receive Title IV (federal) financial assistance as required
by the Higher Education Amendments of 1992. Information is available in
the Financial Planning Office.

Students eligible for the State of Georgia Tuition Equalization Grant must
be enrolled for a minimum of 14 days after the drop/add period to receive
credit for the grant.

The College will not be responsible for loss of or damage to students'
personal property.

Ill

Financial Planning

Philosophy

LaGrange College believes that the student and family should contribute
to the educational expenses of attending college to the extent of their abil-
ity to do so. When family resources do not meet the total costs of attending
this institution, a financial need is established. We at LaGrange College
will do all we can to assist you in meeting that need. The student should be
prepared to assume a measure of responsibility through limited work or
through borrowing a reasonable portion of any financial need. Foreign stu-
dents are not eligible for scholarships or financial aid unless they hold per-
manent residency status. All aid is awarded without regard to race, sex,
sexual preference, creed, color or national origin.

General Information

Financial need is the difference between the total educational costs and
the amount the family can contribute. The family contribution is deter-
mined by using a standard need analysis system. The Free Application for
Federal Student Aid (FAFSA) or Renewal Application are the preferred need
analysis documents. The Free Application for Federal Student Aid or
Renewal Application must be completed by all students and allows the
applicant to apply for federal, institutional, and state programs.

Applicants for financial assistance need not be accepted for admission to
apply. However, the student must be accepted for enrollment before an offi-
cial aid award can be made. Financial aid awards are made for each aca-
demic year. Therefore, students must complete a need analysis each year.

Procedure for Applying for Financial Aid

1 . Apply for admission to the college through the Admission Office.

2. Submit the FAFSA or Renewal Application to the processor for process-
ing as soon as possible after January 1 . The FAFSA may be obtained
from high school counselors or the Office of Student Financial
Planning at the College. Students who applied for financial assistance
in the previous award year will receive a Renewal Application directly
from the Central Processor. Students whose financial aid file is com-
pleted by June 1st get preference for aid. Students completing files
after that deadline will receive grant assistance if funds are available.

3. Submit the LaGrange College Financial Aid Application to the Office
of Student Financial Planning. This form is available upon request.

28 / Financial Planning

4. All Georgia residents should complete and submit the Georgia Student
Grant Application for the Georgia Tuition Equalization Grant and
HOPE Grant programs to the office of Student Financial Planning. This
form is available only from private colleges in Georgia. It may be com-
pleted in advance of registration or at registration but no later than the
last day of late registration.

5. Transfer students requesting assistance must submit a Financial Aid
Transcript (FAT) from all post-secondary institutions previously
attended whether or not financial assistance was received. These
forms may be obtained by contacting the Office of Student Financial
Planning or the institutions previously attended.

Determination of Eligibility
for Need-Based Assistance

The College annually prepares a cost of attendance budget which is
composed of tuition and fees, room and board, books and supplies, trans-
portation and miscellaneous expenses. The expected family contribution
(EFC) as determined by the processed Need Analysis document is sub-
tracted from the appropriate budget and the remainder is unmet need. The
Office of Student Financial Planning then prepares a financial aid award
based on this unmet need. Funds are awarded to students as their financial
aid file is completed.

Budgets for 94-95:

Dependent Undergraduates residing in the

dormitories/off-campus 13,565

Dependent Undergraduates residing with parents 1 1 ,605

Independent Undergraduates residing off-campus 18,695
Dependent Nursing students residing in the

dormitories/off-campus 15,225

Dependent Nursing student residing with parents 1 3,265

Independent Nursing students residing off-campus 20,355

Graduate students residing in the dormitories/off campus 1 0,965

Graduate students residing with parents 9,305

Graduate students residing off-campus 1 6,095

Student Eligibility

In general, to be eligible for student financial assistance you must:

A. Be a U.S. citizen or permanent resident of the United States.

B. Be accepted for admission or currently enrolled in an approved
degree-seeking program at the College.

C. Be making Satisfactory Academic Progress toward the completion of
your course of study according to the "Academic Probation

Financial Planning/ 29

Regulations" and "Satisfactory Academic Progress" policies pub-
lished in the LaGrange College Bulletin.

D. Not be in default on a Federal Perkins Loan/National Direct Student
Loan or any of the Federal Family Education Loan Programs, i.e.,
Federal Subsidized Stafford Loan (Guaranteed Student Loan), Federal
Unsubsidized Stafford Loan, Federal Supplemental Loans for
Students, or a Federal Parent Loan for Undergraduate Students.

E. Not owe a refund on Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity
Grant or Federal Pell Grant received at any institution.

F. Not have borrowed in excess of the loan limits under the Title IV
programs at any institution.

G. Be registered with Selective Service, if required.

Student Financial Aid Policy

Each year the Office of Student Financial Planning receives more requests
for financial assistance than funds are available. First priority for assistance
goes to eligible students who are in pursuit of the first baccalaureate degree.
Students who are enrolled less than half-time are eligible for assistance.
Special students (those not enrolled in a degree seeking program), transient
students and unclassified graduate students are not eligible for any type of
assistance.

Students who receive aid awarded by the College during the academic
year will be given preference for summer awards contingent upon avail-
ability of funds.

Students who receive academic scholarships are not required to com-
plete a "need analysis" document although all students are encouraged to
do so.

All undergraduate Georgia residents enrolled full-time must apply for
the State Student Incentive Grant, the Georgia Tuition Equalization Grant,
and HOPE Grant.

Any aid that a student receives or expects to receive from any outside
source must be reported to the Office of Student Financial Planning. This
includes scholarships, grants, and loans. The receipt of such aid may result in
a reduction, cancellation, and/or repayment of your need based assistance.

Disbursement of Funds

Federal Pell Grant, Federal Supplemental Education Opportunity Grant,
Federal Perkins Loan, Georgia Tuition Equalization Grant, HOPE Academic
Scholarships, State Incentive Grant and Institutional Grants are automati-
cally credited against the student's charges and are reflected on the charge
sheet at registration. Perkins Loan recipients must sign a promissory note at
or prior to registration and complete an initial interview questionnaire.

Funds from the Federal Family Education Loan programs come to the
College in the form of a check payable to the student and/or the College.

30 / Financial Planning

Loan checks are disbursed by the Business Office. Borrowers have a maxi-
mum of 45 days to retrieve their loan checks. Loan checks not retrieved
within this time frame will be returned to the lender. Students will be noti-
fied, in writing that their loan proceeds are available for pick up. Prior to
disbursement of loan proceeds, the borrower is required to present a pic-
ture ID and sign a check release form certifying eligibility for the disburse-
ment. First time borrowers must complete loan counseling prior to
disbursement. Loan proceeds for first time, first year borrowers are subject
to a 30 day delayed disbursement requirement. Deferred Payment for the
amount of the loan disbursement is available for students who are subject
to delayed disbursement.

PLUS loan checks are made co-payable and mailed directly to the school
for disbursement. LaGrange College does not provide initial endorsement of
these loan proceeds. The check is mailed to the parent borrower for
endorsement in addition to an options form for disposition of residual funds
not attributable to the current school term.

All work programs are paid monthly directly to the student. Payroll
checks are mailed to the student's campus post office box on the 10th of
the subsequent month. Exception: a student who owes a balance at the
Business Office must collect their check from the Business Office.

Determination of Placement for Employment

Students are first assigned employment in their designated choice of
positions until such time as all those positions are filled; placements are
then assigned according to the need of other dependents and areas on
campus and community service agencies requesting student assistance.

Off Campus Employment

Local businesses employ students in part-time positions. Such employ-
ment is usually arranged by the student and not the College. The Office of
Career Planning and Placement maintains current job opportunity informa-
tion and can advise students concerning employment opportunities and
responsibilities.

Responsibilities of Financial Aid Recipients

1 . You must get a campus post office box (there is no charge) and
check it often.

2. You must let the Office of Student Financial Planning know any time
that you drop classes, or fail to enroll as a full time student (12 or
more hours).

3. You must notify the Office of Student Financial Planning any time
you change your living arrangements from that which you desig-
nated on the Need Analysis document you originally filed (if you
move home, move on campus, or if you move elsewhere).

Financial Planning/ 31

4. You must notify the Office of Student Financial Planning of changes
in your household size and number in post-secondary institutions at
any time during the award year when said changes occur.

5. You must notify the Office of Financial Planning if you plan to with-
draw from school or transfer.

6. You must complete an exit interview for Federal Family Education
and Federal Perkins Loan Programs prior to graduation, withdrawal,
or transferring.

7. You must provide in a timely manner any additional information
requested by the Office of Student Financial Planning.

8. You must make Satisfactory Academic Progress to maintain eligibility
for financial assistance.

Work Aid and Federal College Work Study Rights and Responsibilities

1. Job assignments are available in the Office of Student Financial
Planning the day after registration. You must come by personally to
get your assignment.

2. Earnings from work are not credited at registration. Time sheets are
due on the last working day of the month. There is no penalty for
failure to work your hours, except that you are not compensated for
hours not worked. Payroll is run monthly.

3. In accepting assistance from either work program you are agreeing
to perform satisfactory work as determined by your supervisor. An
annual evaluation is filed with the Office of Student Financial
Planning.

- 4. Scheduling of hours will be mutually agreed upon by both the stu-
dent and the supervisor as determined by the quarterly class sched-
ule and work load of the office.

5. Transfers from one position to another will be done at the supervi-
sor's request. Transfers due to unsatisfactory work habits can result in
loss of eligibility for either work program.

6. Unexcused absences from work will not be tolerated. Three unex-
cused absences can result in termination of eligibility. You should
always notify your supervisor when an absence is necessary, in
advance, if possible, so your position can be covered.

7. You are not allowed to work more than the number of assigned
hours. If you do, you will not be compensated.

8. Recipients of work must complete federal and state withholding
forms and an 1-9 form with the college Business Office.

Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy

The Higher Education Act of 1965, as amended by Congress in 1980
and 1986, requires that a student be maintaining Satisfactory Academic
Progress in their course of study in order to receive any Title IV financial

32 / Financial Planning

aid. Satisfactory progress will be implemented throughout the entire course
of study prior to and including periods when a student receives Title IV aid
or state aid.

The minimum academic progress requirement for all students, whether
or not they are receiving Title IV aid or state aid, are those academic
requirements imposed by LaGrange College as stated in the LaGrange
College Bulletin section titled "Academic Probation Regulations."
Academic probation or suspension are the same for enrollment as for
financial aid eligibility. (If a student is allowed to continue enrollment on
probation they continue eligibility to receive financial aid; if they are sus-
pended from enrollment their future eligibility for financial aid is termi-
nated). The Dean of the College is charged with the responsibility of
monitoring this part of the Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy. Once the
determination of enrollment eligibility is assessed, the Vice President and
Dean of the College follows with a memo to the Office of Student
Financial Planning showing those students who have been suspended from
enrollment. This part of the policy is monitored quarterly. A student must
have a 2.0 cumulative GPA at the end of the second year (regardless of
course load) or that which is consistent with the institution's policy govern-
ing academic progress. LaGrange's policy requires a 1 .65 at the end of the
1 st year, a 1 .75 at the end of the 2nd year, a 1 .85 at the end of the 3rd year
and a 2.0 at the end of the 4th year. The policy of the institution will be the
deciding factor in assessing satisfactory academic progress.

Beyond those minimum requirements, there are some others for Title IV
aid recipients and the recipients of the Georgia's grant programs. Title IV
aid programs are Federal Pell Grant, Federal Supplemental Educational
Opportunity Grant, Federal College Work Study, Federal Perkins Loan,
Federal Stafford Loans, Federal PLUS/SLS. Georgia's grant programs are the
State Student Incentive Grant, State Tuition Equalization Grant, and HOPE
Grant.

If a student accepts aid from any program listed above, the student must
earn at least the following number of cumulative credits based on full-time
status (17 hours per quarter to be on schedule for graduation in 4 years)
according to the following sequence of academic quarters:

At the end You must have earned a

of Quarter minimum number of hours

3 30

6 65

9 115

12 155

15 195

This means that students who drop courses, withdraw frequently, fail to
complete courses (incompletes), repeat courses, or take courses not related to
their degree objective would not be considered to be making satisfactory aca-

Financial Planning/ 33

demic progress as they would not graduate within the specified 15 quarter
time frame. LaGrange College does not offer non-credit remedial courses.

TO MAINTAIN ELIGIBILITY FOR TITLE IV FEDERAL AID PROGRAMS
OR STATE PROGRAMS A STUDENT MUST MEET ALL THREE (3) CRITERIA
SPECIFIED: GRADE POINT AVERAGE, MINIMUM NUMBER OF HOURS
EARNED, AND BE WITHIN THE 1 5 QUARTER TIME FRAME.

Students who do not meet the Academic Probation Regulations of the
institution, i.e. are suspended, do not earn the number of hours required or
who exceed the time frame will have all sources of federal, state, and insti-
tutional assistance terminated at the time that such determination has been
made.

Students who have their financial aid terminated may have their aid
reinstated pending approval by the Student Financial Planning Appeals
Committee and the availability of funds at that time.

Students who are part-time have a maximum of a 15 quarters equivalent
of full time enrollment (part-time quarters are added to make full-time
quarters). Because of aggregate (lifetime) loan limits a student needs to be
aware that they may exhaust lifetime Federal Stafford loan limits prior to
receiving a degree. Additional information on satisfactory academic
progress for part-time students is available from the Office of Student
Financial Planning.

This policy is monitored quarterly for suspensions and time frame, and
annually for the minimum number of hours required. The GPA requirement
(since it is the same as the academic probation policy of the Institution)
will be monitored by suspending aid for those students who are suspended
from the institution by the Vice President and Dean of the College. The
time frame and number of hours earned will be monitored by the Director
of the Office of Student Financial Planning utilizing the academic records
of the College to insure that the student has earned the required number of
hours per the specified time increment (3 quarters).

Conditions of Reinstatement

The Financial Aid Appeals Committee may set specific terms for re-
attaining eligibility which may include a student's paying his/her own
expenses for a specified time or for a specified number of hours. Any spe-
cial terms for readmission to the College will also play a part in re-estab-
lishing eligibility. It will be the responsibility of the student to notify the
Financial Aid Office once any special requirements have been met.

Appeal Procedure

A student may appeal the denial of aid (with the exception of the fifteen
quarter time limit) if mitigating circumstances have occurred. This appeal
should be submitted in writing to the Director of the Office of Student

34 / Financial Planning

Financial Planning who will submit the appeal before a Financial Aid
Appeals Committee. (This letter of appeal should include (a) reason for fail-
ure to meet whichever requirement was not met and (b) reasons why aid
should not be terminated.) The Committee, for purpose of hearing the
appeal, shall convene within two weeks of the date of receipt of the written
appeal and shall inform the Director of their decision in writing who will
then inform the student of the decision within one week of the hearing.

Federal Tax Law

The Tax Reform Act of 1986 contained provisions regarding the federal
income tax treatment of scholarships and grants. If a student receives
scholarships or grants from LaGrange College or any other source, that stu-
dent should be aware of the following:

Under the law, only qualified scholarships or grants may be excluded
from the recipient's gross income.

Qualified scholarships or grants are amounts awarded to degree seeking
candidates and used for tuition, required fees, books, supplies and equip-
ment required for courses of instruction. If the award specifies that any por-
tion of the scholarship or fellowship may not be used for these described
expenses or if it designates any portion of the award for purposes other
than those expenses just described (room, board, transportation, or living
expenses), those designated amounts are not qualified scholarships or
grants. Awards in excess of the described expenses are to be included in
the recipient's gross income (an unearned income).

Included within the definition of scholarships and grants and thus possi-
bly subject to taxation, are scholarships and grants awarded on the basis of
academic merit, talent, financial need or any other factors; state and federal
grants, including Pell Grant; athletic grant-in-aid; and tuition remissions or
reductions (resident assistant grant). Awards may come from LaGrange
College, from state or federal agencies, or from private organizations.

Any cost related to room and board for which the student receives
financial aid in the form of a grant or scholarship will be fully taxable.
Resident Assistant and SIMS Scholarship recipients will be affected by
these provisions.

It is important that the student keep copies of documents which will
establish the amounts of scholarships and the amount paid for tuition,
required fees, books, supplies and course-related equipment. Records
might include award letter from the Office of Student Financial Planning,
check stubs from scholarships, charge sheets from registration, receipts
from the Business Office and receipts for the purchase of books, supplies
and equipment.

Neither LaGrange College nor any other awarding agency is required to
report scholarships or grants to the Internal Revenue Service; reporting of
such income for tax purposes is the sole responsibility of the recipient.

Financial Planning/ 35

Estimated Tax

The grantor of a grant or scholarship does not withhold taxes. With no
withholding the student may be liable for the payment of estimated taxes.
Generally, you must make estimated tax payments if your estimated tax
payment will be $550 or more for the tax year. If you do not pay enough
estimated tax you may have to pay a penalty.

This information is not intended as tax advice and the student is encour-
aged to seek the assistance of a tax advisor.

For more information pertaining to the taxability of grants and scholar-
ships the student may wish to order publication 520 from the Internal
Revenue Service. The address is P.O. Box 25866, Richmond, VA 23289.

Verification of Financial Aid Application Data

Verification is the process by which the Office of Student Financial
Planning reviews reported application data against appropriate documents
utilized to complete the Need Analysis form to determine the accuracy of
the application.

Federal regulations require verification of at least 30% of the applica-
tions received. A federal edit system determines these applications which
should be verified. The Office of Student Financial Planning reserves the
right to verify any application not selected by the edit system.

No financial aid award will be made nor loan application certified until
the verification process has been completed.

Documents That May Be Required

1 . Federal tax returns for both the student and the parent for the previ-
ous tax year (W-2 forms issued by employers are not tax returns).

2. Year-end documents or written certification issued by the Social
Security Administration regarding annual amount of benefits paid to
a household.

3. Divorce decrees or proof of legal separation for married students.

4. Documents showing the amount of child support received in the
household of a divorced or separated student or parent.

5. Documents showing the amount of child support paid out for other
households in cases of divorce or separation.

6. A list of family members including age and post-secondary institu-
tion of each family member of the applicant.

7. Any source of income not reported on the tax return.

8. Benefits paid from the Department of Family and Children Services
for aid to families of dependent children.

9. A notarized statement that no tax return was filed and that no income
from work was earned.

36 / Financial Planning

Deadlines for Submitting Verification Documents

LaGrange College's Office of Student Financial Planning will notify the
applicant, upon receipt of the processed need analysis document, if spe-
cific documents are required. If no documents are required the applicant
will receive an official award notification. Documents must be received at
the College within 30 days of notification or no award will be processed.

Correction of Need Analysis Data

If errors are detected during the verification process, the applicant will be
notified of the errors and the procedure for reprocessing the Student Aid
Report (SAR). For applicants who are not eligible for Pell Grant and the errors
are within acceptable tolerances, these corrections will be made in-house.

Referrals

If an institution has reason to believe that the information on an applica-
tion is incorrect and has made a determined but unsuccessful effort to
resolve the problems, the institution may refer the case to the Department
of Education.

Suspected Fraud

Institutions are required to refer applicants who have engaged in fraud
or other criminal misconduct in connection with the aid application to the
Office of the Inspector General of the Department of Education, or, if more
appropriate, to a State or local law enforcement agency having jurisdiction
to investigate the matter. Fraud may exist if the institution has reason to
suspect:

false claims of independent student status;

false claims of citizenship or eligible noncitizen status;

use of false identities

forgery of signatures or certifications;

false certification (e.g., Drug-Free Workplace, educational, purpose);
and

false statements of income.

a pattern of mis-reported information from one year to the next.

unreported prior loans or grants, and receipt of concurrent full grants
during one award year.

Refund and Repayment Policies

Refund Policy

The refund policy for students withdrawing is outlined in the catalog
under "Refund of Fees" and ranges from 100% the first 7 days of classes to

Financial Planning/ 37

40% through the 28th day of class. A separate refund policy exists for first
quarter students (new freshmen or transfers) who receive Federal Title IV
assistance as required by the Higher Education Amendments of 1992.
Information is available in the Office of Student Financial Planning.

Georgia residents receiving credit for Tuition Equalization Grant and
HOPE must be continuously enrolled for 14 days beyond drop/add to
receive the funds. Course drops reducing courseload below 12 hours will
result in the loss of these funds.

Students on financial aid will not receive refunds until funds represent-
ing financial aid awards have been applied back to the respective
accounts. Refunds will be returned to the programs in the order indicated
in the "Allocation Policy" below.

LaGrange College does not advance any funds to students prior to the
date of registration for that period of enrollment.

Financial aid is considered to be used for direct educational costs
tuition and fees, room and board, if in College housing. Therefore, if a stu-
dent withdraws and is scheduled to receive a refund of tuition and fees,
funds will be returned to the appropriate program(s) from which the stu-
dent receives funds and the balance to the student.

Students who receive cash disbursements on or after registration for that
enrollment period will be assessed liability for repayment of the appropri-
ate percentage of the refund due the Title IV programs upon withdrawal,
expulsion, or suspension.

Repayment Policy

' Some programs have specific repayment provisions for students who
withdraw. If the refund is insufficient to cover the required repayment, it
will be the responsibility of the student to make the necessary repayment.

A student owing a repayment to any federally-sponsored student aid
program cannot receive any type of federally-supported student aid dis-
bursement for future enrollment periods unless repayment arrangements
have been made with the Office of Student Financial Planning.

Allocation Policy

1st to Federal Family Education Loan Program (FFELP)

2nd to Federal Direct Loans

3rd to Federal Perkins

4th to Federal Pell

5th to Federal SEOG

6th to Other Title IV Programs

7th to State Programs

8th to Institution Grants

9th to Student/Family

38 / Financial Planning

Resources of Financial Aid

SCHOLARSHIPS

All students who are accepted for admission to LaGrange College are
included in the applicant pool from which scholarship recipients are
selected. LaGrange College does not award athletic scholarships for any
athletic program. Academic scholarship recipients are notified in early
spring regarding awards and award amount for the subsequent school year.
All correspondence regarding scholarships should be with the Director of
the Office of Student Financial Planning and never with the donors.

Endowed Scholarships

The College has available, through the generosity of individuals, corpo-
rations, and foundations a number of endowed scholarships which are
administered by the Office of Student Financial Planning. These endowed
scholarships are listed below:

THE SARAH QUILLIAN BALDWIN SCHOLARSHIP FUND was estab-
lished in 1978 by Mr. and Mrs. Robert M. Turnell, other family and friends.
Mrs. Baldwin is an alumna, class of 1901 .

THE WILLIAM HENRY BELK SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1972
through the efforts of Mr. James G. Gallant and is awarded annually with
special consideration to Presbyterian students or graduates of Rabun-Gap
Nacoochee School.

THE CYNTHIA MAUDE BIRDSONG THOMPSON MEMORIAL
SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1990 by the Reverend Julian Frank
Thompson and his widow Mrs. Ruby Oakley Thompson in memory of the
Reverend Thompson's mother who attended LaGrange College from 1896
to 1898. This fund will provide annual scholarships to deserving students
who are of good character, show academic promise and who need finan-
cial assistance to attend LaGrange College.

THE J.K. BOATWRIGHT, JR. SCHOLARSHIP is awarded annually in
memory of J.K. Boatwright, Jr., a long time trustee and friend of the college.
The scholarship is awarded to students with good character who demon-
strate academic promise with preference to business and accounting
majors who have financial need.

THE ROSA WRIGHT BOYD SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1989 by
Mr. John W. Boyd, Sr., in his will, to memorialize his mother, Mrs. Rosa
Wright Boyd, an 1898 alumna. These scholarship funds will be awarded to
deserving students who need assistance to attend LaGrange College.

THE JACK P. BUCHANAN, SR. SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established
in 1994 by friends of Mr. Buchanan in honor of his many years of service
with the Department of Children and Youth Services. This award will be

Financial Planning/ 39

granted annually to a rising senior who has demonstrated achievement,
scholarship and involvement in working with troubled youth.

THE BUCHHEIDT SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in 1962
through initial gifts from the Public Welfare Foundation, Washington, D.C.
to assist students in receiving an education.

THE CAROLYN DRINKARD BURGESS SCHOLARSHIP FUND was

established in 1990 through gifts of alumni, friends and family of Mrs.
Burgess upon her retirement from the College after 30 years of service.

THE FLORA GLENN CANDLER SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1977
by Mr. Charles Howard Candler, Jr., in memory of his mother Mrs. Flora
Glenn Candler, an 1898 alumna of the College and the daughter of a
Methodist minister, the late Reverend Wilbur Fisk Glenn.

THE JOSEPHINE A. CASE ART SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1980.
Preference is given to a junior for excellence in art scholarship and
promise by "achievement" in that field. It was established by Mrs. Case
and her husband, the late Dr. Leland D. Case.

THE THOMAS WOODWARD CLIFTON ENDOWED SCHOLARSHIP

was established by the Board of Trustees of Walter Clifton Foundation, Inc.,
a Georgia nonprofit corporation ("Foundation") in 1989 in memory of Mr.
Thomas W. Clifton in light of the emphasis he placed on the support of
education. The recipient shall be selected based on qualifications in the
areas of academics, character, involvement in meaningful extra-curricular
activities and need for financial aid.

THE COKES CHAPEL MEN'S CLUB SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1983 by the Men's Club of the First United Methodist Church of
Sharpsburg, Georgia.

THE WELBORN B. CODY SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in
1990 by Mrs. Welborn B. Cody in memory of her late husband.

THE JEANETTE STRICKLAND COOK SCHOLARSHIP was established
by the will of Mr. Benjamin Lane Cook in 1 987. The scholarship is to bene-
fit a teacher in the LaGrange School System or the Troup County School
System who desires to further his/her education at LaGrange College.

THE EVELYN COPELAN ENDOWED SCHOLARSHIP FUND was estab-
lished in 1990 in memory of Miss Copelan, class of 1931, by her sister,
Mary Helen Copelan, class of 1935.

THE ADELIA MEYERS CORBIN SCHOLARSHIP was established in
memory of Mrs. Floyd Steward Corbin (Adelia Meyers), alumna, to provide
scholarships for young ladies of character, ability, and need, with special
consideration to students from Augusta, Georgia.

THE KATE HOWARD CROSS SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1981
by Virginia F. Prettyman of Chapel Hill, NC to honor Kate Howard Cross,

40 / Financial Planning

Professor of Latin at LaGrange College. Preference is given to history and
English majors.

THE EMILY FISHER CRUM SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in

1983 by Mr. and Mrs. Remer H. Crum of Atlanta. Mrs. Crum is an alumna,
class of 1935.

THE ESTELLE JONES CULPEPPER SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1978 by Dolly Jones House, class of 1915. Preference is given to students
preparing for the ministry in the United Methodist Church.

THE WILSON J. AND ESTELLE JONES CULPEPPER SCHOLARSHIP was

established in 1979 by Mrs. Calla Mae Cochran Culpepper. Estelle Jones
Culpepper was an alumna, class of '07.

THE C. WILLIAM CURRY SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in

1984 by Mrs. C.W. Curry as a tribute to Mr. Bill Curry, a faithful Trustee
and friend of the College.

THE META DICKINSON DANIEL MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP FUND

was established by her daughter, Virginia Daniel Weir, an alumna of
LaGrange College. Meta Dickinson Daniel was a magna cum laude gradu-
ate of LaGrange College, class of 1 893.

THE DEMPSEY SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in 1981 by Ruth
Dempsey, class of 1934, to honor Mr. and Mrs. R.A. Dempsey and R.L.
Dempsey.

THE MARY LEHMANN DODD SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1988
by family and friends in memory of Mary Lehmann Dodd, class of '29.

THE DUTTERA SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in 1991 by Mr.
James T. Duttera, class of 1967, and was funded through personal gifts by
Mr. Duttera and other family members.

THE GLEN LONG SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1989 by Mr. Glen
Long and will be awarded annually.

THE MAXIE C. ESTES SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in 1986
by friends and family of Dr. Estes and the LaGrange College Alumni
Association. Dr. Estes served LaGrange College from 1962 to 1986 as the
Chairman of the Division of Fine Arts and Professor of Speech and Drama.

THE THOMAS HERNDON ESTES MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP was

established in 1988 by Mrs. Lettie E. Cunningham in memory of her
brother to assist deserving students who need financial assistance to attend
LaGrange College.

THE LAURA TURNER FACKLER SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1980 by Dr. and Mrs. William B. Fackler, Jr., class of 1941, and is awarded
to a senior belonging to Kappa Delta Sorority. Criteria specified are schol-
arship, need and character which exemplifies the ideals of Kappa Delta.

Financial Planning/ 41

THE JOHN DARWIN FAVER MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP FUND was

established in 1983 by the Mattie T. Faver Trust.

THE ELIZABETH STEED FINDLEY SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1989 by Dr. Carter V. Findley and other family members to honor Elizabeth
Steed Findley, Class of 1930.

THE JOHN AND MARY FRANKLIN GRANT was established in 1975 by
the Alumni Association of LaCrange College and funded by the John and
Mary Franklin Foundation, Inc. The competitive scholarships are awarded
based on academic excellence in high school, SAT scores and recommen-
dations of character and personal qualities.

THE E.J. GRASSMANN TRUST SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in
1988 by the E.J. Grassmann Trust in memory of Mr. Grassmann. Scholarships
will be awarded based on academic promise, good character and demon-
strated financial need.

THE LINDA GREEN SCHOLARSHIP was established in memory of
Linda Green who died in an automobile accident. This scholarship is
awarded to a Troup High School student with preference to a nursing stu-
dent who will attend LaGrange College. Recipients are selected by the high
school and announced at graduation.

THE J.R. AND MARY EVELYN BELLE-ISLE GRIGGS ENDOWMENT
FUND was established by Mr. and Mrs. James R. Griggs, Jr., in 1980 for
scholarships for students majoring in business.

THE ROGER S. GUPTILL SCHOLARSHIP is presented annually in mem-
ory of the late Dr. Roger Guptill, minister, teacher, and Christian gentle-
man, to a senior class student majoring in religion and preparing for
full-time church service.

THE MARY QUILLIAN HARRELL SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1974 in memory of Mary Elizabeth Quillian Harrell by Dr. Luther Alonzo
Harrell, her husband, and her surviving children, The Reverend and Mrs.
Ralph Moss, Miss Marie Lilia Harrell and Dr. and Mrs. William Asbury
Harrell. Mrs. Harrell was a graduate of the class of 1899. Preference is
given to children of a South Georgia minister.

THE ELIZABETH CARLOCK HARRIS SCHOLARSHIP FUND was estab-
lished in 1993 by Mrs. Elizabeth Carlock Harris, class of 1961, and her
husband, Joe Frank Harris, former Governor of the State of Georgia.

THE MAMIE LARK HENRY DRAMA SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1978 to honor Mamie Lark Henry, wife of Chancellor Waights G. Henry,
Jr., former President of LaGrange College.

THE EVELYN POWELL HOFFMAN DRAMA SCHOLARSHIP was estab-
lished in 1979 by the family as a memorial. Mrs. Hoffman was a graduate

42 / Financial Planning

of the class of 1930. This scholarship is awarded annually to freshman
through audition.

THE HOLMES SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in 1972 to pro-
vide moneys to the general scholarship fund.

THE RALPH AND NITA HOWARD SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1990 by Mr. Ralph W. Howard, Jr. to assist a deserving person who must
have financial assistance in order to attend college.

THE FORREST C. JOHNSON, JR. MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP, estab-
lished by his wife, Memory Southerland Johnson, an alumna, is awarded to
a Troup High School graduate who will attend LaGrange College.

THE JULIA VERNON KELLER AND WILLIAM WATES KELLER ENDOW-
MENT FUND was established in 1993 by Mr. and Mrs. William Wates
Keller of LaGrange. Income from the endowment is to benefit deserving
graduates of LaGrange High School who are majoring in Education.

THE VIRGINIA SPEEGLE KYLE SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1989
by Mr. Joseph H. Kyle in honor of his wife. Awards will be made to meet
the needs of deserving students who must have financial assistance to
attend LaGrange College.

THE LAGRANGE COLLEGE GENERAL SCHOLARSHIP FUND provides
general scholarships and grants to deserving students based upon need.

THE LAGRANGE COLLEGE RELIGION DEPARTMENT SCHOLARSHIPS

were established in 1985 by W. Roland Yarbrough, Jr., for a student
demonstrating need who is majoring in religion.

THE MARY HUNTER LINDSEY SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1976, provided by The Reverend William Oliver Lindsey, Sr. in memory of
his wife, Mary H. Hunter Lindsey, class of 1914. This scholarship is
awarded to Methodist students entering their senior year in college and
who are preparing for the full-time ministry.

THE WILLIAM R. AND MABEL LOYD ZACHRY ERNEST T. AND
MARY LOYD SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in December, 1991,
by family members in memory of Mabel and William Zachry and E.T. and
Mary Loyd to assist in filling the needs of deserving students to attend
LaGrange College.

THE FRANKIE ARNOLD LYLE SCHOLARSHIP was endowed by the will
of Mrs. Frankie M. Arnold Lyle, class of 1891. Special consideration is
given to students from Jonesboro High School and Clayton County.

THE FELECIA E. MADDOX MUSIC SCHOLARSHIP was endowed in
1990 under the will of her husband, George M. Maddox. The fund is
intended to give financial assistance to deserving students of music.

THE MATTOX-ZACHRY SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1987 in
memory of Kenrick Ware Mattox, Sr., J. Low Zachry and Janie Nail Zachry,

Financial Planning 1 43

and is awarded to students with academic promise and good character with
preference to the last recipient if she/he maintains a 3.0 cumulative GPA.

THE LOUISE W. MCCOOK MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP FUND was

established in 1985 in memory of Louise W. McCook, wife of Dr. C. Frank
McCook, Professor of Religion.

THE EUDORA AND WALKER MCGARITY SCHOLARSHIP was estab-
lished in 1987 by Mrs. Eudora McCarity and daughter Carole McGarity
Jacobs, class of 1958.

THE WILLIAM LUTHER MCMINN, JR. SCHOLARSHIP was established
in 1986 by Mr. and Mrs. William L. McMinn, Sr. in memory of their son
who died in an accident on May 15, 1986, while a student at the College.
This scholarship is awarded annually to a student who demonstrates aca-
demic promise and financial need.

THE BETTY YORK MEYERS SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1985 by
Mr. and Mrs. Alex B. Meyers, class of 1951, in honor of the United Methodist
Women of Rose Hill United Methodist Church in Columbus, Georgia.

THE C. LAVERN MOBLEY SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in
memory of The Reverend C. Lavern Mobley, a Methodist minister of the
North Georgia Conference of the United Methodist Church.

THE POLLY SMITH MOORE SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1988
by Polly Smith Moore, Class of 1927.

THE HORTENSE HUGHES MOORE SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1988 by Hortense Hughes Moore, Class of 1927.

THE MR. AND MRS. THOMAS H. NORTHERN SCHOLARSHIP FUND

was established in 1947 to provide moneys to the general scholarship fund.

THE OAK GROVE ENDOWED SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established
in 1993 through gifts by the Oak Grove Foundation.

THE FRANCES WADDELL PAFFORD SCHOLARSHIP is awarded annu-
ally in memory of this alumna, class of 1914, and was funded by Mr.
W.E. Pafford.

THE PIKE SCHOLARSHIP was established by Mrs. Ruth Pike Key in
memory of her father and mother, Christian Nathaniel Pike and Adella
Hunter Pike, (1894), on December 29, 1953, and is awarded to Baptist or
Methodist students in the senior year who are majoring in religion or reli-
gious education, or who plan to enter a full-time church vocation.
Selection of recipients is made by the Department of Religion, the
Administration concurring.

THE MARGARET ADGER PITTS SCHOLARSHIP was established in honor
of Miss Margaret Pitts to provide scholarships for sons and daughters of
ordained ministers, $1000 to dependents of Methodist ministers appointed

44 / Financial Planning

by the Bishops of both the North and South Georgia Conference and $300
annually to dependents of ministers of other denominations and states.

THE RANDY POLLARD SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1982 by the
LaGrange College Alumni Association in memory of Dr. C. Randy Pollard,
Class of 1960.

THE PEARL WHITE POTTS SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1981 by
her daughters, Mrs. Amy P. Burgess and Mrs. Edna Potts. Pearl White Potts
is an alumna class of 1894. Recipients will be selected by Mr. James
Harlain Fuller IV and Forrest Clark Johnson III. Preference will be given to
descendants of Mrs. Pearl White Potts.

THE MILTON RATNER SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in
December, 1991, by a gift from the Milton M. Ratner Foundation to assist
students with demonstrated financial need.

THE FRANK M. AND JOHN H. RIDLEY SCHOLARSHIP FUND was

established in 1985 through a gift by brothers, Mr. Frank M. Ridley and Dr.
John H. Ridley.

THE JOHN L. SHIBLEY ARTHUR M. HICKS SCHOLARSHIP was

established in 1986 through gifts from family and friends of Dr. Shibley and
Dr. Hicks, both professors of thirty-five years at LaGrange College.
Preference is given to a science major.

THE JAMES H. AND TERRELLIS P. SMITH SCHOLARSHIP was estab-
lished in 1976 with preference to descendants of the donor's maternal
grandparents.

THE HANKS SPINKS SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1988 by Mr.
and Mrs. Henry C. Spinks of LaGrange in memory of their son.

THE G. PHILLIP STEWART SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1987 by
Susan Boleyn, '73, in memory of her husband Phillip Stewart.

THE RAYMOND E. SULLIVAN SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established
in 1984 by Mr. Raymond Eugene Sullivan.

THE TRAYLOR SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in 1994 in mem-
ory of C. Frank Traylor, Sr. and C. Frank Traylor, Jr. through gifts from family
and friends in the LaGrange area and the support of the LaGrange Noon
Lions Club.

THE JESSIE RAY WARNOCK SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in
1988 by Mrs. Jessie Ray Warnock, class of 1927, to assist needy and
deserving students to attend LaGrange College.

THE THELMA C. AND BENJAMIN M. WOODRUFF SCHOLARSHIP

was established in 1985 by Mr. and Mrs. Benjamin M. Woodruff, (Thelma
Chunn, Class of 1922), and is awarded to students who demonstrate finan-
cial need.

Financial Planning / 45

ANNUAL SCHOLARSHIP GIFTS

THE JEANNE SELLS ADAMS SCHOLARSHIP is awarded annually in
memory of this alumna, class of '53 and funded by the Walter Clifton
Foundation.

THE INGRID BERGMAN SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1983 in the
memory of the Swedish actress by Mr. and Mrs. Clayton Callaway. The
scholarship is for a rising junior or senior theater arts major with serious
commitment to the theater and the most promise in the field of drama.

THE MARCUS "MARK" GEWINNER DRAMA SCHOLARSHIP was

established by the College in 1993 to honor Marcus Gewinner, former pro-
fessor of psychology and music. This scholarship is awarded annually to a
theater arts freshman by audition.

THE KATHRYNE HAYS SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1992 by this
alumna, class of '43, and is awarded annually to two students who demon-
strate need.

THE OAK GROVE COMMUNITY SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1987 and is funded annually by the Oak Grove Foundation. Preference is
given to students from the Oak Grove Community or to Troup County resi-
dents who have good character, academic promise, demonstrated need
and who will enter the nursing profession or ordained ministry.

THE PATRICIA D. SALTER SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1993 by
Dr. Salter, a LaGrange dentist, to assist single mothers pursuing their col-
lege education.

THE MATTIE NEWTON TRAYLOR SCHOLARSHIP was established by
the Mattie Traylor Sunday School Class of the First United Methodist
Church for a ministerial student at LaGrange College.

THE LETTIE PATE WHITEHEAD FOUNDATION SCHOLARSHIP AND
GRANTS are awarded annually to deserving women students from the
southeast who demonstrate need.

THE ALMONESE BROWN CLIFTON WILLIAMS SCHOLARSHIP is

awarded annually in honor of this alumna, class of '56 and is funded by
the Walter Clifton Foundation.

ORGANIZATIONAL SCHOLARSHIPS

Some organizations give financial assistance to students directly or upon
recommendation of the Director of Student Financial Planning. Information
may be obtained from the Office of Students Financial Planning at the
College.

THE CHEVRON FRESHMAN SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1985 at
LaGrange College. Student must reside in Georgia and must be a mathe-
matics or science major who demonstrates ability and interest in these

46 / Financial Planning

areas. Heavy weighting is given to leadership and significant participation
in extracurricular activities at the high school level.

THE LAGRANGE MOULDING COMPANY SCHOLARSHIP is funded
annually by the LaGrange Moulding Company. Preference is given to
Troup County residents.

THE NATIONAL PURCHASING ASSOCIATION SCHOLARSHIP is

funded annually by the Purchasing Management Association of West
Georgia, located in West Georgia.

THE UNITED METHODIST SCHOLARSHIPS Seven $500 annual grants
are made to students by the General Board of Higher Education of the
United Methodist Church and is limited to students in the top 20% of their
high school graduating class.

OUTSIDE ASSISTANCE

The following agencies and foundations are interested in students from
the region and offer assistance on a limited basis to students of character,
achievement and need. The student should apply directly to the agency or
foundation.

THE TY COBB EDUCATIONAL FOUNDATION was established by the
late Tyrus R. Cobb to assist capable, deserving students who demonstrate
need and who reside in Georgia. Scholarships are granted for a period of
one academic year but may be renewed for one or more additional years.
Scholarships are granted to undergraduate students beyond the freshman
year and to students pursuing graduate degrees in law, medicine, veteri-
nary medicine, and dentistry. The Ty Cobb Educational Foundation, P.O.
Box 725, Forest Park, Georgia 30051 .

THE GEORGIA VOCATIONAL REHABILITATION PROGRAM is funded
by the State of Georgia and is designed to assist handicapped students.
Contact the State of Georgia Division of Vocational Rehabilitation Services
in your district.

THE MILLIKEN SCHOLARSHIP is awarded through the Georgia
Foundation for Independent College, Inc. for Region III. Applications are
made through the plant at which the student or their parent works with
recipients selected by the GFIC.

THE JAMES LEON AND MYRTICE MARIE K. PEED SCHOLARSHIP for

students preparing for a career as a minister or missionary and who are res-
idents of the South Georgia Conference of the United Methodist Church.
Georgia United Methodist Commission on Higher Education and Campus
Ministry, 159 Ralph McGill Blvd, NE, Suite 102, Atlanta, Georgia 30365.

PICKETT AND HATCHER EDUCATIONAL FOUNDATION This founda-
tion provides loan assistance to residents of the southeastern states who are

Financial Planning/ 47

enrolled as full-time undergraduates in a degree curriculum other than law,
medicine, or the ministry. Applicants must have no outstanding educa-
tional loans. Pickett and Hatcher Educational Fund, Inc., P.O. Box 8169,
Columbus, Georgia 31908-8169.

THE GEORGE E. SIMS, JR. NURSING SCHOLARSHIP, funded by the
Fuller E. Callaway Foundation, is administered by the West Georgia
Medical Center and may be available to qualified LaGrange College
Nursing Students. The applications deadline for the Sims Scholarship varies
each year but is generally in early March. Students interested in obtaining
scholarship information and an application should contact the West
Georgia Medical Center administrative office, (706) 882-1411 or write the
hospital at 1514 Vernon Road, LaGrange, Georgia 30240.

UNITED METHODIST LOAN PROGRAM provides loan assistance to
members of the United Methodist Church based on "need." Brochures and
applications may be obtained from the Office of Student Financial Planning.

COMPETITIVE SCHOLARSHIPS

THE CANDLER SCHOLARSHIP FUND provides scholarship assistance
to students with a predicted grade point average of 3.25 or better. These
scholarships are renewable.

THE LAGRANGE COLLEGE RESIDENT ASSISTANT SCHOLARSHIP

Recipients are selected by application from currently enrolled students
who desire these positions. Applications are taken by the Dean of Student
Development and the Dormitory Directors. Recipients are selected in the
spring for the next school year.

LOANS

The following loan funds may be available for emergency situations
through the Business Office. For any other student loan the student should
contact the Office of Student Financial Planning for other loan program
information.

LOUISE PHARR BAYLEN LOAN FUND Preference given to'nursing
students.

STELLA BRADFIELD LOAN FUND was established by relatives in her
memory.

RUBY CROWE LOAN FUND was established by friends. Preference will
be given to senior women students.

DAVIDSON LOAN FUND was established by Mrs. J.C. Davidson.

THE MARTHA DIXON GLANTON LOAN FUND was established by
Mr. Henry D. Glanton in memory of his mother.

48 / Financial Planning

NADINE CRAWFORD SPENCER LOAN FUND was established by Mr.
and Mrs. W. Mark Whitehead in memory of Mrs. Whitehead's mother.

LAURA H. WITHAM LOAN FUND was established by William S.
Witham.

FEDERAL FINANCIAL AID FUNDS

FEDERAL PELL GRANT. This grant is designated for first time undergrad-
uate students working toward a bachelor's degree. The amount of the grant
is determined by the cost of attendance less the family contribution shown
on the Student Aid Report and the student's enrollment status. A full-time
student will receive the maximum Federal Pell Grant award based on
appropriation for the fiscal year. The maximum Federal Pell Grant award is
set at $2300 for the 1994-95 academic year. A student who enrolls as less
than a full-time student may be eligible to receive a prorated amount based
on their courseload.

FEDERAL SUPPLEMENTAL EDUCATIONAL OPPORTUNITY GRANT.

This grant is designated for students working on the first undergraduate
degree with exceptional financial need. Preference goes to students who
are eligible for Federal Pell Grant. Students who plan to participate in the
LaGrange College Studies Abroad Program should check with the Office of
Student Financial Planning to determine if they might be eligible to receive
Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant funds to assist with
paying for this program.

FEDERAL WORK STUDY PROGRAM (FWSP). Students who demon
strate financial need and are otherwise eligible may work part time to earn
money to help pay their education expenses while attending college.
Students are paid the minimum wage and normally are limited to working
a maximum of 15 hours per week. Jobs are available in the various admin-
istrative offices, academic divisions, and community service agencies.

FEDERAL PERKINS LOAN. These loans are available to qualified stu-
dents who demonstrate financial need. Repayment of five percent (5%)
interest and principal begins six (6) months after a student graduates or oth-
erwise ceases to be classified as having half-time student status. This loan
program has cancellation provisions. Contact the Office of Student
Financial Planning for additional information.

FEDERAL STAFFORD LOAN. This program enables all eligible students
to borrow regardless of income. The Stafford Loan program is comprised of
two loans the subsidized Stafford and the unsubsidized Stafford. The
subsidized Stafford eligibility is based on financial need, and interest
accruing while the student is enrolled at least half-time is paid by the gov-
ernment. The interest rate on subsidized and unsubsidized Stafford loans is

Financial Planning/ 49

a variable rate capped at 8.25 percent. Eligible lenders are banks, credit
unions, or savings and loans.

The unsubsidized Stafford is available to students who do not qualify, in
whole or part, for the subsidized Federal Stafford. The terms of an unsubsi-
dized Stafford are the same as those of the subsidized Staffords with the
exception of interest payments. Unsubsidized Stafford borrowers must pay
all of the interest accruing during the time they are enrolled in-school, and
during grade periods before repayment and authorized deferment. The bor-
rower, monthly or quarterly payments and authorized deferment. The bor-
rower, however, has the option to pay interest during those periods by
(1) making monthly or quarterly payments to the lender or (2) the borrower
and lender may agree to add the interest to the principal of the loan (this is
capitalization).

Annual maximum awards from the Federal Stafford Loan program is
based upon the borrower's year in school. Freshmen may borrow $2625;
sophomores, $3500; juniors and seniors, $5500. The aggregate limit for an
undergraduate degree is $23,000. The grace period for Federal Stafford is
six (6) months.

Effective July 1, 1994, the Supplemental Loans for Students, a loan pro-
gram for independent students, will be eliminated. This program has been
absorbed into the unsubsidized Stafford loan program. Independent under-
graduate students who have not completed the first two years of their pro-
gram of study are eligible to receive an additional $4,000 from the
unsubsidized Stafford program. Independent undergraduates who have
completed two years of their program may borrow an additional $5,000
from the unsubsidized Stafford loan program.

FEDERAL PARENT LOAN FOR UNDERGRADUATE STUDENT (FPLUS).

This loan program enables parents to borrow on behalf of their undergrad-
uate dependent children. Federal PLUS loan borrowers must be proven
credit worthy. A Federal PLUS may not exceed a student's estimated cost of
attendance minus any financial assistance the student has been or will be
awarded during the period of enrollment. Loan checks are made co-
payable and mailed directly to the school for recertification of the student's
eligibility, then mailed to the parent for endorsement. The interest rate on
the Federal PLUS is variable rate capped at 9 percent.

LOAN REPAYMENT

Student loans are serious obligations. Student loans are the only form of
financial assistance that must be repaid at some specified time in the
future. There is no penalty for pre-payment on any Federal Family
Education Loan Program or Perkins Loan during the grace period. There is
a 10 year maximum repayment schedule.

50 / Financial Planning

writ Borrowed

Sample Repayment Schedule
Based on 1 year repayment schedule

5% 7% 8%

9%

10%

$ 1000

$ 40

$ 50

$ 50

$ 50

$ 50

2000

40

50

50

50

50

3000

40

50

50

50

50

4000

42

50

50

51

53

5000

53

58

61

63

66

6000

64

70

73

76

79

7000

74

81

85

89

93

8000

85

93

97

101

105

9000

95

105

109

114

119

10000

106

116

121

127

132

11000

117

128

133

139

145

12000

127

139

146

152

159

13000

138

151

158

165

172

14000

148

163

170

177

185

15000

159

174

182

190

198

16000

170

186

194

207

211

17000

180

197

206

215

225

18000

191

209

219

228

238

19000

202

221

231

241

251

20000

212

232

243

253

264

STATE STUDENT ASSISTANCE PROGRAMS

To be eligible for assistance from the State of Georgia: (1) The student
must be a bona fide Georgia resident, one who has lived in the State of
Georgia for 12 consecutive months prior to enrollment and who lives in
the state for some purpose other than attending a Georgia institution of
higher learning. (2) All State Assistance Programs require that a student be
classified as a full-time student (one who enrolls for a minimum of 1 2 quar-
ter hours). (3) The student must be a U.S. citizen or classified as a perma-
nent resident alien. (4) The student must not be receiving a scholarship or
grant from or through any state agency other than Georgia. (5) The student
must be enrolled in good standing or accepted for admission in an eligible
non-profit post-secondary college or school located in Georgia.

GEORGIA STATE TUITION EQUALIZATION GRANT. The GTEG pro
gram provides non-repayable grants to eligible Georgia residents who are
either attending approved private (independent) colleges in Georgia or cer-
tain out-of-state four year public colleges bordering Georgia. The annual
award amount is contingent upon funding by the State Legislature. This
grant is $1,000 for the 1994-95 academic year.

HOPE Help Outstanding Pupils Educationally provides financial
assistance to Georgia residents at any Georgia postsecondary college or

Financial Planning/ 51

university or technical institute. Students attending a private college or uni-
versity in Georgia who are eligible for the Georgia Tuition Equalization
Grant of $1,000 per academic year may receive an additional $1,000
HOPE award. Full-time enrollment is required, but high school graduation
date, grade point average, and family income are not considered.

GEORGIA STATE STUDENT INCENTIVE GRANT. The SSIG program
provides non-repayable grants to students who demonstrate financial need
as determined by an approved need analysis form.

LAW ENFORCEMENT PERSONNEL DEPENDENTS GRANT. The LEPD
program provides non-repayable grants of up to $2,000 per academic year
to eligible Georgia residents who are dependent children of Georgia law
enforcement officer, prison guards, or firemen who were permanently dis-
abled or killed in the line of duty. The LEPD Grant is also payable during the
summer. Additional information may be required to document eligibility.

GSFA SERVICE CANCELLATION LOAN PROGRAM

The Georgia Student Finance Authority (GSFA), a Federal Family
Education Loan Program, offers service cancellation benefits on eligible
Federal Stafford loans. GSFA offers these loans to assist Georgia residents
who are pursuing degrees in areas where there is a critical shortage of
qualified professionals.

Both subsidized and unsubsidized Stafford loans are eligible for service
cancellation. Applicants must meet federal eligibility regulations governing
the Federal Stafford Loan Program and GSFA policies concerning resi-
dency, program of study, grade point average, etc. There is a grace period,
prescribed by law, before the repayment begins.

Eligible Cancellation areas offered at LaGrange College are nursing and
teacher education fields Math or Science Education and Middle Grades
Education with concentrations in Math and/or Science.

Appropriations for service cancellation loans are limited. Therefore, appli-
cants should apply early. Application procedures and eligibility requirements
are available in the Office of Student Financial Planning.

INSTITUTIONAL GRANT AND WORK PROGRAMS

GRANT IN AID is designated for undergraduate degree seeking students
with preference given to those who register for 1 5 or more hours per quar-
ter. Criteria for awarding will be financial need, academic promise and
achievement and talent. Students will be monitored quarterly for GPA, stu-
dents who fail to maintain a minimum 2.0 will have subsequent awards
canceled until such time as the 2.0 cumulative GPA has been reached. The
student must contact the Office of Student Financial Planning to request
reinstatement of eligibility. These requests will be considered on a fund
availability basis.

52 / Financial Planning

WORK AID is a college administered work program whereby students
may reduce the costs of their college expenses through employment on
campus.

OFF CAMPUS EMPLOYMENT

Local businesses employ students in part-time jobs. Such employment
is usually arranged by the student and nor the College. The office of Career
Planning and Placement maintains current job opportunity information
and can advise students concerning employment opportunities and
responsibilities.

STUDENT FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE
FOR GRADUATE STUDENTS

Students accepted for admission to the MBA or MEd program may be eli-
gible to borrow $8500 per year through the Federal Stafford Loan Program,
provided they meet the following requirements: (1) be a United States citizen
or a permanent resident alien; (2) enrolled or accepted for enrollment as at
least a half-time student; (3) be in good standing and making Satisfactory
Academic Progress; (4) be free of any obligation to repay a defaulted
Guaranteed Student Loan/Federal Insured Student Loan; and (5) not owe a
refund on a Pell Grant, Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant or State
Student Incentive Grant. For additional information, see the section on
"Federal Stafford loan".

The maximum cumulative loans a student may borrow is $65,500,
including undergraduate loans.

Contact the Office of Student Financial Planning for further information
and an application.

VETERANS ASSISTANCE

LaGrange College is approved for Veterans Benefits as an institution of
higher learning. Eligible students can receive the appropriate benefits while
enrolled. The laws which apply to these educational benefits are published
in Title 38, United States Code: "Chapter 31 provides benefits for veterans
with service-connected disabilities. Chapter 35 provides benefits for sons,
daughters, spouses, and widowed spouses of veterans who have died in
service or as a result of a service-connected disability; who have become
permanently and totally disabled as a result of service-connected disability;
who have died while disabled; or who have been listed as missing in
action, captured, detained, or interned in line of duty for more than 90
days." Chapter 1 06 provides benefits for members of the Selected Reserve
such as Army Reserve, Naval Reserve, Air Force Reserve, Marine Corps
Reserve, Army National Guard, Air National Guard, and the Coast Guard

Financial Planning/ 53

Reserve. Chapters 30 and 32 provide benefits tor eligible veterans who
contributed to the educational program.

Disabled veterans should report directly to the Veteran Administration
Office for information and application for benefits. Others may inquire and
apply for benefits in the Registrar's Office with the VA Certifying Officer at
the College.

54/

/55

STUDENT DEVELOPMENT

Student Development Staff is concerned with providing those services
which assist individuals in their personal growth. Their purpose is to pro-
vide assistance which facilitates the development of the total person. At
LaGrange College, the emphasis is upon the intellectual, social, physical
and spiritual development of each student.

"Student Services," the term most frequently used to describe Student
Development Services, involves a wide variety of programs and activities.
The broad range of available services is an outgrowth of complex student
needs: orientation, activities, student government, organizations, health
services, wellness program, parking, discipline, leadership development,
personal counseling, career development and placement, fraternity and
sorority socials, and all residence programming. Student Development staff
are committed to creating the most positive climate possible within which
personal growth and development occur.

Aims of Student Development Services

To facilitate the transition from high school to college.

To develop and sustain through student involvement activities, organiza-
tions and services a campus life encouraging the cultural, intellectual,
social, physical and religious development of all students.

To assist students in discovering life goals and exploring career opportunities.

To provide an opportunity for a student's educational experience to be
as personally meaningful as possible.

To create an environment which stimulates qualities of self-discipline
and personal responsibility.

To provide a suitable context in which the student can explore new
ideas, skills and life styles, thus gaining the insight and experience neces-
sary to make intelligent choices.

To provide opportunity for the student to develop the understanding and
skills required for responsible participation in a democratic community
through involvement in self-government.

To serve a supervisory role in campus community disciplinary concerns;
to develop, with campus community involvement, and to distribute the
necessary rules and regulations for a harmonious and productive college
community.

To meditate, where necessary, conflicts between individuals and cam-
pus community standards.

To provide a comfortable, clean, safe living environment that enhances
the personal growth as well as the academic pursuits of resident students.

56 / Student Development

Residence Programs

RESIDENT CLASSIFICATION

Freshmen, sophomores and juniors taking ten or more hours are
required to live in college housing, so long as appropriate campus housing
is available. Office of Student Development may exempt a student for one
of the following reasons:

1 . The student is 21 years of age or over at the time of registration;

2. The student is married and living with spouse within a radius of fifty
miles;

3. The student is residing exclusively with parents or legal guardian
within a radius of fifty miles; or

4. The student is a veteran with at least two years of active military
service.

A senior is defined as a student who has successfully completed at least
135 quarter hours of academic work and who has completed the general
requirements. The Student Development Office will have the final decision
on all requests for exemption.

Students are assigned rooms of their choice in so far as facilities permit.
(Roommates are assigned by mutual preference whenever possible.) The
college reserves the right of final approval of all room and residence hall
assignments. Also, the college reserves the right to move a student from one
room or residence hall to another room or residence hall during the year.

ROOM DEPOSIT

A room and tuition deposit of $150 is required of all resident students.
The room deposit ($100) is not a prepayment to be applied to residence
hall charges but will remain on deposit with the college to be refunded,
provided the student's account with the college is cleared, upon one of the
following: (1) change of status from resident student to commuter student,
(2) formal withdrawal, or (3) graduation. The room reservation/damage
deposit serves as a room reservation while the student is not occupying
college housing and is refundable if a student cancels his/her reservation
by the following dates: July 15 for fall quarter, December 15 for winter
quarter, March 15 for spring quarter. It serves as a damage deposit while
the student is occupying college housing and is refundable when the stu-
dent leaves college housing minus any unpaid assessments and/or any debt
owed to the College. Complete residence information and regulations can
be found in "Housing on the Hill" the residence hall guidebook available
from the Student Development Office.

Student Development I 57

RESIDENCE GOVERNMENT/ACTIVITIES

Each housing unit has a hall council which functions as a governing
body and also as a coordinating committee to plan activities within the res-
idence halls such as open houses, movie nights, decorating contests and
other special events.

Student Government Activities

The Student Government Association exists to serve as a medium for
student expressions, to coordinate campus activities, to promote good citi-
zenship and to govern within the parameters granted by the President of
the College. The SGA is an important part of student life. Upon acceptance
into the college, a student automatically becomes a member of the associa-
tion. All students are encouraged to become active members, so that the
association is a truly representative body of student thought and opinion,
voicing the needs and concerns of the student body.

The SGA is charged with responsibility of planning and presenting stu-
dent programs. They sponsor concerts, dances, movies, ski trips and many
other special events. Student publications are supported by the SGA; these
include the newspaper, yearbook and magazine.

All clubs and organizations are sanctioned by the SGA. These include:

Social Sororities

Social Fraternities

Service Clubs

Religious Organizations

Honorary Organizations

Alpha Omicron Pi
Kappa Delta
Phi Mu

Delta Tau Delta
Kappa Sigma
Pi Kappa Phi

Habitat for Humanity

Hilltoppers

VIP

Baptist Student Union
InterFaith Council
Wesley Fellowship

Alpha Mu Gamma (language)
Alpha Psi Omega (drama)
Delta Mu Delta (business

administration)
Pi Gamma Mu (social science)
Sigma (science-math)
Phi Alpha theta (history)
Omicron Delta Kappa (leadership)
Omicron Delta Epsilon (economics)
Phi Tau Chi (religion)

58 / Student Development

Psychology Honor Society
Sigma Tau Delta (English)

Departmental/Special CRIS Campus Recreation and

Interest Groups Intramural Sports

Student Nurses Association

International Students Club

LaGrange Singers

LaGrange College Wind Ensemble

Art Student League

Business & Economics Society

Student Education Association

ABC Association of Black

Collegians
Association of Computer Machinery
German Club Deutschen Klub

Student Publications The Quadrangle (yearbook)

The Hilltop Newspaper (paper)
The Scroll (magazine)

Hilltopics, the student handbook, is published by the SGA and contains
guidelines and regulations for successful campus life.

Athletic Program

LaGrange College athletic teams are known as The Panthers. College
colors are red and black. Competitive teams are fielded against teams from
other similar size institutions in women's soccer, volleyball, Softball and
tennis and men's baseball, basketball, soccer and tennis. It is the philoso-
phy of LaGrange College that the team participants are attending college
primarily for a quality education, and no athletic scholarships are offered.
The student athlete receives praise and recognition from peers, faculty, and
administration. The coaching staff is an assemblage of highly qualified
teachers who stress the educational process of the College.

LaGrange College is committed to a full program of non-scholarship ath-
letics that encourages the student-athlete to reap the benefits of education-
ally sound activity that not only encourages but actively promotes a strong
academic regime. Students are given the opportunity to participate fully in
their given sport and to interface with other teams locally, statewide, and
regionally. Not only are their physical skills enhanced but their human rela-
tions skills are broadened and focused by competitive challenges of the
body and mind.

The athletic program is affiliated with the National Association of
Intercollegiate Athletics (NAIA) and is assigned to District 25. This affilia-
tion permits LaGrange College and its student athletes to receive recogni-
tion for their participation in state, regional and national sporting events.

Student Development/ 59

Campus Recreation and Intramural Sports (CRIS)

The Campus Recreation and Intramural Sports program provides oppor-
tunities for wholesome recreation and competition among members of the
campus community. Teams representing campus organizations and inde-
pendents compete in organized tournaments and events throughout the
year. Competitive events include flag football, volleyball, basketball
(Regulation, 3 on 3, H*0*R*S*E), domino's dash, softball, badminton, ten-
nis, water volleyball, inner tube water polo, inner tube basketball and
pickle ball. Winners of the campus tournaments in some of these events
are eligible to represent LaGrange College in state or regional tournaments.
Special awards are presented to the men's and women's groups with the
highest participation rates and best record for the entire year. In addition,
male and female "Athletes of the Year" are selected.

Many opportunities are available for recreational use of the facilities in
the LaGrange College Aquatics Complex. The following are available:
enjoying recreational swimming and lap swimming all year round in the
indoor pool; using the aquarius water work-out stations or taking a water
aerobics or aqua exercise class (non-credit); perfecting diving technique on
the 1 -meter and 3-meter diving boards; or simply relaxing and enjoying the
atmosphere of the outdoor leisure pool.

The facilities and equipment of the Physical Education Department also
are available for student recreational use when these are not scheduled for
instructional, athletic, or intramural sports use. The use of outdoor equip-
ment (canoes, sailboats, backpacks, tents, stoves, lanterns) requires the
payment of a small deposit which is refunded upon the safe return of the
equipment. The weight room, gymnasium, and pools are available for stu-
dent/faculty/staff use during posted hours. A valid LaGrange College ID is
necessary for admittance to all facilities.

Religious Life Program

College is a time of exciting intellectual and social growth. Students
wrestle with new ideas, discover new interests, and explore ever broaden-
ing horizons. College can also be a time for real spiritual growth. Set in the
transition between youth and adulthood, college offers students a chance
to examine their faith, to assess what is important to them and to forge a
system of values that will sustain them through their adult years.

Growing out of its history of service and its affiliation with the United
Methodist Church, LaGrange is committed to creating an environment that
encourages spiritual growth and development. As a result, the College
offers a number of opportunities for students and faculty to celebrate life
and explore God's intention for human living. Included in these opportuni-
ties are occasions for worship, fellowship, and service. Chapel services are
scheduled every Tuesday and Thursday at 12:00 noon, and there are spe-

60 / Student Development

cial worship services throughout the year. The College employs a full-time
chaplain who is available for counseling and is interested in promoting ser-
vice and fellowship among the constituents of the campus community.

Programs, Exhibitions and Forum Lectures

A balanced and comprehensive program of lectures, music perform-
ances, dramatic presentations, workshops and other activities contribute to
student enrichment. Wednesdays from 11:00 a.m. until 12:20 p.m. are
reserved for programs, exhibitions and forum lectures.

Traditional Activities

Fall Festival

Honors day May Day
Dorm Daze
Greek Week
Black History Week
Quadrangle Dance

Community '94

International Week

Fall weekend featuring concert,
parade and culminating with
crowning of Queen

Spring Fling packed with activities,
step-sing and concert

Quarterly events planned exclu-
sively for residence students

Week of activities centering around
campus Greek life

Week of activities focusing on Black
Heritage

Winter Formal scheduled around
Valentine's Day

Special event that commemorates
the College as a caring/sharing
community

Week set aside to recognize cultural
diversity of the campus community

Student Conduct

LaGrange College, as a church-related college, is committed to an hon-
orable and seemly standard of conduct. As an educational institution the
college is concerned not only with the formal in-class education of its stu-
dents, but also with their welfare and their growth into mature men and
women who conduct themselves responsibly as citizens.

Regulations of the college are formulated to meet changing student needs
within the framework of college policy. These regulations become effective
when the student enrolls. Some regulations may not be agreeable to every-
one because they have been formulated to meet the needs of the entire

Student Development / 61

group. This however, does not lessen the individual's obligation to uphold
them. Regulations do not have as their primary purpose the punishment of
the individual. The regulations are formulated to insure the right of all com-
munity members to have the best possible living and learning conditions.

The college reserves the right to dismiss at any time a student who, in its
judgment, is undesirable and whose continuation in the school is detri-
mental to himself or his fellow students.

Furthermore, students are subject to federal, state and local laws as well
as college rules and regulations.

A student is not entitled to greater immunities before the law than those
enjoyed by other citizens generally. Students are subject to such discipli-
nary action as the administration of the college may consider appropriate,
including possible suspension and expulsion for breach of federal, state or
local laws, or college regulations. This principle extends to conduct off-
campus which is likely to have adverse effect on the college or on the edu-
cational process or which stamps the offender as an unfit associate for the
other students. A complete description of student conduct policies, rules
and regulations can be found in Hilltopics, the student handbook.

Student Health Services

Under the Student Health Program students are provided care by a reg-
istered nurse in the student day clinic. The clinic is open 8:30 a.m. to 2:00
p.m. Monday through Friday and for emergency calls at other times. The
nurse assists the students in securing a physician if needed. The services of
the nurse and the use of the day clinic are available to students only.
Charges for x-rays, prescriptions, hospital charges, and fees of physicians
or surgeons to whom a student is referred are the responsibility of the stu-
dent. Private nurses and personal physicians must be paid by the student.

All students must have proof of medical insurance. For those not having
coverage through individual or group plans, LaGrange College makes
available accident and sickness coverage through a private carrier at rea-
sonable rates. Application forms are available at registration or through the
Business Office.

Career Center

The Career Center is located in the Callaway Student Center. It contains
up-to-date career- related materials, occupational information, and a micro-
computer with programs to assist students discover their occupational inter-
ests. A broad range of career exploration is available to the individual student
at no cost. The Center also keeps up-to-date information regarding certifica-
tion and license requirements and qualifying examinations. Other services of
the Career Center include seminars on the employment process, resume
preparation, effective interviewing techniques and letter writing skills.

62 / Student Development

A primary focus of the Career Center is to enhance placement potential
by addressing the many-faceted complex realities of searching for a job.
Therefore, beginning in the freshman year, every student will be involved
in understanding the necessity and importance of early preparation for
securing their first position.

Counseling and Testing

An important part of the philosophy of LaGrange College is that each stu-
dent should have advice and counseling throughout his/her academic
career; therefore, counseling is available to LaGrange College students in a
variety of areas. The goal is to assist students in gaining an understanding of
themselves so they are better able to make informed personal, academic
and vocational choices. In addition to individual counseling, group pro-
grams are available on topics such as Study Skills, Test Anxiety Reduction,
Career Planning, Time Management, etc. Small group counseling is avail-
able in areas of personal concern such as dealing with interpersonal com-
munication, conflict resolution, parental divorce, eating disorders,
assertiveness training, etc. The staff also administers personal inventories
such as the Myers-Briggs Type Inventory and the Strong-Campbell Inventory.

The Counseling Center holds leadership training sessions which include
topics dealing with leadership styles, communication, group dynamics,
goal setting and issue exploration.

The College wiil assign freshmen to a faculty adviser who will assist
with the design of a program of study as well as any other problems which
may occur. This special program is staffed by identified faculty members
who coordinate the programs of the Freshman experience.

The Office of Student Development also administers the Scholastic
Aptitude Test (SAT), the ACT (American College Testing) and the College
Level Examination Program, as part of the College's Advanced Placement
Program. The Office of Student Developments also administers the Miller
Analogies Test (MAT), the Graduate Record Examination (GRE) and the
National Teacher Exam (NTE/PRAXIS).

Vehicle Registration

To insure efficient control of traffic and parking on campus and the
safety of all persons and vehicles, every vehicle must be registered and
must have an affixed current decal. These decals are issued to students,
along with a copy of existing parking regulations. There is a fee. Failure to
adhere to published policies may result in vehicles being towed.

Student Development 1 63

Student Appeal of Decisions

Recognizing that decisions must be made and that some students may
feel aggrieved by some decisions, LaGrange College provides the following
procedures:

A student must first attempt to resolve an issue with the college staff
member first rendering a decision. If this does not resolve the issue, a deci-
sion rendered by a college staff member may be appealed by a student as
follows:

I. Student Life:

(a) A disciplinary decision rendered by a duly constituted student
judicial board may be appealed to the Dean of Student Develop-
ment. Disciplinary decisions rendered originally by the Dean of
Student Development may be appealed in writing to the Vice
President and Dean of the College who shall seek in an informal
conference to settle the grievance to the satisfaction of the two
parties involved. If no resolution can be found, the Dean of the
College will deliver the appeal to the Student Affairs Committee
of the faculty for it determination.

(b) Other grievances in the area of student life may be appealed to
the Dean of Student Development. If the grievance involves an
original decision rendered by the Dean of Student Development,
the decision may be appealed as above.

II. Financial Aid. See the Financial Planning Section.

III. Academic Matters. See the Academic Regulations and Procedures
Section.

64/

/65

Academic Programs and
Degree Requirements

INTRODUCTION

The statement of purpose of LaGrange College describes the mission of
the College. Faculty members and the staff of the College implement aca-
demic and nonacademic programs toward the fulfillment of that mission.
Undergirding all of the academic programs at LaGrange is the fundamental
commitment to the liberal arts. Therefore, LaGrange College is first and
foremost a liberal arts college. The College mission includes a commitment
to helping to meet community needs. That commitment prompts the
College to offer certain associate or graduate programs that are coherent
with the four-year baccalaureate programs. The underlying philosophy of
liberal learning is found in all parts of the curriculum of the College but is
most obvious in the structure of the General Education Curriculum, that
part of the curriculum that serves as foundation and complement to the
major. All baccalaureate majors share the same general education curricu-
lum. That general education curriculum represents just under fifty percent
of a student's formal study at the College.

The curriculum is designed to provide the components of a liberal arts
education that historically have proved to be of lasting value. Those com-
ponents include skills such as strategies for college success, writing, com-
putation, speaking, problem-solving, computer utilization, and analytical
thinking. Additionally, there are knowledge components including history,
social studies, science, literature, religious heritage, modern foreign lan-
guages, and health.

These skills and knowledge areas, while being taught and learned in
specific courses, are integrated into the total college experience, and the
desired result is that students will be better able to function within social
institutions, to use science and technology, and to use and understand the
role of the arts in culture. They, likewise, will be better able to communi-
cate, to solve problems, and to analyze and clarify their own value system.

THE MAJORS

A major is defined as a primary program of study in which the student
completes a designated number and sequence of courses within a specific
discipline, department or subject area. A major may or may not offer con-
centrations for focused coursework within the major.

A student may choose to pursue one of three baccalaureate degrees: the
bachelor of arts, the bachelor of science, or the bachelor of business

66 / Academic Programs and Degree Requirements

administration. Most students pursue one of these baccalaureate degrees.
In addition to the baccalaureate degree programs, students may earn an
associate of arts or a masters degree, a post-baccalaureate degree.

The associate degree and the baccalaureate degree each contain a sub-
stantial general education component and extensive specified course work
in the discipline in which the student has chosen a major. The degrees
offered and the majors available for the degrees are given.

Bachelor of Arts

Art and Design

Art Education

Biology

Business Administration

Chemistry

Christian Education

Computer Science

Economics

Education

Early Childhood

Middle Childhood

Secondary (English, Chemistry, Biology, History, Mathematics)
English
History
Mathematics
Music

Political Science
Psychology
Religion
Social Work

Social Work/Criminal Justice
Theater Arts

Bachelor of Science

Chemistry
Computer Science
Mathematics

Bachelor of Science in Nursing

Nursing (Matriculation in Fall 1995)

Academic Programs and Degree Requirements/ 67

Bachelor of Business Administration

Business Administration with a concentration in one of the following areas:

Accounting

Business Economics

General Business Management

International Business

In addition to these four-year baccalaureate degrees, LaGrange College
offers the Master of Education Degree, the Master of Business Administration
Degree, and the Associate of Arts Degree. The degrees and the concentration
within the degree are given:

Master of Education (See Graduate Bulletin)

Early Childhood Education
Middle Childhood Education

Master of Business Administration (See Graduate Bulletin)

General Business with emphasis on the management function

Associate of Arts

Business Administration
Criminal Justice
Liberal Studies
Nursing

All majors offered are described in detail in the Departments and Courses
section.

Major Requirements, Time Restrictions

Coursework requirements in major programs necessarily change in
response to evolving curriculum concerns and changing student needs.
Students' major requirements are governed by the Bulletin in force at the
time of the declaration of the major. The declaration of major is initiated in
the registrar's office.

At the discretion of the department chair, students may be required to
demonstrate proficiency and/or currency in the subject matter if the major
coursework is older than five (5) academic years. Normally credit hours
earned in the major may not be applied to the completion of the major if
the hours earned are older than eight years dated from the student's initial
matriculation.

Students who have been out of school longer than two years must again
declare their majors.

68 / Academic Programs and Degree Requirements

Independent Study in the Major

In certain majors independent study courses are offered. These courses are
limited to upperclass major and minor students who have completed at least
two-thirds of their particular major or minor program, and who wish to pursue
a special problem or course of reading beyond that taken up in any formal
course and lying within the capabilities of the library and laboratories. In
order to be eligible for independent study the student must have at least a 3.0
average in major courses. Total credit which can be earned through indepen-
dent study normally will not be more than 10 quarter hours. Written permis-
sion to enroll in such a course must be obtained from the instructor, the head
of the department concerned, and the Vice President and Dean of the
College. These courses carry the numbers 495 and 496. A descriptive syllabus
including the method of evaluation must be submitted with the petition.

Senior Honors in the Major

Seniors with a cumulative quality point average of 3.5 or above may
apply for participation in the Honors Program which is available in certain
departments. This program carries the course number 499, with five quar-
ter hours credit in each participating department, with the designation
"Honors Course." Applications must be submitted in writing to the Vice
President and Dean of the College.

Assessment in the Major

The faculty members who are responsible for instruction in the major
programs have identified specific objectives for a major in that discipline.
There is an assessment, devised by the faculty in the discipline, that deter-
mines the extent to which the objectives have been met by the student.
That assessment is a requirement for students who graduated in June 1990,
or who will graduate thereafter. The assessment styles are varied. Students
should carefully explore with their adviser in their intended major the
nature of the assessment. A satisfactory assessment in the major is a
requirement of the degree. The chairman of the department offering the
major must certify satisfactory completion of the assessment component.

Students who fail to complete satisfactorily the assessment in the major
and exhaust reassessment opportunities at the departmental level may
appeal the decision of the department as described in the Academic
Procedures and Regulations section.

Advice and Counseling in the Major

All students are assigned an academic adviser. Prior to the declaration of
a major a student is advised by his or her Freshman Seminar (COL 101)
instructor. Subsequent to declaring a major, the students and the depart-
ment chairman work together in planning a program. The ultimate respon-

Academic Programs and Degree Requirements I 69

sibility for selecting the proper courses in order to complete the desired
degree is the responsibility of the student.

GENERAL EDUCATION CURRICULUM

The goals and objectives for general education have been described.
The curriculum is designed to be completed within three academic years
with coursework from the major being merged with the general education
during the sophomore and junior years.

Ninety-five quarter hours in the general education curriculum are taken in
two parts, one which is essentially nonelective (the common core), and the
second which allows the student latitude in the selection of course work.

Common Core:

Course

Freshman Seminar (COL 101)

English, Grammar and Composition 1
ENG 101, 102, 103

History (select one sequence)

World Civilization (HIS 1 01 , 1 02)

or

40 hours

Credit

Year Taken

2 hours

Freshman year

9 hours

Freshman year

hours

Freshman year

United States History (HIS 111, 112)

Mathematics, MTH 110, 111, or 122 1

5 hours

Freshman year

(by placement)

Computer Science (CSC 1 63)

2 hours

Freshman year

Religion (REL 101)

5 hours

as best scheduled

Speech (SPC 105)

3 hours

as best scheduled

Physical Education Activities

4 hours

as best scheduled

Common Core Total

40 hours

Electives:

55 hours

I. Science and Mathematics

15 hours

as best scheduled

Two science courses in sequence

(10)

BIO 101, 102

CHM 101, 102

GSC 101, 102

PHY 101, 102; 121, 122

An additional science course from

(5)

the list above, a mathematics

course from the core beyond

that taken for the core

requirements, or MTH 1 23.

70 / Academic Programs and Degree Requirements

III

Humanities and Fine Arts

Literature, English

ENG 104, 105, 106, 107

Fine Arts

MUS112, 114; ART 109, 110;
THA 101, 102

Modern Foreign Language 1
FRN 101, 102 or 103, 104
GER101, 102 or 103, 104
SPN 101, 102 or 103, 104
LAN 101, 102 or 103, 104 2

Social and Behavioral Science
ECO 101;PSY101;PSY149
SOC146, 148
Elective Total

Total General Education

25 hours as best scheduled
(10)

(5)

(10)

15 as best scheduled

55 hours

95 hours

'Please read carefully the note following about placement.

'Occasionally, if taught under the LAN label, other languages (Japanese, Hebrew, etc.) may also count as
general education.

Placement

Appropriate placement in certain courses is essential.

Students entering LaGrange College bringing with them two (2) years of
high school foreign language will be placed in an intermediate level course
of that language; or if the student chooses he or she may start the study of
another language at the beginning level. Students for whom English is not
the native language may consult with the chairman of the Division of
Humanities and Fine Arts. By individual determination, that student may
have the language requirement waived. The waiving of the language
requirement does not diminish the need to complete a total of 95 quarter
hours in general education.

During the first few days on campus all students will undergo diagnostic
assessment. These inventories are necessary for (1) planning for majors and
careers, (2) providing the comparison levels for subsequent general educa-
tion assessment, and (3) determining current skill levels in mathematics
and English. Mathematics placement is based on skills assessment. Some
students who are not predicted to be successful in any one of these general
education mathematics courses (110, 111, or 122) are required to enroll in
Mathematics 100. This is a pre-general education mathematics course, and
credit in this course does not count toward the fulfillment of the 95 quarter
hours of general education.

English placement is based on the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) data,
where available. The Test of Standard Written English (TSWE) is a sub-test of

Academic Programs and Degree Requirements / 71

the SAT. For students who do not have recent SAT scores, the TSWE is given
early in the orientation period. Students who score 37 or below are required
to enroll in English 100, a pre-general education course in grammar and
composition. Students who score between 38 and 45 are placed in either
ENG 100 or ENG 101 based on a consideration of a written sample of work
submitted by the student during the specified diagnostic assessment time
schedule for English. Like Mathematics 100, English 100 does not count
toward the fulfillment of any of the 95 hours in general education.

General Education, Time Restrictions

There is no time limit on the credit or validity of general education
coursework. It should be noted, however, that students who have not been
enrolled at LaGrange College for four years, or who transferred from
LaGrange College and subsequently return, enter the college under the
Bulletin in force at the time of re-entry.

Credit-by-Examination and Exemption

Students may be eligible for credit and/or exemption in certain areas
through the College Level Examination Program (CLEP) and other recog-
nized testing procedures. Advanced placement credit is accepted for those
students who present evidence from the high school that advance place-
ment programs have been completed and who present scores of 4 or 5 on
the advanced placement test of the College Education Examination Board
administered by Educational Testing Service. Credit by examination (AP or
CLEP) may reduce the 95 hour general education component by the credit
hours earned by this process. If no credit is earned, but exemption is
granted, then 95 quarter hours of general education are to be completed.

Freshman Seminar, College 101, "Gateway to Success" (two hours credit)

This is an academic course in which experienced LaGrange faculty
members and students selected for their academic achievement, their
demonstration of leadership and their admirable personal standards guide
new students toward success. The faculty members and the very important
peers (VIP's) meet their small group of newcomers during the early stages
of orientation and begin the process of familiarization with the campus,
with academic procedures and processes, and with each other. The forma-
tion of the informal support group, the beginning of the systematic process
of selecting possible careers and academic majors, the reinforcement of
writing as effective communication and academic advising are a part of
COL 101. The curriculum of this course may vary from time to time and
may be thematic. The goals of the course are not variable and are to help
the student feel as comfortable as possible in this new environment, to help
him or her to be as successful as possible during this first year and to help
lay the foundation for a successful four-year college experience.

72 / Academic Programs and Degree Requirements

Assessment of General Education

When a student has 140 hours credit, (s)he should take American
College Testing Program's College Outcome Measures Program (COMP).
This inventory will be used to determine the extent to which students have
achieved the objectives of the general education curriculum. Meaningful
participation in this testing program is a requirement for graduation with a
baccalaureate degree.

Nontypical Students and the General Education Requirements

Nontypical students are those who enter college for the first time and
who meet any two of the three following criteria:

(1) aged twenty-five or greater

(2) employed full-time or at least three-fourths time

(3) living off campus

These students may have experiences and needs differing from tradi-
tional students which may allow them to develop a curriculum plan of
their own to meet the general education requirements.

The common core portion (40 quarter hours) of the general education
requirements is the same for these students as it is for traditional students.
However, as part of the College 101 "Gateway to Success" class require-
ments, the nontypical student may develop a personal proposal for fulfill-
ing the remaining 55 quarter hours portion of the general education
requirements. This proposal is normally prepared utilizing the guidelines
specified below and is reviewed and accepted by the Evening Studies
Director. At that point the nontypical student is classified as a nontradi-
tional student. Any proposal deviating from the guidelines must be
approved by the curriculum committee. Once the contract is developed it
may be changed only one time. Students may appeal the action of the cur-
riculum committee to the Academic Advisory Council.

As a general rule the nontraditional general requirement option is for
incoming freshmen students. To be eligible the freshmen student must:

(1) Meet the nontypical criteria upon matriculation (see 1-3 in opening
paragraph of this section).

(2) Complete COL 101.

(3) Initiate the contract process before beginning the third quarter in res-
idence.

(4) Complete (gain approval for) the contract within the first 45 hours
earned.

The nontraditional general education requirement option also is avail-
able for new transfer students who meet the nontypical criteria and who
have completed no more than 20 hours of general education beyond the
common core upon matriculation at LaGrange College. For this proposal to
be considered, it must be initiated during the first quarter in residence and

Academic Programs and Degree Requirements I 73

finalized (approved) before the new, nontypical transfer student earns 20
hours at LaGrange College.

Common Core 40 hours

Contractual Elective 55 hours (at least 5 hours from each area)

I. Fine Arts

MUS 112, 114; ART 109, 110: THA 101, 102

II. Literature

ENG 104, 105, 106, 107

III. Modern Foreign Language (level by placement)
FRN 101, 102 or 103, 104

GER 101, 102 or 103, 104
SPN 101, 102 or 104, or 110
LAN 101, 102; 103, 104, 110*

IV. Science and Mathematics

BIO 101, 102;CHM 101, 102;GSC 101, 102
PHY 101, 102; 121, 122
MTH 111 or 122

V. General Studies (no more than 25 hours)
EDU 1 99, PSC 1 01 , PSY 1 49, REL 1 1 0,
SOC 153, SOC 146

SOC 147, ECO 101, BUA151
ART 171, ART 180, PHL 149

'Occasionally other languages (Japanese, Hebrew, etc.) may be taught. Those languages, if taught under
the LAN category, also satisfy the general education requirement.

Total General Education 95 hours

Placement criteria and assessment procedures are the same for both tra-
ditional and nontraditional students.

General Education for the Two-year Associate Degree

The requirements for a liberal studies associate degree is the completion
of the 95 quarter hours general education curriculum. No "major" courses
are a part of this associate degree.

The general education curriculum for the associate degrees in business
administration, criminal justice, and nursing are given.

74 / Academic Programs and Degree Requirements

Business Administration

Core

40 Hours

Elective 25 Hours

COL 101

2

ECO 101

ENG 101, 102,

103

9

MTH (beyond that taken
in the core)

HIS 101, 102 or 1

112

10

Lab Science

CSC 1 63

2

ENG 104 or 105 or 106 or 107

SPC105

3

Foreign Language

MTH 110, 111,

or 122

(by placement)

5

REL 101

5

PED

4

Total 65

Criminal Justice

Core

36 Hours

Elective I 5 Hours

COL 101

2

HIS 111 or112

ENG 101, 102,

103

9

Elective II 5

SPC 105

3

REL 101 or 110 or

MTH 110, 111,

122

PHL149

(by placement)

5 Hours

Elective III 5 Hours

CSC 1 63

2

GSC101,CHM101,

PSC101

5

BIO 101 or PHY 101

SOC 146

5

PSY149

5

Total 51

Nursing

Core

28 Hours

COL 101

2

ENG 101, 102,

103

9

MTH 110, 111,

122

(by placement)

CSC 1 63

2

SOC 146, PSY149

10

Total

28

Academic Programs and Degree Requirements I 75

Placement and assessment procedures are the same as for baccalaureate
degrees, except COMP will be given during the last quarter in residence.

The courses in the major may be found in the Departments and Courses
section of the Bulletin.

Minors

Academic minors may be earned in most departments. A minor must
include at least 30 hours, 15 of which must be in 300-level or above
courses. Specific courses are not designated, but they must be approved by
the chair in the minor department.

Special Institutes/Continuing Education

LaGrange College coordinates and initiates special institutes and contin-
uing education activities. These activities include work with area and state
churches, industries, health care facilities and businesses. For certain of
these activities the College gives continuing education units (C.E.U.).

76/

177

Academic Regulations
and Procedures

Orientation and Counseling

All new students are introduced to LaGrange College through an orien-
tation program which takes place at the beginning of each quarter. The ori-
entation program is designed to acquaint the new students with various
phases of the life of the College including traditions, procedures, and regu-
lations. It is believed that all students will profit from a proper introduction
to the opportunities and responsibilities of college life.

Freshman Seminar (COL 101) deals with the elements of learning and
decision making not covered in the traditional curricular structure that are
essential to the student's educational process. These include selecting
courses, study skills, making long-term educational plans, placing course
work in a broader context of student development, dealing with personal
difficulties, and adjusting to the inadequacies in pre-college preparation. To
help students at LaGrange College face these issues in an organized way,
Freshman Seminar is taught. This two-hour course provides an opportunity
for freshman to work with faculty and other students in the consideration of
issues designed to assist them in making decisions and in dealing with the
many interrelated problems that have a bearing on their academic career.

Registration

All students must register on the dates specified. Failure to register on
the proper dates may subject the student to a $20 late-registration fee. All
registration procedures for all quarters are under the direction of the Vice
President and Dean of the College. Students have not completed registra-
tion until they have cleared the Registrar, Dean of Student Development
and the Business Office. Students enrolled for twelve or more hours must
obtain a campus post office box. Communications to the student will be
through campus mail.

Each student is assigned to a faculty adviser, who assists the student in
planning an academic program. However, the ultimate responsibility for
meeting all requirements rests with the individual student.

A student interested in a particular major should inform his general
adviser in order that special prerequisite courses for the major may be
scheduled. A major may be formally declared anytime after the student has
earned 22 hours of credit. The student must declare his major in writing to
the Registrar by the time he has earned 75 quarter hours of credit. The stu-

78 / Academic Regulations and Procedures

dent will then be assigned to an adviser in the department in which he will
major. A student planning to pursue a program in Teacher Education must
take application in writing to the chair of the Department of Education at
least by the time he/she declares a major.

A student's major program requirements are those described in the col-
lege Bulletin at the time of declaration of the major.

Withdrawal

To withdraw from any course a student must confer with his instructor,
his adviser, and the Vice President and Dean of the College. Failure of a
student to withdraw officially through the office of the Dean of the College
normally will result in the assignment of a WF. A student who wishes to
withdraw from the College must confer with the Dean of the College and
the Dean of Student Development. Withdrawals are not permitted the last
week of class.

Academic Standing Probation Regulations

Students are placed on academic probation when the quality of work is
such that progress toward graduation is in jeopardy. The purpose of proba-
tion is to warn. It is not a penalty. Students on probation will be notified,
and the regulations governing probation will be called to their attention.

Freshmen (fewer than 45 hours) must maintain a cumulative grade point
average (GPA) of at least 1.65 to avoid being placed on probation.
Sophomores (45-89 hours), a 1.75 GPA; Juniors (90-134 hours), a 1.85
GPA; and Seniors (135 or more hours), a 2.00 GPA. In most cases, students
have three quarters to remove their probationary status. Failure to do so
makes these students subject to suspension.

Students are also subject to suspension for failure to earn at least five
quarter hours of academic credit in any quarter, or for other valid aca-
demic reasons (such as violating cheating and plagiarism standards). In the
case of part-time students, the extent of application of these regulations
will be at the discretion of the Vice President and Dean of the College.
Normally, all applications of the regulations will be based upon a full
academic load.

The grade report sent to the student provides information on standing.
"Probation one" means that the student's next term will be the first term on
probation, etc. "Dean's Decision" means that the student's academic records
have been given to the Vice President and Dean of the College for action.

Class Attendance Regulations

A student is expected to attend all classes, including labs, for all courses
for which he is registered. The student is solely responsible for accounting
to his instructor for any absence. An instructor may recommend that the

Academic Regulations and Procedures I 79

Vice President and Dean of the College drop from class with a grade of W
or WF any student whose absences are interfering with satisfactory per-
formance in the course.

Course Repetition

A student is prohibited from repeating a course in which he has made
a "C" or better (while enrolled at LaGrange College or any institution) without
the approval of the Vice President and Dean of the College and the Academic
Advisory Council. A student may not remove an unsatisfactory grade earned
at LaGrange College by repeating the course at another institution.

Acceleration

Students desiring to accelerate their college program may complete
requirements in less than four academic years. This may be accomplished
by attending summer schools and/or taking an academic overload.
Permission to take an overload in any quarter is granted only to those stu-
dents who have earned at least a cumulative average of B (3.0), except that
a student may take an overload during one quarter of his senior year with-
out respect to grade-point average.

Students may be eligible for credit and/or exemption in certain areas
through the College Level Examination Program (CLEP) and other recog-
nized testing procedures. Advanced placement credit is accepted for those
students who present evidence from the high school that advance place-
ment programs have been completed and who present scores of 4 or 5 on
the advanced placement test of the College Entrance Examination Board
administered by Educational Testing Service.

Academic Honors

Upon graduation, students who have been in residence at LaGrange
College for at least their last 90 hours and

1 . have attained a quality point average of 3.50 to 3.74 may be granted
the bachelor degree cum laude or

2. have attained a quality point average of 3.75 to 3.89 may be granted
the bachelor degree magna cum laude or

3. have attained a quality point average of 3.90 to 4.0 may be. granted
the bachelor degree summa cum laude.

At the end of each academic quarter, students who have maintained a
3.60 quality point average on a minimum of 1 5 quarter hours of work will
be placed on the Dean's list.

Academic honors at graduation are awarded only to students complet-
ing the four-year program (effective with 1985 graduates).

80 / Academic Regulations and Procedures

International Students

Students who are on a student visa in the United States are subject to
special regulations. As the institution which issues documents certifying stu-
dent status, LaGrange College is subject to regulations or guidelines.
Guidelines change, students should contact the Vice President and Dean of
the College or the Registrar for interpretation of such changes. The current
interpretation is that students with student visas must be enrolled for a full
academic load (at least 12 quarter hours) at all times. Federal regulations
concerning "status" for all international students on an F-1 visa states that
any student who falls below 1 2 quarter hours at any time will be considered
out-of-status and must be reinstated by Immigration and Naturalization
Services (INS).

English proficiency is fundamental to a successful academic course at
LaGrange College. Therefore, in addition to the minimum TOEFL score
required for admission, the College requires all students for whom English
is a second language to enroll in and satisfactorily complete a two-quarter
sequence, ENG 010, 011. Further, if it is apparent that a student's English
continues to jeopardize a successful academic career, the Vice President
and Dean of the College may require that a student attend a special, inten-
sive English language course. If such a requirement is placed on a student,
failure to attend the English language course can result in withdrawal of the
student visa.

International students must enroll in an English course each quarter
they are in school until they satisfactorily complete their English studies.

Credit through United States Armed Forces
Institute and Service Schools

Courses taken through The United States Armed Forces Institute and
other recognized military educational programs are accepted in accor-
dance with the policy governing transfer work when presented on official
transcripts from accredited institutions. Fifteen quarter hours of elective
credit will be allowed for military service credit, including USAFI corre-
spondence courses and military service school courses as recommended
by the American Council on Education. One activity course in physical
education, up to a maximum of four, will be waived for each two months
served in the Armed Forces; a corresponding reduction will be made in the
total number of hours required for the degree.

Academic Regulations and Procedures / 81

Grades and Credits

The definitions of grades given at LaGrange College are as follows:
*A superior
*B above average
*C average
*D below average
F failing

I incomplete. This grade is assigned in case a student is doing satis-
factory work but for some reason beyond the student's control has
been unable to complete the work during that quarter. This defer-
ment must be given written approval in advance by the instructor
and the Vice President and Dean of the College.
NC no credit or non-credit

W withdrawn. During the first three weeks a student may withdraw

from a class with an "automatic" "W." After this trial period the

student may withdraw, but the grade assigned, "W" or "WF," will

be at the discretion of the professor.

WF withdrawn failing. The grade of WF is included in computing the

grade-point average.
AW audit withdrawn
AU audit complete
NR grade not reported by instructor at the time the report issued.

A student may register for a course on a non-credit basis, for which he
pays full tuition. To have a grade of NC recorded, he must fulfill all course
requirements.

A student may audit a course by paying the audit fee. All requests for
audit courses must be approved in writing by the instructor and Vice
President and Dean of the College. Only lecture courses may be audited.
No new freshman student may audit any course during the first quarter of
residence at LaGrange College.

An / is a temporary grade, assigned by an instructor within the last three
weeks of the term to students who are doing satisfactory work and who
cannot complete the course due to circumstances beyond their control.
Should conditions prohibiting completion of a course arise within the first
eight weeks, students withdraw.

An / is removed by the date indicated in the Academic Calendar. Failure
to remove an / by the date set initiates the following action: The registrar
will write a letter to the student using the address on file. The letter indi-
cates that the student has two weeks to respond. Otherwise the "\" grade
will be converted to an "F". A grade other than /, once submitted, may not
be changed by an instructor except with the formal approval of the
Academic Advisory Council, within the next quarter.

Pluses and minuses indicate performance just above or below letter grade level. Grade point averages
are computed using pluses and minuses.

82 / Academic Regulations and Procedures

Grades are assigned and recorded for each course at the end of each
quarter. Formal reports of grades are also issued at the same time.
Transcripts are withheld for any student who is under financial obligation
to the College.

Requirements for Bachelor Degrees A Summary

LaGrange College offers the Bachelor of Arts degree, the Bachelor of
Science degree, and the Bachelor of Business Administration degree. To
obtain a second bachelor's degree, at least 60 additional quarter hours
must be earned beyond the first degree, in a minimum of three quarters.
Baccalaureate degrees require a minimum of 195 quarter hours of credit
including required coursework in general education and the major. There
is often an opportunity to select course work electives.

The minimum work required for graduation is 195 quarter hours and a
2.0 quality-point average in all course work taken at LaGrange College. To
be eligible for the degree, a student must meet all requirements for the
degree (general education, major program, all necessary assessments, 195
quarter hours and 2.0 cumulative grade point average) and make applica-
tion for the degree before the beginning of his/her final quarter. A student
who does not earn a degree in sixteen full quarters or the equivalent may
be denied further registration.

In order to graduate in four academic years a student, at a minimum,
should take 16-17 quarter hours credit each term. A student who takes at
least twelve quarter hours credit is classified as full-time. The maximum
full load is 19 quarter hours; anything beyond is considered an overload.
No student is permitted to enroll for more than 22 hours in any one quar-
ter. Request to take an overload must be granted in the office of the Vice
President and Dean of the College.

Quality points are earned as follows: A, 4; B, 3; C, 2; D, 1 ; F, 0. Pluses and
minuses respectively add and subtract three tenths of a point to the quality
point. (Example a B- is 2.7 quality points.) The exception is that an A and an
A+ are both computed using 4. The quality-point average is computed by
multiplying the grade point by the course credit, summing, and then dividing
the total quality points earned by the total hours attempted. If a student has
received credit for a course and repeats that course, he receives no addi-
tional credit toward the degree. In computing the student's average, hours
attempted and quality points are counted on all such attempts.

Not more than 100 quarter hours of credit earned at a junior college are
counted toward the degree. No credit is granted toward the degree for
course work taken at a junior college after a student has attained junior
standing. A transfer student is not given credit toward graduation for any
Ds earned elsewhere. Transient work for grade of C or better is acceptable.
Academic averages are computed on work done only at LaGrange College.

Academic Regulations and Procedures 1 83

There are two ways by which a student must meet residency require-
ments for graduation:

(1 ) The student must be in residence the last four quarters or 60 hours

or

(2) 75 Credit hours of the last 90 credit hours must be earned at
LaGrange College. With prior approval of the adviser and the Vice
President and Dean of the College up to 15 hours of transient study
may be earned at another four-year accredited institution. Transient
credit is only for courses in which the grade is C or better.

Grades earned for transient work are not included in the cumulative
grade average. Normally, after receiving an unsatisfactory grade in a course
at LaGrange College, a student will not be given credit for repeating that
course at another institution. Credit totaling 10 hours or more earned in
this way during the last 90 hours or final 6 quarters precludes that student's
being granted credit for any course work taken by extension or by corre-
spondence during the period.

Any regularly enrolled LaGrange College student who desires to take
course work for credit by extension or by correspondence must obtain
prior approval in writing from his academic adviser and from the Vice
President and Dean of the College. Such extension or correspondence
credit may in no case exceed 10 hours (grades of C or better); however, not
more than 5 hours earned in this manner may be applied toward the fulfill-
ment of the General Requirements of LaGrange College. Any course or
courses so taken must be completed and all grades recorded before the
end of the student's final quarter, in order to be graduated that quarter.

A student is classified as a freshman if he has earned fewer than 45
hours of credit. A student is classified as a sophomore if he has earned 45-

89 hours of credit. To be classified as a junior, a student must have earned

90 hours of credit. A student is classified as a senior upon having earned
1 35 hours of credit. A student should be alert to the fact that 1 95 hours are
required for graduation. Attaining these minimum progression require-
ments may not be sufficient to insure graduation within the three quarters
of the senior year.

No grade below C- in any course above 100-level may be applied toward
a major.

Requirements for the Associate of Arts Degree

As previously described, the College offers programs of study leading to
the Associate of Arts degree. Students pursuing an associate degree must
complete the general education component required for that degree, the pre-
scribed coursework in the discipline and a minimum of 95 quarter hours.
The last 30 quarter hours must be done in residence. A 2.00 grade point
average is necessary.

84 / Academic Regulations and Procedures

Transcripts

Students are entitled to transcripts of their record free of charge. No
transcripts will be issued for any student under financial obligation to the
College.

Transcript requests must be made in writing to the Registrar well in
advance of the time the transcript is needed. Transcripts will be issued
promptly; however, at the beginning and end of quarters some delay may
be unavoidable.

Student Review of Academic Decisions

Decisions pertaining to the academic program which are originally ren-
dered by a faculty member may be appealed, in writing, to the Vice
President and Dean of the College who shall seek, in an informal confer-
ence, to settle the grievance to the satisfaction of the two parties involved. If
no resolution can be found, the Dean will deliver the appeal to the Review
Subcommittee of the Academic Standards Committee for its determination.

Decisions pertaining to the academic program originally rendered by
the Vice President and Dean of the College may be appealed to the Review
Subcommittee of the Academic Standards Committee.

Student Appeal of Academic Policy

Students may petition for exception to published academic policy. The
Academic Advisory Council reviews the petition.

Graduation Requirements

A student who enters LaGrange College under a given Bulletin generally
will be graduated under the general education, hours requirement and
grade point average requirements of that Bulletin. Major requirements are
those in force at the time a student formally declares a major. If a student
suspends his/her study and re-enters more than four years later, he/she
will graduate under the requirements of the Bulletin in effect at the time
of re-entry.

Students in their last year of college work must have an audit of their
course credits and planned courses examined prior to registration for their
final quarter in residence. This is called a "graduation petition." The major
adviser and the Office of the Vice President and Dean of the College assist
the student in completing this petition.

Students at LaGrange College will participate in the evaluation of the
extent to which institutional education goals are being achieved. This eval-
uation will be in both the general education area and the major. Students
who graduated in June of 1990 were the first to participate in these com-
prehensive evaluations. Consult the specific majors for the details.

Academic Regulations and Procedures I 85

Graduation Rate

Graduation rates are being collected tor all students who enter
LaGrange College. For students who entered Fall 1988, 47.0% of new
freshmen and 49.1 of new students (freshmen and transfers) persisted to
graduation at LaGrange College. For students who entered seeking an
Associate-level degree 84.6% of the new freshmen of 1991 persisted to
attain the Associate of Arts degree. The analysis of those who did not per-
sist to graduation at LaGrange College is incomplete; it includes, however,
students who transferred to complete programs that were part of an overall
academic plan (dual degree engineering, certain allied health fields and
similar areas) as well as students who dropped out for academic, financial
or personal reasons.

Students who compare graduation rates should be certain that they are
comparing figures that represent identical databases.

Endowed Lectureship

The Waights G. Henry, Jr. Endowed Lectureship was established by a gift
from the Neighbors Fund, Inc. in memory of Dr. Henry, president and chan-
cellor of LaGrange College over a period of 42 years. Income from the
endowment is to be used annually in funding the Waights G. Henry lectures
for the benefit of our students and as approved by the trustees of the College.

The Arthur H. Thompson Lectureship brings to the campus each year
noted scholars to address the faculty and student body on the interrelation-
ship of a field knowledge and the Christian religion. The endowment was
established by Mrs. Mary Will Thompson, alumna, in memory of her hus-
band, who was at one time chairman of the Board of Trustees of the
College. He expressed his philosophy in the statement: 'The greatest thing
in life is the simple faith of an honest man."

Awards and Recognitions

The Nancy Alford Award is awarded each year to the sorority accumu-
lating the greatest number of points in the areas of scholarship, leadership,
sportsmanship, and community service.

The Irene E. Arnett Drama Award is presented annually to the member
of the senior class who shows that greatest potential for contribution to the
field of theatre, devotion to the tasks in the theatre, and dedication to the
principles of good theatre to amuse the heart and lift the spirit to a better
understanding of man and his struggle in this world and towards his God.

The Needham Avery Art Award is a purchase award granted annually in
visual arts, provided by Dr. and Mrs. R.M. Avery in memory of their son.

86 / Academic Regulations and Procedures

The E.A. Bailey Award is awarded each year to the fraternity accumulat-
ing the greatest number of points in the areas of scholarship, leadership,
sportsmanship, and community service.

The Josephine A. Case Scholarship is awarded to a junior for excellence
in art and promise of achievement in that field. This award carries a
stipend and is associated with Josephine A. Case Collection of American
Indian Art which Mrs. Case and her husband, the late Dr. Leland D. Case
of Tucson, donated to LaGrange College. Both hold honorary doctorates
from this school.

The Austin P. Cook Award is presented annually by the Student Govern-
ment Association to the organization that made the most positive impact
on campus life during the year.

The Roger Guptill Award is presented annually in memory of the late
Dr. Roger Guptill, minister, teacher, and Christian gentleman, to a senior
class student of the Department of Religion preparing for full-time church
service.

The Mamie Lark Henry Drama Scholarship is presented annually to a stu-
dent in recognition of superior contribution to the Theater Arts Department.

The Mamie Lark Henry Scholarship Cup is presented each quarter to a
sorority with the highest grade-point average the previous quarter.

The Waights G. Henry, Jr. Leadership Award is given annually by the
Student Government Association to a student who has actively demon-
strated effective leadership skills. Selection of the recipient is made by a
committee composed of students, faculty, and administrators.

The Evelyn Powell Hoffman Drama Scholarship is provided by her family
in memory of their wife, mother and sister, a graduate of the class of 1930. It
is to be awarded annually to a freshman student through audition. The selec-
tion of the recipient is to be made by the Theater Arts Department faculty.

The Mary Hunter Lindsey Award is provided by the late Rev. William
Oliver Lindsey, Sr., in memory of his wife, Mary Hunter Lindsey, class of
1914. It is awarded annually to United Methodist students entering the senior
class in college and preparing for a full-time church ministry. The selection of
the awardees is made by the faculty of the Religion Department.

The John Love Scholarship Cup is presented each quarter to the frater-
nity with the highest grade point average the previous quarter.

The Weston L. Murray Award is presented to the senior class member of
the Georgia Delta Chapter of Pi Gamma Mu who has the highest record of
achievement and contribution in the field of Social Science.

Outstanding Achievement in Psychology Award is presented annually
by the psychology department to the senior psychology major who,

Academic Regulations and Procedures 1 87

through academic excellence and service, has made an outstanding contri-
bution to the field of psychology.

The Pike Award is provided by Mrs. William C. Key (Ruth Pike) and the
late Mrs. William Franklin Daugherty (Ethel Pike) in memory of Adella
Hunter and Christian Nathaniel Pike. It is awarded annually to Methodist
or Baptist students entering the senior class in college and preparing for a
full-time church vocation or majoring in Religion or Religious Education.

The Walter Malcolm Shackelford Award is presented annually to a
graduating senior who has majored in Education and has demonstrated
outstanding academic performance, leadership, and service to the College.

The Annie Moore Smith Award is a purchase award given annually in
visual arts, provided by Mrs. Rebecca Moore Butler, class of 1924, in mem-
ory of her sister, Annie Moore Smith, class of 191 5.

Jean Young Award in Photography, granted annually, was established in
memory of Jean Young who was the first curator of the Lamar Dodd Art
Center. The award is a book on contemporary photography and is pre-
sented to the student who has demonstrated an exceptional commitment to
photographic art.

Departmental Awards are presented annually at Honors Day in the
spring. At the time there are numerous departmental awards made.

88/

/89

Pre-professional and
Co-operative Programs

Pre-professional Programs of Study

LaGrange College has a curriculum and environment that is well-suited
to preparation for further study in fields such as law and medicine. These
programs include, but are not necessarily limited to, preparation for the fol-
lowing areas.

LAW

The pre-law advising committee is chaired by Dr. Tracy Lightcap and is
composed of Dr. Lightcap, Dr. Frederick Mills, Dr. Brenda Thomas and Dr.
Kevin Reidy. Students considering attending law school should consult
with one of these faculty members beginning in their freshman year and
should meet quarterly with other students interested in pre-law. Law school
bulletins and LSAT study guides are located on the ground floor of Banks
Library in the Writing Center.

Students entering law school come from many varied undergraduate
programs from English to mathematics, business administration, history or
political science. It is not really possible to say which major serves as the
best preparatory background for law school. Almost every law school bul-
letin, however, suggests that entering students must have a strong back-
ground in history, political science and English as well as some preparation
in economics, business, sociology, psychology and mathematics.

DENTISTRY

Dr. John Hurd is the general adviser. Students selecting a major other
than Biology should consult early and frequently with Dr. Hurd in addition
to their primary advisors for their majors. The pre-dental student should
select a major as early as possible and work toward the B.A. degree. Some
dental schools accept students with fewer than four years of college train-
ing, but most of them prefer a student with the baccalaureate degree.

The pre-dental student should be familiar with the specific requirements
set by the dental schools to which he plans to apply. There is some varia-
tion in the requirements of the various schools, but the minimum require-
ments set by most schools of dentistry are:

90 / Pre-professional and Co-operative Programs

Inorganic Chemistry with lab 1 5 quarter hours

Organic Chemistry with lab 1 5 quarter hours

Biology with lab 1 quarter hours

Physics with lab 1 5 quarter hours

English 10 quarter hours

All applicants must complete the Dental Admission Test not later than
the October testing preceding the year of desired entry.

MEDICINE (M.D.)

Dr. John Hurd is the general adviser. Students selecting a major other
than Biology should consult early and frequently with Dr. Hurd in addition
to their primary advisers for their majors. The pre-medicine student should
select a major as soon as possible and seek the B.A. degree. Medical
schools rarely accept candidates with less than the baccalaureate degree.

The student should familiarize himself with the requirements of the sev-
eral medical schools to which he plans to apply. Requirements vary some-
what in the various medical schools, but the minimum requirements of
most medical schools are:

Biology with lab 1 5 quarter hours

General Chemistry with lab 1 5 quarter hours

Organic Chemistry 1 5 quarter hours

Physics 1 5 quarter hours

Every applicant must take the Medical College Admission Test, prefer-
ably in the spring preceding the submission of his application to medical
school, but no later than the fall of that year.

VETERINARY MEDICINE

Dr. John Hurd is the general adviser. Students selecting a major other
than Biology should consult early and frequently with Dr. Hurd in addition
to their primary advisers for their majors. The pre-veterinary student should
be familiar with the specific requirements of the school to which he plans
to apply. The minimum requirements set by most schools of veterinary
medicine are as follows:

A candidate must have completed at least 90 quarter hours of college
credit by the end of the spring quarter before fall matriculation at the veteri-
nary school. The B.A. degree is preferred. The following required courses
must have been completed prior to entry into veterinary school.

English 1 quarter hours

Biology with lab 1 quarter hours

Zoology or Botany 5 quarter hours

Microbiology 5 quarter hours

Pre-professional and Co-operative Programs I 91

Biochemistry 5 quarter hours

Inorganic Chemistry with lab 10 quarter hours

Organic Chemistry with lab 10 quarter hours

Animal Nutrition* 5 quarter hours

The candidate must have worked with a veterinarian, and he mtvsf have
had hands-on experience working with large and small animals.

Each applicant will be required to take the Graduate Record Examination
(GRE) including the Advanced Biology Section and the Veterinary Aptitude
Test. These tests should be taken October or December of the year prior to
probable admission to veterinary school.

"Not available at LaGrange College

ENGINEERING

LaGrange College has an engineering-oriented program designed to pro-
vide the student with a broad liberal arts background while preparing the stu-
dent for a professional engineering program. Dual-degree programs in
engineering have been established with Georgia Institute of Technology or
Auburn University. Students accepted in the dual-degree program will attend
LaGrange College for approximately three academic years (a minimum of
146 quarter hours) and then either Georgia Institute of Technology or Auburn
University for approximately two academic years. After completing the acad-
emic requirements of the two cooperating institutions, the student shall be
awarded a bachelor's degree from LaGrange College and a bachelor's degree
in engineering from either Georgia Institute of Technology or Auburn
University. In addition, a dual degree program is being negotiated with
Mercer University and should be in place for Fall 1993. Those interested in
the Mercer Program should contact the Pre-Engineering Adviser.

It is strongly suggested that all students considering either the dual
degree program in engineering or transferring into an engineering program
contact the pre-engineering adviser, Dr. Bill McCoy, prior to registration.

To be eligible to enroll in the dual-degree program in engineering a stu-
dent must have a 2.3 or better grade point average. In addition to complet-
ing the General Education Curriculum, a student in the dual degree
program must complete the courses listed below. The courses are listed in
sequence for the first two years at LaGrange College. While this order is
strongly suggested, the courses may be taken over the three years of resi-
dence at LaGrange College.

92 / Pre-professional and Co-operative Programs

Fall Quarter

MTH 122
Calculus I

ENG 101
Composition I

CHM 101
General Chemistry I

COL 101
Freshman Seminar

First Year

Winter Quarter

MTH 123
Calculus II

ENG 102
Composition II

CHM 102
General Chemistry II

HIS 101*or 111**
World or American

Spring Quarter

MTH 124
Calculus III

ENG 103
Composition III

SPC 1 05
Speech Fundamentals

HIS 102* or 112**
World or American

Computer Science 1 63
Microcomputers

*For students planning to attend Auburn University
For students planning to attend Ga Tech

MTH 322
Calculus IV

PHY 121
Physics I

General Education
Electivet

or
CSC 199**
Algorithms

Second Year

MTH 323
Calculus V

PHY 122
Physics II

General Education Electivet

or

CSC 280

FORTRAN*

MTH 324
Diff Equ

PHY 123
Physics III

General Education
Electivet

or

MTH 335

Linear Algebra

tSubject to approval by the adviser
*For students planning to attend Auburn University
**For students planning to attend Ga. Tech. Inst.

PHARMACY

The pre-pharmacy general adviser is Dr. John Hurd. Students selecting a
major other than Biology should consult early and frequently with Dr.
Hurd in addition to their primary advisers for their majors.

While the admission requirements vary, the following is standard course
work as a minimum: Chemistry 101, 102, 311, 351, 352; Biology 101,
102; Physics 101, 102; Mathematics 111; English 101, 102; History 111,
112; Economics 203; Sociology 146; Speech 105. Political Science 101
may be required, and electives in literature are suggested to make up 90
quarter hours of academic work.

Pre-professional and Co-operative Programs 1 93

JOURNALISM

The student who plans a career in journalism needs a wide range of
courses in many areas. A recommended basic program would include
approximately 20 hours in humanities, 20 hours in mathematics and sci-
ence, 20 hours in social science, and 30 hours in a major field. Specific
courses to prepare for admission to individual schools should be selected
in consultation with the adviser.

PHYSICAL THERAPY

The pre-Physical Therapy general adviser is Dr. John Hurd. Most schools
which offer training in Physical Therapy award a Bachelor's degree after
successful completion of classroom and clinical work. Students are admit-
ted to such programs after completion of 90 quarter hours of work includ-
ing approximately 20 hours in Humanities, 20 hours in Math and Science,
20 hours in Social Science plus 30 hours in a major field such as Biology.
Specific courses to prepare for admission to individual schools should be
selected in consultation with the adviser.

OPTOMETRY

The pre-Optometry general adviser is Dr. John Hurd. Students selecting
a major other than Biology should consult early and frequently with Dr.
Hurd in addition to their primary advisers for their majors. Though selected
students may be admitted to Optometry School after three years of prepara-
tion, most are admitted after receiving Bachelors or Masters degrees.
Optometry involves fours years of study after admission to the program and
in some areas also includes a brief internship. Majors in any academic area
are acceptable though the student should include emphasis on the sci-
ences. Preparation for admission to a specific school can be planned with
the assistance of the adviser.

94/

/95

Departments and Courses

Table of Contents

Academic Divisions 96

Abbreviations and Numbers 98

Art and Design 99

Biology 1 03

Business Administration 1 06

Chemistry 114

Christian Education (see Religion)

Computer Science 1 20

Criminal Justice 1 25

Dance 127

Economics 1 28

Education 132

English and Literature 140

General Science 1 44

Health, Physical Education, and Recreation 145

History 151

Library Science 155

Mathematics 156

Modern Foreign Language 1 62

Music 1 66

Nursing 1 70

Philosophy 1 75

Physics ' . 1 76

Political Science 1 77

Psychology 181

Religion 1 86

Sociology/Social Work 1 90

Speech 1 93

Theater Arts 1 94

96 / Departments and Courses

Academic Divisions

Business Administration and Economics

Professors: Cousins, Dupuy

Associate Professors: Benavides, Birkeli

Assistant Professors: Callahan, Reidy

This division contains the Department of Business Administration and
Economics, and the A.A., B.A., B.B.A. and the M.B.A. degrees are offered.

Education

Professors: Garcia, S. Johnson, Jordan, Reid, Robison
Associate Professor: Williamson
Assistant Professor: Alford, M. Smith
Instructor: Unger

This division contains the Department of Education and the Department
of Health, Physical Education and Recreation. The B.A. and M.Ed, degrees
are offered.

Humanities and Fine Arts

Professors: Hornsby, Lawrence, McCook, Murphy, Naglee
Associate Professors: Bailey, Brown, L. Johnson, Smith, Taft
Assistant Professors: Edwards, Ensley, Harrison, Slay, Taunton, Thomas
Instructors: Dulin-Mallory, Lindley, Williams

This division contains the Departments of Art and Design, English
Language and Literature, Modern Foreign Languages, Music, Religion and
Philosophy and Theater Arts. The B.A. degree is offered.

Nursing

Associate Professors: Kratina, Sauter

Assistant Professors: Bates, Guy, McClellan, Walsh, Williams

The Nursing Division is also the Department of Nursing. It offers the
A.A. degree, with the last class for this degree entering in September, 1994.
The B.S.N, degree is offered beginning fall, 1995.

Departments and Courses / 97

Natural Sciences and Mathematics

Professors: Hurd, James, Jolly, Shelhorse

Associate Professors: Duttera, Hicks, McClanahan, McCoy, Morrisett,

Riddle, Searcy

Assistant Professor: Mai lory

Instructor: Yin

The Natural Sciences and Mathematics Division contains the Departments
of Biology, Chemistry and Physics, Computer Science, and Mathematics. The
B.A. and B.S. degrees are offered.

Social and Behavioral Sciences

Professors: Evans, Gill, T. lohnson, Kraemer, Mills

Associate Professors: Cafaro

Assistant Professors: Burdett, Frassetto, Lightcap

This division contains the Departments of History, Psychology, Political
Science, and Social Work/Sociology. The A.A. and B.A. degrees are offered.

98 / Departments and Courses

Course Numbering System
and Abbreviations

The projected schedule of classes will be followed insofar as possible,
but is subject to change.

Courses numbered 100 through 199 are intended primarily for freshmen
and sophomores. Courses numbered 200 to 299 are intended primarily for
sophomores; the number may, alternately, mean credit of less than five
quarter hours.

Courses numbered 300 through 399 and above are intended primarily
for juniors and seniors.

Courses numbered 400 through 499 are intended primarily for seniors.

The number in parentheses following the course title indicates the num-
ber of quarter hours credit for the course.

Abbreviations

Art and Design ART

Biology BIO

Business Administration .... BUA

Chemistry CHM

College (Freshman Seminar) . COL

Computer Science CSC

Criminal Justice CJU

Dance DAN

Economics ECO

Education EDU

Early Childhood EDU

Middle Childhood EDU

English ENG

French FRN

Freshman Seminar COL

General Science GSC

Geography GEO

German GER

Health, Physical Education,

and Recreation HPR

Physical Education PED

History HIS

Library Science LSC

Mathematics MTH

Music MUS

Nursing NSG

Philosophy PHL

Physics PHY

Political Science PSC

Psychology PSY

Religion REL

Sociology/Social Work SOC

Spanish SPN

Speech SPC

Theater Arts THA

/99

Art and Design

The Art and Design major consists of studio concentrations in the fol-
lowing areas: Painting & Drawing, Photography, Ceramics & Sculpture and
Design. A student may choose a studio concentration in more than one
area. The courses required of the studio concentration are specific and
should be determined in consultation with the student's advisor when the
student first declares a major in art.

Objectives are established as a basis for the education program in Art
and Design at LaGrange College. These objectives also include a means of
determining deficiencies prior to graduation so that necessary steps can be
taken to correct these deficiencies. The objectives are:

1. to develop technical knowledge pertaining primary to the student's
chosen area of concentration, but not limited to it.

2. to help the students develop an artistic vocabulary, especially in
their specific area of concentration.

3. to assist the students in finding and focusing their creative ideas into
a consistent body of work.

4. to instruct the students in the correct means of presenting their work
in a portfolio or exhibition.

5. to give each student an understanding of graduate study in specific
studio areas.

6. to encourage students to exhibit their work and acquaint them with
the gallery system.

7. to require a freshman review, spring quarter, consisting mainly of
portfolio evaluations.

8. to provide the students with a creative environment by using all
available resources. This would include field trips to galleries and
museums, course work in locations of artistic interest, guest lectures
and workshops related to the exhibitions in the College's galleries.

To accomplish these objectives students will take the following courses:

30 hrs. of basic course requirements of all art majors ART 1 09, 110, 111,
151, 152, 153.

After these courses in studio (151, 152, 153) are completed students are
required to concentrate in one or two studio disciplines. The
courses required in these areas are:

AREAS OF CONCENTRATION

55 hrs. The Painting & Drawing Major ART 1 71 , 1 72 or 1 80, 1 73, 304,
311,351, 352,353, 356, 357.

55 hrs. The Design Major ART 171, 172 or 180, 173, 301, 304, 311,
320, 322, 323, 341 or 6 hrs. in Publications, 351 .

1 00 / Art and Design

55 hrs. The Photography Major ART 172 or 180, 173, 301, 311, 320,
323,324,325,351,352,353.

55 hrs. The Ceramics and Sculpture Major ART 171 or 173, 172, 180,
302, 311, 312, 327, 328, 351, 352, 353.

85 hrs. The Art Education Major Students should first be admitted to the
Undergraduate Teacher Education program which is delineated in
the Education section. Students are also required to complete at
least 20 quarter hours in each of these areas: Humanities, Social
Sciences, Natural Sciences and Mathematics.

Professional courses: Eduction 199, 362, 449, 459. Psychology
149, 302 and Art 171, 172, 173, 180,312,321, 323, 331,490.

Before the quarter of their graduation students are required to present
their work to the faculty in a critical review. From this review, work will be
selected for their senior exhibition.

Students who complete the Art and Design major have career options
that include the following:

Studio artists, advertising and illustration, textile design, production
pottery, commercial photography, art education.

Courses Offered:

109. Art History Survey I. (5) Fall.

An illustrated lecture course surveying the visual and plastic arts of Western Civilization from
the Paleolithic period through the Renaissance.

110. Art History Survey II. (5) Winter.

An illustrated lecture survey of the visual and plastic arts of Western Civilization from the
Baroque period to the present.

111. Art in the Twentieth Century. (5) Spring.

An illustrated survey and analysis of twentieth century painting and sculpture.

130. Publications Design I. (3) Fall.

This course will examine the concepts and techniques of creating publications culminating in
publishing the college yearbook. Topics will include principles of basic design, typography,
page layout, development of themes, use of artwork and computer techniques.

131. Publications Design II. (3) Winter.
Continuation of Publications Design I.

Prerequisite: Art 1 30

132. Publications Design III. (3) Spring.
Continuation of Publications Design II.

Prerequisite: Art 131.

151. Drawing Fundamentals. (5) Fall.

Work with line and tonal values to create form in space.

Art and Design 1 101

152. Basic Design. (5) Winter.

Fundamentals of design emphasizing color and composition.

153. Three-Dimensional Design. (5) Spring.

A basic course dealing with three-dimensional structure.

171. Painting. (5) Fall.

Course dealing with specific problems in space, color and form.

172. Sculpture. (5) Winter.

Basic problems in modeling, carving and construction.

173. Printmaking. (5) Spring.

Introductory work in basic graphic media; relief and intaglio.

180. Ceramics I. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

Basic work in forming clay using handbuilding and wheel throwing methods.

230. Publications Design IV. (3)

Continuation of Publications Design III.
Prerequisites: Art 1 30, 1 31 , 1 32

231. Publications Design V. (3)

Continuation of Publications Design IV.
Prerequisites: Art 1 30, 1 31 , 1 32, 230

232. Publications Design VI. (3)

Continuation of Publications Design V.
Prerequisites: Art 1 30, 1 31 , 1 32, 230, 231

301. Graphic Design Fundamentals. (5) Winter.

An introduction to the basic materials, techniques and terms of graphic design. Work will
cover the fundamentals of typography, layout, pasteup, desk top publishing and logo design.

302. Sculpture II. (5) Winter.

Work in construction and modeling using clay, wood, stone and metal.

303. Printmaking II. (5) Spring.

Work in intaglio, lithography, and silk screen processes.

304. Painting Watercolor. (5) Spring.

A course in transparent media working primarily with outdoor environments in problems
dealing with space and light.

311. Life Drawing. (5) Winter.

Study from the model with emphasis on the human form in composition.

312. Crafts. (5) Fall.

An introductory course in the designing and fabrication of wood and metal craft objects.

320. Graphic Design: Illustration. (5) Fall.

A course focusing on the materials and techniques of illustration for books, posters and maga-
zines. The course will include marker, gouache, pen and ink, and computer rendering tech-
niques.

102/ Art and Design

321. Textile Design: Weaving. (5) (On demand)
Basic course in fibers and loom weaving.

322. Graphic Design: Concepts. (5) Spring.

A course exploring the development of graphic ideas through projects in advertising, layout,
corporate identity, magazine and poster design and others. In-depth study of page layout
through traditional and computer techniques.

323. Photography. (5) Fall.

A basic course in black and white photographic expression including mechanics of process-
ing and printing.

324. Photographic Design. (5) Winter.

A course dealing with design and composition derived from photographic manipulation.
Prerequisite: Art 323 or consent of instructor.

325. Advanced Photography. (5) Spring.

Large format photography and advanced problems in exposure, lighting including color proc-
essing and printing.

Prerequisite: Art 323 or consent of instructor.

327. Ceramics II. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

Course in forming clay on a potter's wheel and firing and glazing.

328. Ceramics III. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

Emphasis on ceramic design using handbuilding and wheel methods and use of glazes in dec-
orating processes.

331. Elementary and Middle Childhood Art Education. (5) Fall.

Course emphasizing the development of the child through creative visual activity.

341. Internship. (5-15) (On demand)

Directed observation and practice in professional design related environment.

351, 352, 353. Studio Concentration. (5 each) Fall, Winter, Spring.

A major individual project in one area culminating in an exhibition the last quarter of the

senior year.

355. Perspective Drawing. (5) Fall.

Work in linear perspective utilizing Renaissance space.

356. Life Drawing II. (5) Winter.

Specific drawing problems using the human figure as a point of departure.

357. Drawing: Color. (5) Spring.

Drawing problems using color pencils, inks and paints.

490. Student Teaching. (15) (On demand)

Supervised observation and experience in the art classroom leading to full-time teaching by

the student.

/ 103

Biology

Specific Objectives for the Major

The Biology faculty works with their majors to help them develop an
understanding and working knowledge of the life phenomenon at subcellu-
lar through organismic levels. Within the major, a student may elect to
emphasize human biology, field-oriented biology or biochemical and
microscopic aspects of life science.

A plan of study to help the student pursue both the individual's and the
Department's objectives is developed by consultation between the student
and his advisor.

Method of Accomplishing Objectives

The student is presumed to have accomplished the specific collection of
objectives by satisfactorily completing the courses which constitute his
major. A major in biology consists of the following courses: Biology 101-
102 and- 40 more hours of biology as approved by the academic advisor;
Chemistry 101-102, 351-352; Mathematics through 111 or 122; Physics
101-102. In addition, one course from the following must be taken with
the approval of the major academic advisor; General Science 492, an
advanced Chemistry course, Mathematics 31 4 or 31 6, Physics 1 25.

The approved program of teacher education in secondary science with
emphasis in Biology and the professional education sequence will satisfy
the requirements for a major in Biology.

Demonstration of Accomplishment of Objectives

- The Biology department continues to use the success of its graduates in
the job market and in advanced study as a gauge of the applicability of its
goals and the success of the students in attaining these goals.

Career Options

Graduates of the College who have majored in Biology typically pursue
careers in teaching, pharmacy, medicine, dentistry or physical therapy. In
addition, many graduates find employment in industry some in labora-
tories, some in management and others in research and development. Most
careers require further formal study in graduate or professional schools.

Course Descriptions

101. General Biology I. (3 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

An examination of the organizational and operational aspects of living systems with emphasis

upon the structure and function of vertebrates.

1 04 / Biology

102. General Biology II. (3 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

A study of genetics, evolution, phylogeny, and ecology. It is strongly recommended that Bio

101 be taken first.

148. Human Anatomy and Physiology I. (5 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, Winter.
A study of the structure and function of the human body. Laboratory work: mammalian dis-
section and experiments plus human measurements.

149. Human Anatomy and Physiology II. (5 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter,
Spring.

A continuation of Biology 1 48.

318. The Teaching of Science in the Secondary Schools. (5 two-hour periods per week)

(5) (On demand)
Familiarization with several approaches to science teaching in high school. (On demand)

Prerequisites: Biology 101-102; Physics 101-102; Chemistry 101-102. Normally open only
to juniors and seniors in the Sciences.

320. Medical Microbiology. (5 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring.
A study of human diseases caused by pathogenic microbes and helminths.

321. Microbiology. (1 hr. lee, 8 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter, 1996.

A study of the morphology, physiology, classification, ecology, and economics of microbial
forms, especially bacteria and fungi.

Prerequisites: Biology 101-102; Chemistry 101-102. Chemistry 351-352 recommended.

334. Ecology. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring.

An introduction to the basic principles and concepts of ecology followed by population and
habitat studies.

Prerequisites: Biology 101-102; Chemistry 101-102; or consent of instructor. Biology 335
and/or 336 is recommended.

335. General Zoology. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring, 1996.

A phylogenetic survey of the animal kingdom with special emphasis upon parasitology, entro-
mology, ornithology, and mammalogy. Animal taxonomic studies based on local fauna.
Prerequisites: Biology 1 01 -1 02; Chemistry 1 01 -1 02.

336. General Botany. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring, 1995.

A phylogenetic survey of the plant kingdom with emphasis upon reproductive morphology
followed by the detailed anatomy of vascular plants. Plant taxonomic studies based on local
flora.

Prerequisites: Biology 1 01 -1 02; Chemistry 1 01 -1 02.

338. General Entomology. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, 1994.

An introduction to the study of insects. Emphasis is on insect morphology, biology and identi-
fication. A collection of insects identified to family level is required.
Prerequisite: Biology 102.

339. Field Problems in Ecology. (5) Fall, 1995.

A study of ecological problems and environmental parameters in the local area by means of
individual investigative procedures. (On demand)
Prerequisites: Biology 334 and permission of instructor.

Biology/} 05

340. General Parasitology. (4 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, 1994.
An introduction to the biology, life history and pathogenicity of parasites. Representative para-
sitic protozoans, helminths and arthropods are considered.
Prerequisite: Biology 102.

351. Vertebrate Embryology. (4 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring, 1995.

A study of the embryological development of representative vertebrates, with laboratory
emphasis upon the chick and pig.
Prerequisites: Biology 1 01 -1 02.

352. Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter,
1995.

A study of the structure of vertebrates with an analysis of the generalized vertebrate body plan
and specializations of this basic plan throughout the eight vertebrate classes. Lab emphasis
upon dissection of lamprey, shark, mudpuppy and cat.
Prerequisites: Biology 1 01 -1 02.

353. Fundamentals of Evolutionary Theory. (5 hrs. lee. per week) (5) Spring.

A balanced survey of the present-day concepts of the processes and products of evolution
with emphases on: 1) contrasting models and their consequences, 2) mass extinctions, 3) evo-
lution of man, 4) methods of science and pseudoscience, and 5) philosophical considerations.

360. Vertebrate Histology. (4 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring, 1996.
A study of tissue types and their organization into body organs.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, Biology 352 recommended.

373. Genetics. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, 1 994

A study of the unifying concepts of biological inheritance in individuals and populations.
Laboratory work includes both Drosophila crosses and experiments with microbial forms.
Prerequisites: Biology 101-102, 321 ; Chemistry 101-102, 351-352 (or enrollment therein)

374. Cell Biology. (6 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, 1 995.

A study of the structure and function of cell organelles as well as diversity of cell types.
Laboratory work involves cell cultures and immunological experiments.

Prerequisites: Biology 101-102, 321 ; Chemistry 101-102, 351-352 (or enrollment therein).

383. Animal Physiology. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter, 1 996.
A study of the physiology of vertebrates, with emphasis upon mammals. A systems approach
to mammalian solutions of physiological problems. Laboratory work involves physiological
experiments with frogs, rats, and human subjects.

Prerequisites: B\o\ogy 101-102; Chemistry 101-102. Chemistry 351-352 recommended.

386. Plant Physiology. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) (On demand)

A study of basic plant principles such as cell properties, photosynthesis, respiration; growth,

and water-mineral-soil relationships.

Prerequisites: Biology 101-102, 334, and 336; Chemistry 101-102, 351-352.

430. Environmental Science (4 hrs. lee, one 3-hr. lab per week) (5) Fall, 1 994.

An introductory course bringing together the many different themes of the man-environment

field.

Prerequisites: open to juniors and seniors in any major.

106/

Business Administration

I. Introduction

The Graduate and undergraduate programs in business administration
are accredited nationally by the Association of Collegiate Business Schools
and Programs (ACBSP).

The Business Administration and Economics faculty members intend to
accomplish three primary goals, within the context of a liberal arts educa-
tional environment, and with the highest possible level of professional
competence. The goals are to help students develop (1) increased under-
standing of the nature and purposes of our business system and of our eco-
nomics system and of the relationship of business to the socioeconomic
system in which it operates; (2) increased understanding of and proficiency
in the major business functions; and (3) increased understanding of micro-
and macro-economic theory and policy choices.

The program is designed to serve both the general student population
and department majors. As a contribution to the general requirements area,
the department provides an introduction to economic thought with ECO
101 Contemporary Economic Issues. The department also provides oppor-
tunities for students majoring in other areas to supplement their curricula
by taking courses which can help them increase their understanding of the
role and functioning of business, and of our economic system. This is par-
ticularly pertinent for majors in the Social Sciences and Computer Science.

For students who elect to move beyond this introduction and pursue a
major in business, the department offers several undergraduate degree pro-
grams. Students can pursue the A. A. degree with a major in business, a
B.A. with a major in business, and in economics; or the Bachelor of
Business Administration degree, with a concentration in either accounting,
business economics, general business management, or international
business. The department also offers course work leading to the Master of
Business Administration degree (See Graduate Bulletin). The Economics
program is described in the section on Economics.

The department provides for the majors the background to enter gradu-
ate and professional schools, and to obtain employment in a wide variety
of organizations.

II. Objectives

Business Administration For non-majors, the Business Administration
course offerings seek to provide students with the opportunity to develop a
basic understanding of business and its role in the economy, and to gain
greater knowledge of the several major functions of business.

Business Administration / 1 07

The program for students who pursue the A. A. degree is designed to
help them accomplish a combination of a basic liberal arts foundation plus
a basic understanding of business.

The objective of the B.A. degree program is to provide students with a
comprehensive understanding of both the qualitative and quantitative
aspects of the functions of business, while giving them an extensive oppor-
tunity to pursue unrelated or related course work. This is the liberal studies
degree in business. There is ample room for electives in this program. It is
designed to provide valuable and useful background for any of a wide vari-
ety of career options which the student may elect to pursue.

The B.B.A. program is designed to provide students with both a compre-
hensive understanding of enterprise management, and an opportunity to
develop in-depth knowledge and proficiency in one or more specific func-
tional areas. This degree program provides an additional twenty quarter
hours of course work in the discipline, leading to a concentration in
accounting, business economics, general business, or international busi-
ness. Many of the students who pursue the B.B.A. degree are those who
seek careers in enterprise management, or as specialists in the specific area
of concentration. The concentration in accounting prepares students to sit
for the Certified Management Accountant examination. Students wishing to
sit for the Certified Public Accountant examination will need to complete
additional coursework to meet the new licensing requirements that will
become effective in the state of Georgia in May 1 998.

During their sophomore year students may declare their intentions to
pursue a major in business administration. Business administration majors
should note that the requirements for the major, including required
courses, applicable to them are those in effect when they declare their
major, not those in effect when they first entered the college. A passing
score in a comprehensive Departmental Assessment Test is required for
graduation. This D.A.T. may be repeated as necessary.

III. To accomplish the objectives, students will take the following courses:

A. Associate of Arts (major in Business Administration)

1. General Education curriculum.

2. Business Administration 40 qtr. hrs.
BUA 160 Introductory Accounting
BUA251 Business Law I

BUA 355 Principles of Managerial Finance (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 371 Principles of Management (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 373 Organizational Behavior (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 380 Principles of Marketing (5 cr. hrs.)

and two more 5 cr. hr. courses in Business Administration courses

at the 200 level or higher.

1 08 / Business Administration

B. Bachelor of Arts (major in Business Administration)
BUA 160 Introductory Accounting (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 163 Managerial Accounting (5 cr. hrs.)

ECO 201 Principles of Microeconomics (5 cr. hrs.)

ECO 203 Principles of Macroeconomics (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 240 Information Systems and Microcomputer Applications

(5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 251 Business Law I (5 cr. hrs.)

MTH 314 Statistics (5 cr. hrs.)

MTH 360 Finite Mathematics (5 cr. hrs.) (or MTH 122, or ECO 301)

BUA 355 Principles of Managerial Finance (5 cr. hrs.)

BUS 371 Principles of Management (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 373 Organizational Behavior (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 380 Principles of Marketing (5 cr. hrs.)

BUS 392 International Business (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 395 Junior Seminar (2 cr. hrs.)

BUA 440 Management Simulation (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 451 Senior Seminar (3 cr. hrs.)

Plus 5 additional credit hours in business/economics electives at the

300 level or higher.

C. Bachelor of Business Administration

1 . Core courses:

BUA 160 Introductory Accounting (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 163 Managerial Accounting (5 cr. hrs.)

ECO 201 Principles of Microeconomics (5 cr. hrs.)

ECO 230 Principles of Macroeconomics (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 240 Information Systems and Microcomputer Applications

(5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 251 Business Law I (5 cr. hrs.)

MTH 314 Statistics (5 cr. hrs.)

MTH 360 Finite Mathematics (5 cr. hrs.) (or MTH 1 22, or ECO 301 )

BUA 355 Principles of Managerial Finance (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 371 Principles of Management (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 373 Organizational Behavior (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 380 Principles of Marketing (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 392 International Business (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 395 Junior Seminar (2 cr. hrs.)

BUA 440 Management Simulation (5 cr. hrs.)

BUA 451 Senior Seminar (3 cr. hrs.)

Plus 5 additional credit hours in business/economics electives at

the 300 level or higher. (BUA 360 for Accounting Concentration)

2. One of the following concentration:

a. Accounting: BUA 361 and three of the following courses:
BUA 362, 363, 364, 365, 366, 460.

Business Administration 1 1 09

b. Business Economics: ECO 301 and 303 (Intermediate Micro
and Macroeconomic Theory) Plus two additional economics
courses at the 300 level or higher.

c. General Business (Management): Four additional business
courses at the 300 level or higher (excluding economics and
accounting courses).

d. International Business: BUA 393, ECO 323, ECO 325 plus an
additional elective course to be approved by the chair of the
Business Administration department. Lastly, an academically-
based International Study Program of appropriate duration
outside the United States is also required.

IV. Students who complete the majors offered in the department have
found employment in a number of organizations, including public service
(military and non-military, federal, state or local), education, manufactur-
ing, finance and retailing. Our graduates are self-employed, or work for
small or large organizations.

V. Course Descriptions:

Business Administration

151. Introduction to Business. (5)

A brief introduction to the origin and nature of our business system, the important purposes
and concepts involved in each of the major business functions, and the relationship of busi-
ness to our economy and to the society in which it operates.

160. Introductory Accounting. (5)

This course will introduce students to the basic concepts in accounting including the analysis
of financial statements as basis for decision making and problem solving tools.

163. Managerial Accounting. (5)

A study of managerial control systems and the uses of accounting information for planning
and control; including analysis and interpretation of data and use of cost information for busi-
ness policy implementation.

Prerequisites: BUA 1 60 or consent of instructor.

240. Information Systems and Microcomputer Applications (5)

An introduction to the field of Management Information Systems and to special and general
purpose software applicable to business.

251. Business Law I. (5)

A course designed to provide a knowledge of law that a student will need in business. The stu-
dent begins with the constitutional background of law, a study of the law of contracts, agency
and employment, and negotiable instruments. Stress is given to the impact of the UCC.
Prerequisite: Sophomore standing, or consent of the instructor.

110/ Business Administration

302. Applied Decision Sciences I. (5)

A study of the basic models and quantitative skills used in business problem analysis. Includes
such topics as statistical inference, optimization and programming models.
Prerequisite: MTH 360 or consent of instructor.

310. Managerial Economics. (5)

Focuses on the use of micro-economic principles and mathematical/statistical tools to
make/analyze business decisions.
Prerequisite: ECO 201 .

322. Social and Legal Environment of Business. (5)

A study of current social problems faced by business with particular attention paid to the
background factors giving rise to those problems, various proposed solutions, and the
approach that is currently being followed.

Prerequisite: Senior standing, or consent of instructor.

352. Business Law II. (5)

A continuation of BUA 251 . The student studies personal property and sales, government reg-
ulation of business, real property and other questions of law and business.
Prerequisite: Sophomore standing, or consent of instructor.

355. Principles of Managerial Finance. (5)

A comprehensive survey of the basic tools and models utilized in contemporary financial
management decisions.

Prerequisites: BUA 1 60 and Sophomore standing, or consent of instructor.

356. Intermediate Managerial Finance. (5)

An in-depth study of special managerial finance topics, including financial analysis, capital
budgeting, cost of capital, and long-term financing decisions.

Prerequisite: BUA 355, or consent of instructor. (Offered on demand)

360. Intermediate Accounting I. (5)

An in-depth analysis of the accounting and reporting process and accounting theory, together
with a study of current problems in reporting financial position, income determination, and,
an integration of current professional pronouncements.
Prerequisite: BUA 1 60, or consent of instructor.

361. Intermediate Accounting II. (5)

A continuation of BUA 360 with emphasis on the measurement and reporting of the source(s)
of corporate capital and the relationship of these sources to income determination. Additional
topfcs include depreciation, depletion, amortization of intangibles, long-term investments and
debt. The impact of professional pronouncements is stressed.
Prerequisite: BUA 360, or consent of the instructor.

362. Cost Accounting. (5)

Cost accounting principles and techniques applied to job order and process systems. Planning
and control techniques such as CVP analysis, variance analysis, capital budgeting and man-
agement decisions. Construction of static and flexible budgets.
Prerequisite: BUA 1 60 or consent of the instructor.

363. Advanced Accounting. (5)

A study of special topics including partnerships, installment sales, home office-branch rela-
tionships, consolidated financial statements, and non-profit accounting.
Prerequisite: BUA 361 , or BUA 366, or consent of instructor.

Business Administration / 1 1 1

364. Income Taxation (5)

An in-depth study of the tax code as it relates to corporations and individuals. Updated to
incorporate new tax laws, regulations, and printed rulings.
Prerequisite: BUA 1 60, or consent of instructor.

365. Auditing. (5)

Study of internal and external auditing standards, objectives and techniques. Pronouncements,
ethics, reporting and the legal liability of auditors are emphasized.
Prerequisite: BUA 1 60, or consent of the instructor.

366. Intermediate Accounting III. (5)

A continuation of BUA 361 with emphasis on current special topics in financial accounting
such as accounting for pensions, leases, accounting charges, earnings per share and income
recognition. Continued emphasis on professional pronouncements.
Prerequisites: BUA 360, BUA 361 , or consent of the instructor.

371. Principles of Management. (5)

A course designed to afford students an opportunity to gain an understanding of the "science"
of management (the underlying body of knowledge relevant to management) including theo-
ries, concepts, principles, techniques, and tools that apply. In addition, attention is given to
the development of examples that demonstrate the application of the "science" in specific sit-
uations which is the "art" of management (wise application of the science). This is primarily a
lecture course but class participation in discussion is encouraged. Testing requires that stu-
dents demonstrate an adequate understanding of the "science" and the "art" of management.

372. Production/Operations Management. (5)

A study of the application of the science of management in the production/operations man-
agement environment. Primary emphasis will be placed on theories, concepts, principles,
techniques, and tools that improve the efficiency and effectiveness of the production/opera-
tions manager. Much emphasis is placed on the proper use of quantitative tools and tech-
niques; therefore, it is strongly recommended that students taking this course have an
adequate mathematical background. Testing in this course will require that students demon-
strate competence in the above-mentioned areas. Offered on demand.
. Prerequisites: Junior standing, BUA 271 and MTH 314 or MTH 360.

373. Organizational Behavior. (5)

A study of the internal structure of organizations. Provides theoretical and conceptual frame-
work for analyzing individual and group behavior within organizations.
Prerequisite: BUA 371.

374. Interpersonal Relations in Organizations. (5)

A study of human interaction in the organizational context. Topics to be covered include self-
concept, frames of reference, values and attitudes, barriers and breakdowns in communications.
Prerequisite: BUA 373 or consent of instructor.

376. Managing Human Resources. (5)

The study of the basic principles and functions of effective personnel administration, and
human resource management. Extensive use is made of the case method of study. Students
gain experience looking at personnel problems, individually and as members of varying sizes
of groups.
Prerequisites: BUA 373.

112/ Business Administration

377. Career Management. (2)

This course provides students with an opportunity to investigate career options. Students learn
how to manage their careers under changing business and economic conditions.
Prerequisite: Junior standing.

378. Compensation Management. (3)

This course emphasizes the design, development and management of compensation systems.
Topics considered include job evaluation methods, wage and salary surveys, incentive plans
and determination of individual pay.

Prerequisite: BUA 376 or consent of instructor.

380. Principles of Marketing. (5)

An introduction to the important principles of marketing management, the marketing perspec-
tive, marketing strategy planning, and the critical importance of this approach on the overall
effectiveness of the total enterprise.

381 . Advanced Marketing. (5)

Intensive study of selected aspects of marketing management, and of the role of marketing in our
economic system. Particular emphasis on helping students to further their analysis, decision-
making and communication skills in this context.
Prerequisite: BUA 380 or consent of instructor.

382. Promotion. (5)

Examination of the strategy, planning and implementation of a marketing promotion program.
Covers the three major areas of marketing persuasion; personal selling, advertising, and sales
promotions. Including analysis of media resources and public relations as basic elements in
an effective promotion campaign.

391. Managing A Small Business. (5)

A study of the application of the science of management to the development and manage-
ment of the small business enterprise. Opportunities, characteristics, and problems with the
small business will be evaluated. Students will be required to develop a business plan for a
small business and when possible students will be given an opportunity to work on special
projects with small businesses in the community. The class requires active participation by
students in and out of the classroom.

Prerequisites: BUA 355, 371 , 380 or consent of instructor.

392. International Business. (5)

A study of the major opportunities, challenges, and approaches to increased effectiveness in
the international business area.

Prerequisites: BUA 355, 371 , 380 and ECO 201 , 203.

393. Cultural Aspects of International Business. (5)

A study of the cultural risks confronting the business manager in an international environ-
ment. The course will survey differences in values and codes of behavior among a number of
cultures, giving the student an opportunity to learn how to read and respond to the organiza-
tional culture of regulators, business associates and customers across cultural borders.
Prerequisite: BUA 392.

395. Junior Seminar. (2)

This course seeks to begin facilitating students' transition from college to the business world or
to graduate school. Emphasis is given to resume preparation, interviewing and other aspects
career/graduate school search.

Prerequisites: Junior standing with at least 30 credit hours required for major.

Business Administration / 1 1 3

440. Management Simulation. (5)

This is the capstone course tor B.A. (with major in Business Administration) and B.B.A. stu-
dents. It incorporates the use of a computer-based simulation in an effort to integrate all the
functional areas of business into one comprehensive course. Students are required to work in
groups as managers of a simulated company and make the necessary marketing, finance, eco-
nomic, accounting and management decisions to run their company effectively. The student's
grades are a function of individual and group performance.

Prerequisites: Senior standing, completion of all requirements (except BUA 450). In excep-
tional circumstances the permission of the instructor may be obtained to waive the above
requirements. Students must have been formally accepted as a business administration major.
BUA 420 must be taken concurrently with BUA 440.

451. Senior Seminar. (3)

As one of the capstone courses the Senior Seminar seeks to promote students' integration of
major concepts covered separately in prior courses. It also serves as a follow up on the career/
graduate school search initiated in the Junior Seminar. The Departmental Assessment Test is
one of the requirements for this class.

Prerequisites: Senior standing with at least 50 credit hours required for major.

460. Internship in Business. (5-15)

Practical experience through placement of selected majors in private/public firms or organiza-
tions. No more than 5 credit hours per quarter for a maximum of 15 credit hours in internship
program may be taken.

Prerequisites: Senior standing, student must have been formally accepted as a business
major. Additionally, a C.P.A. of 3.00 or higher and/or recommendation of business depart-
ment faculty.

114/

Chemistry

Chemistry is often referred to as the central science, because chemical
concepts are used throughout the other sciences. Therefore, in addition to
being a major in its own right, the study of chemistry is a part of many cur-
ricula. The Chemistry Department focuses its introductory chemistry course
as an element in a liberal education, a service to other departments and the
beginning of a comprehensive study of Chemistry. The department offers
both B.A. and B.S. majors as well as a minor which can lead to a variety of
future occupations. Students with majors in chemistry have gone on to tra-
ditional pursuits such as Graduate School in Chemistry or Biochemistry,
Pharmacy, Medical School, Law School (Patent Law, Corporate Law), as
well as becoming Laboratory Technicians and Salespeople for chemistry
related industries. A growing field is Environmental Science, which is
strongly founded in chemistry.

The B.A. degree offers a broad background in chemistry while allowing
ample time for extensive coursework in other fields. The B.A. is appropri-
ate for those interested in one of the medical or law related professions or
for students desiring the broadest possible education as well as an empha-
sis in natural science. The B.S. program is designed for those going on to
graduate school in a chemically related field (Chemistry, Biochemistry,
Molecular Biology, Chemical Physics, Environmental Chemistry) or those
seeking employment as chemists after graduation. The B.S. degree is gener-
ally more highly valued at professional schools where entrance standards
are high. While the B.S. degree is more demanding of a student's time,
there is sufficient time for electives outside the sciences.

The specific objectives for the respective degrees are as follows:

The Bachelor of Science Degree

Students who earn the B.S. degree will be appropriately competent in
the following areas:

1 . Atomic and molecular structure and chemical bonding.

2. The language of chemistry
'3. Equilibria

4. Periodic relationships

5. Thermochemistry

6. Physical measurements on chemical systems

7. Experimental skills, including data organization and analysis

8. Recognition, structure and reactivity of the major organic functional
groups

9. Experimental synthesis and characterization of organic compounds
by physical and instrumental methods (including IR and NMR)

10. Volumetric and gravimetric analytical theory and practice

11 . Instrumental analytical theory and practice

Chemistry/ 1 1 5

12. Thermodynamics

13. Chemical dynamics

14. General overview either of advanced inorganic and organic chem-
istry or of biochemistry

15. The fundamentals of the research process in chemistry

Students earn these competencies by pursuing the following Bachelor of
Science curriculum:

Chemistry 101, 102, 103

Chemistry 311, 312

Chemistry 351, 352, and 353

Chemistry 361, 362, 363

and 1 additional hours at the 400-level

Additionally, a research experience is required. This should be taken
between the junior and senior years or during the first two quarters of the
senior year. This may be done on campus, in industry, or in a research uni-
versity in a summer program. Students may elect to earn 495 credit for this
required activity.

Supporting courses that are required are the following:

Mathematics 122, 123

Physics 121, 122, 123

Computer Science 163 and one programming course

Note: The scheduling of the B.S. curriculum is important. Students
should be prepared to take the physical chemistry sequence. This requires
that calculus be taken during the freshman year and physics during the
sophomore year. Most students choose to begin their chemistry during the
freshman year. The freshman year curriculum might be the following:

Fall Winter Spring

MTH 122 MTH 123 additional MTH

general education CHM 101 CHM 102

general education general education general education

Students who earn the B.S. degree will have demonstrated their attainment
of the specific objectives by appropriate scores on the current American
Chemical Society (ACS) Exams on five of the following eight exams or exam
groups:

1 . General Chemistry

2. Organic Chemistry

3. Analytical Chemistry

4. Instrumental Chemistry

5. Dynamics and Thermodynamics (2 exams) or Physical Chemistry

6. Inorganic

7. Biochemistry

The passing score will be at or above the 40th percentile of the national
norms for these exams or at an appropriate level, as determined by the
Chemistry Department, based on the accumulated data of the performance of

116/ Chemistry

LaG range College students on these exams. The results which are in the best
interest of the students will be used.

These exams are given at the end of the appropriate course(s) and may be
repeated up to three additional times prior to the student's scheduled gradua-
tion. The student must attempt a retest at least once a quarter until successful
completion of the exam. In the event that a student needs to stand for an
exam for the second, third or final time, evidence of adequate preparation
must be presented. Re-examination cannot be scheduled earlier than two
weeks following the previous examination.

The Bachelor of Arts Degree

Students who earn the B.A. degree will be appropriately competent in
the following areas:

1 . Atomic and molecular structure and chemical bonding

2. The language of chemistry

3. Equilibria

4. Periodic relationships

5. Thermochemistry

6. Physical measurements on chemical systems

7. Experimental skills, including data organization and analysis

8. Recognition, structure and reactivity of the major organic functional
groups

9. Experimental synthesis and characterization of organic compounds
by physical and instrumental methods (including IR and NMR)

1 0. An overview of one or more of the following areas: analytical chem-
istry, inorganic chemistry and/or biochemistry

Students earn these competencies by pursuing the following courses
required for Bachelor of Arts curriculum in chemistry:

Chemistry 101, 102, 103

Chemistry 351, 352, 353, 361, and 362

and fifteen additional hours at or above the 300-level

The support courses required are Physics 1 01 , 1 02 or 1 21 , 1 22,

Mathematics 122 and Computer Science 163

Students who earn the B.A. degree will have demonstrated their attain-
ment of the specific objectives by appropriate scores on the current
American Chemical Society (ACS) Exams for (1) General Chemistry and
(2) Organic Chemistry. The passing score will be at or above the 40th per-
centile of the national norms for these exams or at an appropriate level, as
determined by the Chemistry Department, based on the accumulated data
of the performance of LaGrange College students on these exams. The
results which are in the best interest of the students will be used. These
exams will be given at the end of the appropriate course(s) and will be
offered to students up to three additional times prior to the time of the stu-
dents' scheduled graduation. The student must attempt a retest at least

Chemistry/ 1 1 7

once a quarter until successful completion of the exam. In the event that a
student needs to repeat an exam for the second, third or final time, evi-
dence of preparation must be presented. Reexamination cannot be sched-
uled earlier than two weeks following a previous examination.

MINOR

A minor shall consist of CHM 101, 102, 103, 351, 352, 353, and two
additional courses at the 300 level or above. Students must demonstrate
proficiency in General Chemistry by passing the ACS General Chemistry
Exam as stated above.

Course Descriptions

Chemistry is a laboratory science and the department views the labora-
tory experience as an essential component of those courses with an associ-
ated laboratory. Consequently, a passing grade must be achieved in both
the lecture and the laboratory portions of the course to obtain a passing
grade in the course.

101. General Chemistry. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, Winter.

A study of the foundations of chemistry including stoichiometry, atomic structure and perio-
dicity, molecular structure and bonding models, the gas, liquid and solid phases.
Prerequisite: MTH 11 1 or placement at MTH 1 22.

102. General Chemistry II. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter, Spring.

This course continues 101 and is a study of oxidation reduction reactions and electrochem-
istry, chemical thermodynamics, kinetics, and equilibrium.
Prerequisite: CHM 101.

103. General Chemistry III. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, Spring.

This course is a continuation of Chemistry 102 with special emphasis on equilibria, thermody-
namics, organometallics, applications of computers to chemistry, and other special topics in
chemistry. The ACS exam for General Chemistry will be given at the conclusion of this course.
Prerequisite: CHM 102, CSC 163 and permission of the department.

311. Quantitative Analysis I. (3 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring.

A study of the theory and practice of volumetric and gravimetric quantitative analyses. The
ACS exam in Analytical Chemistry will be administered at the conclusion of this course.
Prerequisite: CHM 1 01 -1 02.

312. Quantitative Analysis II. (3 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring (even years).

A study of instrumentation and advanced analytical techniques. The ACS exam in Instrumental
Chemistry will be administered at the conclusion of this course.
Prerequisite: CHM 362 or permission of the department.

318. The Teaching of Science in the Secondary Schools. (5 two-hour periods per week)

(5) (On demand)
Familiarization with several approaches to science teaching in high school. (On demand)

Prerequisites: BIO 101-102; PHY 101-102; CHM 101-102. Normally open only to juniors
and seniors in the Sciences. (See also BIO 318.)

118/ Chemistry

351. Organic Chemistry I. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall.

A study of the fundamentals of organic chemistry with respect to the bonding, structure,
nomenclature and reactivity of the various classes of organic compounds.
Prerequisite: CHM 102.

352. Organic Chemistry II. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter.
A continuation of CHM 351 .

Prerequisite: CHM 351.

353. Organic Chemistry III. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring.

A continuation of CHM 352. The ACS exam in Organic Chemistry will be administered at the
conclusion of this course.
Prerequisite: CHM 352.

361. Physical Chemistry I. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall.

A study of the basic principles of Physical Chemistry including the properties of gases, ther-
modynamics, thermochemistry, changes of state, and the phase rule.
Prerequisites: CHM 102, PHY 102 or 122, MTH 122.

362. Physical Chemistry II. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter.

A continuation of 361 including electrochemistry, kinetic molecular theory of gases, ion trans-
port, and chemical kinetics.
Prerequisite: CHM 361.

363. Physical Chemistry III. (4 hrs. Iec v 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Yearly.

A continuation of 361-362, includes an introduction to Quantum Chemistry, Chemical
Bonding, Atomic and Molecular Structure, and Spectroscopy. The Physical Chemistry ACS
exam will be administered at the completion of this course.
Prerequisites: CHM 362, MTH 123, PHY 103 or 123.

442. Inorganic Chemistry I. (3) Winter.

An examination in some depth of atomic and molecular structure and bonding. Symmetry
aspects are introduced and used.

Prerequisite: CHM 362 or consent of instructor.

443. Inorganic Chemistry II. (3) Spring.

A continuation of 442 with emphasis on coordination and organometallic chemistry.
Chemical periodicity is covered. The ACS in inorganic chemistry is the final exam for 443.
Prerequisite: CHM 442.

454. Qualitative Organic Analysis. (1 hr. lee, 8 hrs. lab per week) (5) (On demand)
A study of the theory and practice of the separation and identification of organic compounds
by the transformation of organic functional groups.
Prerequisite: CHM 353.

474. Chemical Synthesis and Characterization. (1 hr. lee, 8 hrs. lab per week) (5) (On

demand)
This course is concerned with the synthesis and analysis of either organic or inorganic com-
pounds using modern laboratory techniques.
Prerequisite: CHM 353.

Chemistry/ 119

483. Biochemistry I. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall.

An introductory course in the principles of biochemistry, with emphasis on the structure and
function of biomolecules, membrane structure and function, and an introduction to metabo-
lism and bioenergetics.

Prerequisites: BIO 101-102; CHM 101-102, 351-352.

484. Biochemistry II. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter.

A continuation of Chemistry 483 with emphasis on cellular metabolism, fundamentals of mol-
ecular genetics, and current topics in biochemistry. The ACS examination for biochemistry
will be administered at the conclusion of this course.
Prerequisite: CHM 483.

485. Biochemistry III. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring.

A laboratory intensive course in the modern techniques of molecular biology. The course
includes restriction analysis of DNA preparations, cloning genes, electrophoresis, Southern
Blots, PCR, site specific mutagenesis and other pertinent techniques.
Prerequisites: CHM 483, 484 or BIO 321 and 373.

495, 496 Independent Study Special Topics

120/

Computer Science

The computer science faculty members of LaGrange College have sev-
eral goals. As a service to the general student population, courses are
offered to acquaint students with the impact of computers on society and
the ways in which computers are used. For students who want to further
study in computer science, a minor and two major programs are offered.

Computer science majors in the B.A. and B.S. degree programs should:

1 . be able to write programs in a reasonable amount of time that work
correctly, are well documented, and are readable;

2. be able to determine whether or not they have written a reasonably
efficient and well-organized program;

3. know what general types of problems are amenable to computer
solution, and the various tools necessary for solving such problems;

4. be able to assess the implications of work performed either as indi-
vidual or as a member of a team;

5. understand basic computer architectures;

6. be prepared to pursue in-depth training in one or more application
areas or further education in computer science.

7. In addition, students in the computer science track of the B.S. degree
program should be able to do research, be able to convey technical
ideas in a clear writing style, and have the mathematical background
necessary for scientific problem-solving. Students in the business track
of the B.S. degree program should have the knowledge of the func-
tional areas of business necessary for working in that environment.

To accomplish these objectives, students will do the following: in order
to be a major in the Computer Science Department, a student must have a
GPA of 2.25 or better. The student may elect to pursue a B.A. degree, one
of two tracks in a B.S. degree (either the computer science track or the
business track), or a minor. For all options mentioned, students must take
CSC 161, 199, 299, and one of the following three courses: CSC 280, 285,
or 296 (except that the business track of the B.S. degree requires CSC 285).
All students at LaGrange College are required to take CSC 163 as a general
requirement.

All of the 100-level or above courses in computer science and in mathe-
matics which are required for the B.S. and B.A. degrees and the minor
must be completed with a grade of C or better, and the average in these
courses for those pursuing the B.S. degree must be at least 3.0.

Additional requirements for the B.A. degree include eight 300-level, or
above, computer science courses including CSC 300, 305, and 325; and
four mathematics courses including MTH 1 22, 1 23, and two of the follow-
ing: MTH 1 24, 335, 370, 410, and either 31 4 or 31 6.

Additional requirements for the computer science track of the B.S.
degree are ten 300-level, or above, computer science courses including
CSC 300, 305, 325, and either 470 or 495; five mathematics courses

Computer Science / 1 2 1

including MTH 122, 123, and three of the following: MTH 124 335, 370,
410, and either 314 or 316; and five additional hours in computer science.
PHY 101/102 or 121/122 must betaken as general requirements.

Additional requirements for the business track of the B.S. degree include
CSC 286, 300, 495, and three of the following: CSC 315, 325, 405, 415,
425, and 430; BUA 160, 240, 355, 371, 380, 440 and five additional
hours in business excluding BUA 151; MTH 122; MTH 360 or BUA 372;
and MTH 314 or 316 (316 preferred). ECO 101 must be taken as a general
requirement.

Additional requirements for the minor include four 300-level, or above,
computer science courses, including CSC 300.

The accomplishment of these objectives will be demonstrated by the
following:

1. satisfactory performance on a programming test. This test will be
based on the concepts learned in CSC 199 and 299 and should be
taken at the end of the quarter in which the student completes CSC
299. The test will be offered once at the end of every quarter in
which CSC 299 is offered. The test must be satisfactorily completed
by the end of the quarter in which the student reaches a total of 1 35
hours of coursework, but under no circumstances will the students
be allowed to take the test more than four time prior to and includ-
ing that quarter. If the test has not been completed satisfactorily by
that time, the student will not be allowed to continue in either the
B.A. or the B.S. degree programs in computer science.

2. satisfactory performance on a comprehensive test administered by the
Computer Science Department. This test will cover concepts learned
in CSC 161, 163, 199, 280/285/296, 299, 300, and, in addition, will
cover selected topics from other 300-level, and above, computer sci-
ence courses. The test must be taken when the student completes the
coursework listed in the previous sentence. It will be offered once per
quarter; however, a student is allowed to take the test a maximum of
four times prior to his or her scheduled graduation. Upon failure to
satisfactorily complete the test in four attempts, the student will not
be allowed to graduate with a major in computer science.

Students who complete the computer science major have a wide range of
employment opportunities. These include positions in sales, programming,
and data processing and control. Graduates of the computer science degree
program at LaGrange College have secured positions as systems engineers,
data processing managers, systems analysts, customer service representa-
tives, and computer technicians, as well as other positions. Companies
employing these graduates include Milliken & Co., Bell South, Texas
Instruments, General Motors, the U.S. government, the state of Florida,
Hughes Aircraft, West Point Pepperell, Total System Services, and others.

In addition, a number of graduates have gone on to graduate school in
areas such as computer science and electrical engineering.

122/ Computer Science

Course Descriptions

151. BASIC Programming. (5)

An introduction to programming and algorithm development using the language BASIC.

160. Introduction to Networks and Unix. (2)

A course designed to teach students how to use the LaGrange College network and the basic
Unix commands needed to use the network effectively.

161. Introduction to Editing and System Languages. (2)

This course is designed to assist and familiarize the student with the operating system of a
minicomputer and with the various editing techniques that are available. The course is
designed for computer science students and for those who need to learn the Unix operating
system.

NOTE: This course may be repeated once by any student who took it prior to Fall Quarter
1987.

163. Introduction to Microcomputers. (2)

This course is designed to assist and familiarize the student with the operation of a personal
computer and the operation of a disk operating system (DOS). This course also covers per-
sonal computer applications such as word processors, spreadsheets, and database systems.

164. Advanced WordPerfect. (2)

The study of WordPerfect involving more advanced techniques than in CSC 1 63.
Prerequisite: CSC 163.

165. Advanced Lotus. (2)

The study of Lotus 1-2-3 involving more advanced techniques than in CSC 163.
Prerequisite: CSC 163.

199. Introduction to Algorithmic Design. (5)

Problem solving and algorithmic design in a procedural language (Pascal). Structured pro-
gramming concepts, debugging and testing, documentation.

280. FORTRAN Programming. (5)

The study of FORTRAN, a language used primarily in science, mathematics and engineering.

285. COBOL Programming I. (5)

The study of COBOL, a language used primarily in business data processing applications.
Emphasis on information retrieval problems. Team project required.

286. COBOL Programming II. (5)

Advanced programming concepts with a strong emphasis on ISAM files and interactive pro-
gramming.

Prerequisite: CSC 285.

296. C Programming. (5)

Advanced programming concepts using the language C, which is a general-purpose language
implemented on a Unix operating system.

Prerequisite: CSC 1 99 or any 200-level CSC course.

Computer Science/ 1 23

299. Algorithmic Design. (5)

A continuation of CSC 199. Further development of techniques for program design, program
style, debugging and testing, especially for larger programs. Introduction to algorithmic analy-
sis. Introduction to the basic aspects of string processing, recursion, internal search/sort meth-
ods, and simple data structures.
Prerequisite: CSC 199.

NOTE: CSC 1 99 IS A PREREQUISITE FOR ALL OF THE FOLLOWING COURSES.

300. Introduction to Computer Systems. (5)

Computer structure and machine language, assembly language programming. Addressing
techniques, macros, file I/O, program segmentation and linkage, assembler construction, and
interpretive routines.

305. Introduction to Computer Organization. (5)

Basic logic design, coding, number representation and arithmetic, computer architecture, and
computer software.

315. Introduction to File Processing. (5)

Concept of I/O management (fields, keys, records, and buffering). File organization, file opera-
tions, and data structures. Time and storage space requirements. Data security and integrity.
Prerequisite: CSC 300 or 325 or consent of instructor.

325. Data Structures. (5)

Review of basic data structures such as stacks, queues, lists, and trees. Graphs and their appli-
cations. Internal and external searching and sorting. Memory management.

311. Organization of Programming Languages. (5)

An introduction to the structure of programming languages. Language definition structure,
data types and structures, control structures and data flow. Run-time consideration, interpreta-
tive languages, lexical analysis and parsing.
Prerequisite: CSC 300 or consent of instructor.

355. Digital Computer Architecture. (5)

Structures for the central computer are studied; arithmetic logic units, machine language fea-
tures, information transfer, memory hierarchy, channels, etc.
Prerequisite: CSC 305.

370. Discrete Mathematical Structures in Computer Science. (5)

An introduction to the mathematical tools for use in computer science. These include sets,
relations, and elementary counting techniques. Algebra and algorithms, graphs, monoids and
machines, lattices and Boolean algebras, groups and combinatorics, logic and languages will
also be involved.

Prerequisite: MTH 1 23 or consent of instructor.

405. Database Management Systems Design. (5)

Introduction to database concepts. Data models, normalization, data description languages,
query facilities. File organization, index organization, file security, and data integrity and reli-
ability.

Prerequisite: CSC 31 5 or consent of instructor.

124/ Computer Science

410. Numerical Methods. (5)

Introduction to numerical analysis with computer solution. Taylor series, finite difference cal-
culus, interpolation, roots of equations, solutions of linear systems of equations, matrix inver-
sion, least-squares, numerical integration.

Prerequisite: MTH 1 24 or consent of instructor.

415. Advanced Program Design. (5)

A formal approach to techniques in software design and development. Includes structured
programming concepts, organization and management of software development. A large-scale
software project will be developed by students working in teams.
Prerequisite: CSC 325.

420. Theory of Programming Languages. (5)

Review of grammars, languages, and their syntax and semantics. Scanners, parsers, and trans-
lation.

Prerequisite: CSC 331 .

425. Algorithms. (5)

A study of problems and their algorithmic solution. Algorithms will be chosen from areas such
as combinatorics, numerical analysis, systems programming, and artificial intelligence.
Domain independent techniques will also be included.
Prerequisite: CSC 325.

430. Computer Graphics. (5)

Graphics characteristics and graphics-related language features. Animation. Software tools for
computer graphics. Analytic geometry and computer graphics. Basics of 3-D graphics. Hidden
line and hidden surface routines.
Prerequisite: CSC 300 or consent of instructor.

450. Operating Systems. (5)

A course in systems software that is largely concerned with operating systems. Such topics as
process management, device management, and memory management are discussed, as are
relevant issues associated with security and protection, networking, and distributed operating
systems.

Prerequisite: CSC 300.

451-2-3. Special Topics. (5)

This series of courses will provide the student with material not covered in the courses above.
Topics such as telecommunications, microcomputer interfacing, artificial intelligence,
automata theory, survey of modern languages, fourth-generation languages, operating sys-
tems, and object-oriented design will be covered.
Prerequisite: Determined by topic.

470. Research in Computer Science. (1-5)

Research project or paper in computer science. Designed for those students who need it to
fulfill the research component of the B.S. degree in computer science. Student must present a
course description in writing to the department chairman to be approved by the end of pre-
registration during the quarter prior to enrolling for the course.

495. Independent Study. (5)

/ 125

Criminal Justice

A student may seek an Associate of Arts degree in criminal justice or
may elect criminal justice courses as part of another program.

Students completing an A. A. degree will have a general education lib-
eral arts orientation with a basic theoretical and practical understanding of
the criminal justice system.

To accomplish these objectives students will take the following courses:

1. Completion of four hours of physical education or its equivalent, or
criminal justice/sociology electives.

2. Satisfactory completion of the general education curricula.

3. Satisfactory completion of the following criminal justice core
courses:

Criminal Justice 101 Introduction to Law Enforcement 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 102 Introduction to Corrections 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 1 03 Police Administration 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 301 Criminal Law I 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 302 Criminal Law II 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 303 Criminal Investigation 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 306/Dual listed Sociology 306 Juvenile
Delinquency 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 307/Dual listed Sociology Criminology 5 hrs.

Total Hours 95

In addition to the above listed requirements the accomplishment of the
A.A. objectives will be demonstrated by an interview with an examination
by a panel of selected law enforcement officers.

Students who complete the A.A. degree in Criminal Justice have career
options that include:

1 . Law Enforcement

2. Correctional Services

Course Descriptions:

100. Firearms Familiarization. (2)

This course provides the criminal justice student with the basic knowledge of proper use and
safe handling of a handgun for the purpose of self-defense within the boundaries of thelaw.

101. Introduction and Law Enforcement. (5)

A very broad orientation and introduction to the field of law enforcement.

102. Introduction to Corrections. (5)

A course designed to provide an overview of the United States correctional system.

103. Police Administration. (5)

A study of policy organizations and their related managerial functions.

126/ Criminal Justice

104. Introduction to Police Operations. (2)

A course designed to provide students with the basic knowledge of how a police department
functions within the realm of city ordinances, state and federal laws.

301. Criminal Law I. (5)

An overview of criminal procedure from arrest and trial through appeal.

302. Criminal Law II. (5)

A review and analysis of the elements of American criminal statutes.

303. Criminal Investigation. (5)

A study of the scientific, procedural and intuitive aspects of the investigation of crimes against
persons and property.

306. Juvenile Delinquency. (5)

An analysis of the nature and causes of juvenile delinquency and an evaluation of treatment
or preventative programs in this area of behavior.

307. Criminology. (5)

A study of criminal behavior and its treatment. An overview of treatment of the offender by
means of imprisonment, probation, and parole.

/ 127

Dance

The following courses in dance are offered. Dance courses fulfill the
general education physical education requirements.

106. Folk and Square Dance. (1)

Experiences in the techniques of various forms of folk and square dancing.

140. Beginning Tap. (1)

An introduction to the basic techniques and skills of tap as they apply to musical theater.

150. Beginning Jazz. (1)

An introduction to the basic techniques and skills of jazz as they apply to musical theater.

151. Intermediate jazz. (1)

A continuation of DAN 1 50.

160. Beginning Ballet I. (1)

An introduction to the basic techniques of skills of classical ballet. This course incorporates
barre exercises stressing correct placement and conditioning of muscles to balletic control,
along with center floor exercises emphasizing skills learned at barre.

161. Beginning Ballet II. (1)

A continuation of Beginning Ballet I, increasing the variety of steps learned.

162. Beginning Ballet III. (1)

A continuation of Beginning Ballet II, combining more steps in center floor practice.

163. Intermediate Ballet I. (1)

Classical ballet class consisting of barre and center floor work introducing epaulement, adage,
pirouettes, petite allegro and grand allegro combinations.

164. Intermediate Ballet II. (1)

A continuation of Intermediate Ballet I.

165. Intermediate Ballet III. (1)

A continuation of Intermediate Ballet II.

170. Advanced Ballet. (1)

The most challenging level of classical ballet consisting of a more intricate barre and center,
increases of tempo, multiple pirouettes and tours, and more sustained adages. The student
will work not only on clarifying technique but on performing skills as well.

128/

Economics

I. Introduction:

The Economics and Business Administration faculty members intend
to accomplish three primary goals, within the context of a liberal arts
educational environment, and with the highest possible level of profes-
sional competence. The goals are to help students develop (1 ) increased
understanding of the nature and purposes of our business system and of
our economic system, and of the relationship of business to the socio-
economic system in which it operates; (2) increased understanding of
and proficiency in the major business functions; and (3) increased
understanding of micro- and macro-economic theory and policy
choices.

The program is designed to serve both the general student popula-
tion and department majors. As a contribution to the general require-
ments area, the department provides an introduction to economic
analysis with ECO 101. Contemporary Economic Issues. The depart-
ment also provides opportunities for students majoring in other areas
to supplement their curricula by taking courses which can help them
increase their understanding of the role and functioning of business,
and of our economic system. This is particularly pertinent for majors
in the Social Sciences and Computer Science.

For students who elect to move beyond this introduction and pur-
sue a major, the department offers several undergraduate degree pro-
grams. Students can pursue the A.A. degree with a major in business;
a B.A. with a major in business, or in economics; or the Bachelor of
Business Administration degree, with a concentration in either
accounting, business economics, or general business management.
The department also offers course work leading to the Master of
Business Administration degree.

The department provides for the majors the background to enter
graduate and professional schools, and to obtain employment in a
wide variety of firms.

II. Objectives:
Economics:

For non-majors, the Economics course offerings seek to provide stu-
dents with a general understanding of basic economic principles and
to supplement their major field of study with elective courses in vari-
ous areas of applied economics.

For majors, the Economics curricula seeks to prepare students for
professional careers in the private or public sector as well as to prepare
them for additional academic endeavors in Economics or Business
Administration at the graduate level.

Economics/ 1 29

Students completing a major in Economics will have a thorough
understanding, at the intermediate level, of micro- and macro-economic
theory and policy choices plus a solid foundation in quantitative analy-
sis. They will also be well informed in the historical development of eco-
nomic thought and will have surveyed various specialized areas of
applied economics.

III. To accomplish the objectives students will take the following courses:
Bachelor of Arts (major in Economics)

ECO 201 Principles of Micro-economics
ECO 203 Principles of Macro-economics
ECO 301 Intermediate Micro-economics
ECO 302 History of Economic Thought
ECO 303 Intermediate Macro-economics
ECO 325 International Economics
ECO 331 Money and Banking
ECO 395 Junior Seminar
ECO 451 Senior Seminar

15 additional hours in economics or selected MTH courses with
advisor's approval.
MTH 314 Statistics
MTH 1 22 Anal. Geometry & Calculus I

IV. The accomplishment of these objectives will be assessed after an
intensive review of the student's progress and accomplishments. The
student will demonstrate this competence by a satisfactory score on a
comprehensive examination, which may include both written and
oral segments. This departmental assessment must be taken during the
senior year and may be repeated as necessary.

V. Students who complete the majors offered in the department have
found employment in a number of organizations, including public ser-
vice (military and non-military, federal, state or local), education,
manufacturing, finance and retailing. Our graduates are self-
employed, or work for small or large organizations.

VI. Course Descriptions:

101. Contemporary Economic Issues. (5)

This is a basic economics course for non-majors. It is designed to provide students -with an
understanding of introductory economics principles to analyze, from an economic perspec-
tive, issues such as the population explosion, poverty, energy, pollution, unemployment, infla-
tion, etc.

201. Principles of Micro-economics. (5)

Price Theory: The study of the economic behavior of individual households and firms.
Distribution Theory: The study of how factor prices are determined. Price and output deci-
sions are examined under various types of market structures.

1 30 / Economics

203. Principles of Macro-economics. (5)

General Introduction to economics, the determination of the aggregate levels of income, out-
put, employment and prices and the examination of fiscal and monetary policies.

301. Intermediate Micro-economics. (5)

At the intermediate level, analysis of the processes by which the behavior of individuals and
firms under different market conditions affects the allocation of resources in a market-oriented
economy.

Prerequisite: ECO 201 , or consent of instructor.

302. History of Economic Thought. (5)

Attempts to relate the history of economic thought to the intellectual tendencies of various
periods in an effort to explain how and why economic thought evolved at a given time.
Prerequisites: ECO 201 , 203, or consent of instructor.

303. Intermediate Macro-economics. (5)

At the intermediate level, analysis of the factors that determine the general level of prices, out-
put, and employment as well as an examination of fiscal and monetary policies in an open
economy.

Prerequisite: ECO 203, or consent of instructor.

310. Managerial Economics. (5)

Focuses on the use of micro-economic principles and mathematical/statistical tools as basis
for analyzing business decisions.

Prerequisite: ECO 201 , or consent of instructor.

31 2. Economic History of the United States. (5)

A study of the economic development of the United States, from colonial times to the present.
Attention is paid to the influence of individuals, geography and institutions to the economy of
the United States.

322. Social and Legal Environment of Business. (5)

A study of current social problems faced by business with particular attention paid to the
background factors giving rise to those problems, various proposed solutions, and the
approach that is currently being followed.

Prerequisite: Senior standing, or consent of instructor.

323. Comparative Systems. (5)

A study, and an evaluation of the theories underlying present day economic systems. Factors
relating to the development of sample economics are explored. Policies currently being fol-
lowed as well as proposed changes are discussed, with respect to maintenance of full
employment, distribution of income and economic growth.
Prerequisites: ECO 201, 203, or consent of instructor.

325. International Economics. (5)

A study of the different theories of international trade and evaluation of the effects of regional
economic integration and restrictions to world trade. An examination of the mechanisms of
international payments, the foreign trade exchange markets and balance of payments adjust-
ments under different exchange rate systems.

Prerequisites: ECO 201 , 203, or consent of instructor.

Economics/ 131

331. Money and Banking. (5)

Study of banking and other financial institutions, as well as the examination of different
schools of thought on monetary policy and theory.
Prerequisite: ECO 203, or consent of instructor.

332. Public Finance. (5)

Analysis of the impact of governmental expenditures, taxation and credit upon production
and the distribution of income. Examination of the structures of the federal, state and local tax
systems.

Prerequisites: ECO 201 , 203, or consent of instructor.

342. Government and Business. (5)

A study of the interrelationships between the public and private sectors the relationship
between government and business, between government and labor, and government and agri-
culture. An examination of the reasons for, and the development of legislation, and case law
relating to the relationship between the public and private sectors. A study of the rise of
administrative law, and the regulatory agencies.

Prerequisites: ECO 201 , 203, or consent of instructor.

343. Labor Economics. (5)

A study of the problems of wages and employment, from both a micro- and macro-economic
approach. An examination of the goal of full employment in relationship to fiscal policy. A
study of labor market considerations. A study of organized labor and collective bargaining.
Prerequisites: ECO 201 , 203, or consent of instructor.

395. Junior Seminar. (2)

This course seeks to begin facilitating students' transition from college to the business world or
to graduate school. Emphasis is given to resume preparation, interviewing and other aspects
career/graduate school search.

Prerequisites: Junior standing with at least 30 credit hours required for major.

451. Senior Seminar. (3)

As one of the capstone courses the Senior Seminar seeks to promote students' integration of
major concepts covered separately in prior courses. It also serves as a follow up on the
career/graduate school search initiated in the Junior Seminar. The Departmental Assessment
Test is one of the requirements for this class.

Prerequisites: Senior standing with at least 50 credit hours required for major.

460. Internship in Economics. (5-15)

Practical experience through placement of selected majors in private/public firms or organiza-
tions. No more than five credit hours per quarter for a maximum of 15 credit hours may be
taken in internship.

Prerequisites: Senior major in economics, 3.00 or higher G.P.A. and/or recommendation of
business/economics department faculty.

132/

Education

Introduction

The department of Education offers a wide range of courses to meet a
variety of needs and demands. The education curriculum at LaGrange
College serves four basic purposes.

1 ) to provide for development of those professional understandings and
abilities which are essential to the professional role to be assumed
by the student.

2) to provide planned and carefully guided sequences of laboratory
experiences where the student will have opportunities to translate
theory into action.

3) to provide programs in Early Childhood Education, Middle Childhood
Education, Secondary Education, and Art Education at the undergrad-
uate level which are approved by the Georgia Professional Standards
Commission.

4) to provide programs leading to the Master of Education degree in
Early Childhood Education and Middle Childhood Education which
are fully accredited by the Southern Association of Colleges and
Schools and the Georgia Professional Standards Commission.

Teacher Certification

LaGrange College offers a variety of degree programs which are approved
by the Georgia Professional Standards Commission and lead to certification
in Georgia. Students desiring to be certified upon completion of their pro-
grams should plan to work especially close with their advisers since certifica-
tion requirements are subject to change.

At the undergraduate level, completion of an approved program con-
ducted by the college and a qualifying TCT score entitles a student to be
certified at the NT-4 level. Graduates who have an NT-4 certificate may
qualify for Performance-Based Certification (PBT-4) by demonstrating per-
formance through an on-the-job assessment.

Master of Education programs (Please see Graduate Bulletin).

Admission to Undergraduate Teacher Education

In order to be admitted to Teacher Education, a student must meet the
following criteria:

A. Have an overall G PA of 2.25 or better.

B. Writing proficiency a grade of C or better in English 101, 102,
and 103.

C. Oral proficiency a grade of C or better in a speech course. (SPC 1 05)

Education / 133

D. Past performance a recommendation from a former college pro-
fessor.

E. Prognosis for success an evaluation during Education 199, intro-
duction to Education pertinent to:

a. attendance

b. attitude

c. cooperation

d. oral and written delivery skills

e. enthusiasm for teaching, etc.

F. Complete the form for admission to Teacher Education and file in the
registrar's office.

G. Students who have taken the majority of the course work for their
major at another college in history, mathematics, English, chemistry,
biology or art must post a satisfactory score on the Georgia Teacher
Certification Test or they will be asked to take additional undergrad-
uate course work in their discipline as a condition to being admitted
to Teacher Education.

A student that has not met all the above criteria may be admitted provi-
sionally provided he or she has an overall GPA of 2.25 or better. The student
admitted provisionally has three quarters in which to meet all of the criteria.
A student may not register for an advanced course requiring a laboratory
experience until all criteria for admission have been met. An education
major whose GPA drops below 2.25 will be placed on departmental proba-
tion and has two quarters in which to remove the probationary status. Failure
to do so may result in being dropped from the teacher education program.

General Education Requirements

All students planning to complete approved programs of Teacher
Education to qualify for a teaching certificate must complete at least 20
quarter hours in the humanities and social sciences outlined below.
Additionally, 10 quarter hours in Natural Sciences and 10 quarter hours in
mathematics are required. It should be noted that English 101, 102, 103
and Speech 105 are prerequisites for admission to undergraduate Teacher
Education and are not counted as part of this 60 quarter-hour requirement.

Natural Sciences
Humanities Social Sciences and Mathematics

Drama Economics Biology

English Geography Chemistry

Fine Arts History Earth Science

Foreign Languages Political Science Geology

Music Psychology Mathematics

Philosophy Sociology Physics

Religion
Speech

1 34 / Education

Curricula for Professional Education

The curricula outlined for teacher education candidates are so arranged
that a student may qualify for certification in Art Education, Early
Childhood Education, Middle Childhood Education, or Secondary
Education as approved by the Georgia Professional Standards Commission.
For secondary certification planned programs are offered in English,
History, Mathematics, Biology and Chemistry.

To complete an approved program of teacher education in any field,
these steps must be followed: (1) admission to Teacher Education, (2)
admission to student teaching at the beginning of the quarter prior to stu-
dent teaching, (3) an overall 2.25 GPA in the Bachelor's degree program,
(4) a C or better in all courses applied to the teaching field and in the pro-
fessional education courses, and (5) application for the teaching certificate
at the end of the final quarter. Conferences with the student advisor are
required at each step.

OBJECTIVES

Approved Program in Early Childhood Education

Students completing the Early Childhood Education Major will:

1) develop a thorough understanding of the social, intellectual, physi-
cal, and emotional development of the child from birth to approxi-
mately eight years.

2) identify the nature of learning and behaviors involving the young
child.

3) construct a curriculum appropriate to the needs of the young child.

4) utilize existing knowledge about parents and cultures in dealing
effectively with children.

5) gain a thorough knowledge of the fundamental concepts of appropri-
ate disciplines and to relate them to the young child's understanding.

6) identify the value, place and responsibilities of para-professionals in
the differentiated teaching staff.

'7) develop his maximum potential through the provision of a succes-
sion of planned and guided experiences:
In order to achieve these objectives, students will take the following
courses:

Professional courses: Education 199, 342, 360, 365, 449, 459, 490C.
Specialized subject matter: Art 331 ; Education 31 7, 319, 341 , 355, 456,
458; Health and Physical Education 320, 331 .

Education / 1 35

Approved Program in Middle Childhood Education

Students completing the Middle Childhood Education Major will:

1) demonstrate knowledge of middle grade learners in actual learning
situations

2) identify appropriate instructional strategies and created environ-
ments to meet the social, emotional, physical and academic needs of
individual children and small groups of children with diverse cul-
tural backgrounds.

3) understand research, professional practices, issues, trends and litera-
ture essential for effective teaching throughout the teaching field
with special emphasis on the middle grades (4-8).

4) understand diagnostic tools and approaches necessary for assessing
needs of individual students, planning to meet those needs, and
evaluating individual growth.

5) be aware of need to modify instruction and change strategies based
on the learning outcomes of previous activities.

6) demonstrate appropriate professional traits in terms of classroom man-
agement, discipline, preparedness, and interaction with co-workers.

In order to achieve these objectives, students will take the following
courses:

Professional courses: Education 199, 363, 449, 459, 490M; Psychology
302, 304.

Core courses: Education 318, 322, 355, 455 and 457.

Major concentrations must be selected from the following: mathematics,
language arts, science, or social studies.

The twenty-five hour major concentration will include EDU 355 and the
methods course for area selected (EDU 318, 322, 455 or 457).

Minor concentrations may be selected from mathematics, language arts,
science, social studies or from HPR or art.

The twenty hour minor concentrations will include the methods course
for area selected.

Approved Programs in Secondary Education

In secondary education a major is required in the chosen teaching disci-
pline. Approved programs are listed in this catalogue under the major
department. The Education Department cooperates with other departments
in counseling students about their choice of majors. The objectives for
each area of specialization is listed in the catalogue under the major
department.

In order to achieve the objectives, the student will take the following
courses:

Professional courses: Education 199, 362, 449, 459, 490S; Psychology
302, 304.

136/ Education

Additionally, a method's course, taught by the Department in which a
student is majoring is required. Education 355 is required for English certi-
fication.

Courses in English: All courses required for the major.

Courses in secondary science (Biology): Biology 101, 102 and 40 addi-
tional hours of Biology approved by the major adviser; Chemistry 101,
102, 351 and 352; Physics 101, 102 and 103, Math through 111 or 122
and 314 or 316; Biology 318. This program satisfies the requirements for a
major in Biology.

Courses in secondary science (Chemistry): Chemistry 101, 102, 103, 351,
352, 353, 361, 362, and 15 additional hours in Chemistry; fifteen hours of
Biology; Computer Science 163; fifteen hours of Physics; Mathematics 122;
and Chemistry 318. This program satisfies the requirements for a B.A. major
in Chemistry.

Courses in History: History 101, 102, 111, and 112; two courses from
307, 308, 310 and from 330, 331, 332, 372, 374, 375; History 490, Senior
History Seminar; History 360, Social Science Methods and three additional
courses at the 300 level in History. One 300 level course in two of the fol-
lowing areas: Economics, Sociology, Political Science. The Department
strongly recommends that students seeking certification select History 315
and 306 as electives and background for the Georgia Teacher Certification
Test.

Courses in Mathematics: Mathematics 122, 123, 124, 306, 310, 316, 322,
333, 335, 340, plus two additional mathematics courses as approved by the
department chairman. Also, Computer Science 151 and 163 are required.

Approved Program in Art Education

The Art Education curriculum is designed to meet the State of Georgia
requirements for kindergarten through twelfth grade teacher certification in
art.

The objectives for students who complete the approved program in Art
Education are:

-1) to be competent in a wide range or expressive media and have an
understanding of the traditions of particular media

2) to be aware of and be able to present the means, through visual
expression, to humanize a growing technological society

3) to be sensitive to a wide array of visual expression and be able to
relate historically, culturally, and ethnically to various forms of
image, symbolic and representation

4) to be cognizant of various methodologies for teaching art and be
able to discern the best methods for diverse teaching requirements

5) to present art and art-related activities as vocational and avocational
objectives

Education / 1 37

6)) to be teachers who are themselves practicing artists and active in
promoting the visual arts in their communities.

In order to achieve these objectives, students will take the following
courses:

Professional courses: Education 199, 362, 449, 459; Psychology 149,
302, and Art 171, 172, 173, 180, 312, 321, 323, 331,490.

CAREER OPTIONS

Students who complete an Education Major should be well-prepared to
teach in their chosen fields as well as pursue an advanced degree.
Education Majors have many career options. Some jobs taken by recent
graduates include management and supervisory positions in business and
industry, flight attendants, travel agents, day care directors, and teachers
and directors of church related pre-school programs.

Course Descriptions

199. Introduction to Education. (5)

An introduction to the field of education.
Prerequisite to all other education courses.

*317. Science for Early Childhood Teachers. (5)

An introduction to the process of concept formation in science for the pre-school child by
means of science observations and explanation of the natural world.

*318. Science in the Middle School. (5)

An introduction to the major ideas and accomplishments in all fields of science, with particu-
lar reference to the needs of science, with particular reference to the needs of the middle
childhood teacher.

319. Mathematics for Early Childhood Teachers. (5)

A study of mathematical concepts unique to early childhood education.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 1 22 or permission of adviser.

322. Mathematics for Middle School Teachers. (5)

A study of mathematical concepts unique to middle school education and effective tech-
niques and procedures of instruction.

Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 1 22 or permission of adviser.

333. Exploring Multimedia. (5)

This course will provide teachers and students the opportunity to use multimedia equipment
which will enable them to combine text, colorgraphics, picture images, music, voice, and full
motion video. Participants will experience and work with the latest multimedia computer
technology.

341 . Early Childhood Music and Creative Activities. (5)

Selection and presentation of activities for young children in art, music, science, literature,
and related fields which aid in the development of cognitive competency.

138/ Education

342. Child Development. (5)

Basic principles of child growth and development from birth to 9 years. Studies theories of
child development; and physical, cognitive, language, and social development. Special
emphasis on impulse control, ego development, and discipline techniques for young children.

*355. Teaching of Reading. (5)

Foundations course for the teaching of reading. Examines teaching strategies, different
approaches to reading, assessment procedures, and classroom organizational patterns in terms
of their effect upon the child's expected course of reading development. Emphasis on diagno-
sis of reading problems, prescription for their remediation, and strategies for implementation.
Field experience required.

*360. Early Childhood Curriculum and Methods. (5)

Considered theories, values, and practical aspects of curriculum development. Explores the
use of planning tools, assessment techniques, learning objectives, and taxonomies. Studies
methods of classroom procedure, functional units, use of various types of media, evaluation
of pupil growth. Field experience in grade K-4 required.
Prerequisite: Education 449 or permission of instructor.

*362. Secondary Curriculum and Methods. (5)

A general methods course for prospective secondary teachers. Appropriate specific subject-
matter, problems of curricula, classroom management, supervised study, and observation in
public secondary schools.

Prerequisite: Education 449 or permission of instructor.

*363. Curriculum in the Middle Schools. (5)

A course for Middle Education majors dealing with basic principles of curriculum develop-
ment. Supervised observation in middle childhood classrooms.
Prerequisite: Education 449 or permission of instructor.

365. Practicum in Early Childhood Development. (5)

Focuses on children and families in a multicultural, multiracial, multiethnic American society
with a particular emphasis on development of children as growing human beings. Examines
strategies for working with parents and providing parent education. Field experience required.
Prerequisite: Education 342.

372. Methods of Classroom Management. (5)

A course designed to assist students in investigating and evaluating the relationship between
teacher effectiveness and classroom management. Specifically how teacher planning, organi-
zation, and effectiveness relate to classroom management. Emphasis will also be given to var-
ious roles expected of a teacher, alternative approaches to classroom discipline, both large
and small group organization, and awareness of teacher stress, causes, and related problems.

449. Microteaching Using Media. (5)

The theory, preparation, and utilization of multi-sensory aids. Instructional aids will be the
basis for student conducted micro teaching.

*455. Language Arts in the Middle School. (5)

A course dealing with methods of teaching the language arts skills with emphasis on listening,
speaking, writing and reading competencies.

*456. Children's Literature and Language Arts. (5)

A course dealing with basic approaches and competencies in the teaching of children's litera-
ture and language arts skills.

Education 1 1 39

*457. Social Studies in the Middle School. (5)

Objectives, methods, content, and materials in middle school social studies programs.

*458. Social Studies in the Elementary School. (5)

Objectives, methods, content, and materials in elementary school social studies programs.

459. Introduction to Pupils with Special Needs. (5)

A study of identification and diagnostic techniques for teachers related to areas of exception-
ality among students and of alternative styles of teaching to meet special needs.

461. Geography in the Elementary Schools. (5)

Introductory regional geography focusing on map skills and the ways cultural groups around
the world use their landscapes and environment.

t490C Early Childhood Student Teaching. (15)

Prerequisites: September Experience, senior status; and approval of the Chairman of the
Education Department.

t490M. Middle Childhood Student Teaching. (15)

Prerequisites: September Experience, senior status; and approval of the Chairman of the
Education Department.

t490S. Secondary Student Teaching. (15)

Prerequisites: September Experience, senior status; and approval of Chairman of the
Education Department.

Restricted to Education Majors.

140/

English Language and Literature

INTRODUCTION

The Department of English Language and Literature offers a wide range
of courses to meet a variety of needs and demands: English for foreign stu-
dents; journalism; business and technical writing; English literature,
American literature, and continental literature in translation; freshman
composition; and basic review. The aim of the Department is to teach pro-
ficiency in the use of the English language and to acquaint students with
the best of their literary heritage. In our decade of increased specialization
and highly restricted curricula for future lawyers, physicians, engineers,
and business executives, it is misleading to assume that the student inter-
ested in language and literature has no career options outside the field of
education. While many dedicated people find teaching to be a satisfying
livelihood, there is documentary evidence "that training in English and lit-
erature, particularly at the college level, is invaluable preparation for
futures in four outstanding professional areas: law, medicine, business and
federal service" (See English: The Professional Major by Linwood Orange.
This pamphlet, published in its fourth edition by the Modern Language
Association of American, 1986, is available in the Department of English
and in the Office of Admission.)

The Department of English Language and Literature has established a
Writing Center which is located in Banks Library. This center serves the
college community by providing advice and critique for student papers.
The center is directed by qualified professionals who direct the upperclass
students serving as writing peers of writing fellows. The hours of the center
are posted.

OBJECTIVES

All students at LaGrange must take courses in basic composition and in
literature. The primary objectives are for all students to:

(1) demonstrate proficiency in expository writing with standard English
grammar, punctuation, and usage.

(2) demonstrate proficiency in critical reading.

(3) demonstrate ability to assimilate, organize, and develop ideas logi-
cally and intelligently.

(4) understand rudiments of research-based writing.

(5) become acquainted with the best of Western society's literary heritage.

(6) gain basic skills in a language other than English. To that end, the
student majoring in English must take three courses from French,
German, or Spanish. Substitutes may be permitted by consent of the
Chairman.

English Language and Literature/ 141

Three courses from 104, 105, 106, 107 are required as prerequisites to
the major in English, which consist of English 302 (Advanced Grammar),
English 335 (Shakespeare), and nine additional courses at 300-level or
above. English 302 and 335 are offered once each year. Other courses are
offered on an alternating basis so that a major-level student has a balanced
but wide selection from which to choose his nine "elective" courses.

ACCOMPLISHMENT OF OBJECTIVES

For the major and non-major, each student will pass three courses in
Readings and Composition, demonstrating competent reading and writing
skills (See "Objectives" on previous page).

Additionally for the English major, there will be an exit examination to
be completed before the student is eligible for graduation. During the
junior year each student must take the ETS Major Field Achievement Test in
Literature in English. At least one quarter prior to graduation each student
is required to take the ACAT for Literature in English.

Course Descriptions

010. English for International Students I. (12) with lab Fall.

A course to introduce students to American culture and to familiarize them with principles of
grammar, syntax, and paragraph writing. A laboratory, equivalent to two (2) hours credit, will
emphasize auditory perception, vocabulary comprehension, and oral conversation.

011. English for International Students II. (5) Winter.

A continuation of ENG 010 with emphasis on oral conversation and extended writing assign-
ments, organizing the material in standard rhetorical patterns.

100. English Review. (3) (On demand)

Reading practice, sentence and paragraph writing and review of grammar and mechanics.

101. Readings and Composition I. (3) Fall, Winter, Spring.

Effective expository writing, with the reading of selected prose from Western philosophy. A
review of grammar is included.

Prerequisite to all higher-numbered English courses.

102. Readings and Composition II. (3) Fall, Winter, Spring.

A continuation of ENG 101, with reading selections from Western philosophical thought, sup-
plemented with selected poems, short stories, and essays.
Prerequisite to all higher-numbered English courses.

103. Readings and Composition III. (3) Fall, Winter, Spring.

Advanced expository writing, with the addition of the term report. Readings in the humanities,
the natural sciences and technology, and the social sciences.
Prerequisite to all higher-numbered English courses.

104. English Literature I. (5) (On demand)

An examination, in historical context, of selected masterpieces of English literature from
Beowulf to the eighteenth century.

Prerequisite: This course or ENG 105 prerequisite to all 300-level English courses.

1 42 / English Language and Literature

105. English Literature II. (5) (On demand)

The works of British writers of the Pre-Romantic, Romantic, and Victorian periods.
Prerequisite: This course or ENG 104 prerequisite to all 300-level English courses.

106. Masterpieces of American Literature I. (5) (On demand)

A study, in historical context, of selected masterpieces of American literature to 1865.

107. Masterpieces of American Literature II. (5) (On demand)

A study of selected masterpieces of American literature from 1 865 to the present.

108. Backgrounds of World Literature. (5) (On demand)

The reading and examination of selected literature in translation, emphasizing the Greek and
Roman classics as well as some of the literature of Western Europe to about 1 850.

151. Journalistic Writing. (2) (On demand)

An introduction to basic types of writing for newspapers and magazines: news, feature, inter-
view, review, and editorial. Assignments directed toward possible publication in area newspa-
pers. May be repeated for credit.

151X. College Newspaper Journalism. (1) (On demand)

A workshop for preparation and publication of The Hilltop News. May be taken indepen-
dently of ENG 151 and repeated for credit.

153. Business and Technical Writing. (2) (On demand)

A study of the basic skills needed to prepare business letters and technical reports, with signif-
icant attention to a review of the fundamentals of English grammar.

255. 256. Writing About Film. (2 credit hours each) (On demand)

A film authors series, emphasizing important foreign and American films and approaches to

writing about them.

300. Methods of Teaching English in the Secondary School. (5) (On demand)

A course dealing with the basic approaches and practical competencies >n the teaching of

language skills and literature.

302. Advanced Grammar. (5) Winter.

An intensive analysis of the traditional approach to grammar with attention to historical ori-
gins and an examination of structural and transformational-generative variations in the analy-
sis of grammar. Required for the major in English.

3101 Creative Writing. (5) (On demand)

Practice in imaginative writing poetry and fiction. Analysis of some professional writing,

but emphasis on student work.

311. Advanced Literary Theory and Composition (5) (On demand)
An introduction to literary theory and analysis of fiction and poetry.

313. Continental Backgrounds. (5) (On demand)

An examination of major classics, in modern translation, of Greek, Roman, Medieval, and
Renaissance literature to about 1 61 6.

314. Masterpieces of Continental Literature. (5) (On demand)

Major European classics in translation from the Renaissance through the nineteenth century.

English Language and Literature 1 143

315. Contemporary Latin American Literature. (5) (On demand)

A survey of Latin American prose and poetry since 1945, including writing from Mexico,

Brazil, Colombia, Chile, and Guatemala.

320. The Age of Chaucer. (5) (On demand)

A survey, mostly in Middle English, of English literature to about 1500, including selected

works of Chaucer.

323. History of the English Language. (5) (On demand)

The historical development of the language, a study of its structure and its relation to other

tongues.

335. 336. 337. Shakespeare. (5) Spring

The development of Shakespeare's art, as reflected in selected individual plays or groups of

plays. Required for the major in English.

340. English Literature of the Renaissance. (5) (On demand)
Renaissance English literature to about 1675, excluding Shakespearean drama.

345. Milton. (5) (On demand)
Selected poetry and prose of Milton.

350. Restoration and Eighteenth-Century English Literature. (5) (On demand)
Selected Restoration, Neoclassical, and Pre-Romantic English literature, excluding the novel.

351. The English Novel in the Eighteenth Century. (5)

A study of the rise of the English novel with an emphasis upon selected works of the late sev-
enteenth century and eighteenth century novelists.

361. The English Novel in the Nineteenth Century. (5) (On demand)
A study of the selected works of Romantic and Victorian novelists.

363. Romanticism in English Poetry. (5) (On demand)

A study of the works of selected major nineteenth century British poets, with emphasis upon
lyric verse.

364. Victorian Poetry. (5) (On demand)

A study of the works of selected major Victorian poetry, with emphasis on Tennyson,
Browning, and the Pre-Raphaelites.

370. Modern British Literature. (5) (On demand)

The poetry of Hopkins, Hardy, Housman, Eliot, and Yeats; fictional prose since Hardy.

391. American Literature I. (5) (On demand)

Major Romantic writers of the United States through Whitman and Dickinson.

392. American Literature II. (5) (On demand)

Major writers of the Realistic and Naturalistic movements in the United States.

393. American Literature III. (5) (On demand)
Major writers of the United States since World War I.

394. Southern Literature. (5) (On demand)

A study of major Southern writers from about 1815 to the present.

144/

General Science

The General Science courses are service courses for all academic areas
of the College. Those students desiring to fulfill the 10-hour Science
requirement in the General Education Curriculum should take GSc 101
and GSc 102 in sequence. Those fulfilling the 5-hour additional option
may take either GSc 101 or GSc 102.

101. Earth Science I. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

An introduction to the concepts, principles, and processes of Physical Geology, with a brief
consideration of Historical Geology.

102. Earth Science II. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
An introduction to concepts, principles, and processes of Astronomy.

492. History of Science. (5) (On demand)

A survey of the path taken by investigators in science through the ages and the influence of
their culture of their work and thought. Primarily a library-discussion course to provide an
integrated viewpoint of the various science disciplines. Normally open only to upper division
science students.

/ 145

Health, Physical Education,
and Recreation

The curriculum in Health, Physical Education, and Recreation is com-
posed of two programs. The physical education activities program offers a
selection of physical skills classes. These classes are designed to promote
physical skill development as well as knowledge in a variety of activity
areas including physical fitness and conditioning, dance, aquatics, lifetime
leisure pursuits, and traditional team sports. Four quarter hours of physical
education activities are required. Students must select four different activi-
ties to meet this requirement. Additional hours may be elected. (NOTE: A
student may take a particular activity course more than once and receive
course credit toward the hours needed for graduation. However, only one
hour earned for that course counts toward fulfilling the physical education
requirement.)

In addition, a 30-hour coursework minor in Health, Physical Education,
and Recreation is available to any student. Students completing the minor
in Health, Physical Education, and Recreation will (1) demonstrate knowl-
edge of the profession of health, physical education, and recreation; (2)
understand professional practices, issues, trends, and literature essential for
effective teaching and coaching; (3) demonstrate appropriate professional
behaviors for classroom management and/or athletic coaching. This minor
is designed in consultation with the Department Head in Health, Physical
Education, and Recreation.

151. Introduction to Physical Education and Recreation. (5) (On demand)
Introduction to the fields of physical education and recreation.

152. Camping Activities. (2) (On demand)

Study of various camping and outing skills and activities.

153. Camp Leadership and Program. (3) (On demand)

A study of camping in an organized setting and of the leadership skills necessary for the
implementation of the camp program.

154. Standard First Aid/CPR. (2) Fall, 1994.

Identification of emergency situations and selection of correct response. Certification in
American Red Cross standard first aid and adult cardio-pulmonary resuscitation.

155. Lifeguard Training. (3) Winter, 1995.

Development of competencies in swimming and lifeguarding techniques, swimming speed
and endurance. American Red Cross lifeguard training certification.

Prerequisites: Current Standard First Aid Certification; Advanced swimming skills (PED 125
or equivalent).

1 46 / Health, Physical Education, and Recreation

156. Water Safety Instructor (3) Winter, 1995.

Develop competencies in swimming stroke and instructional techniques. Certification in Red
Cross WSI which enables one to teach all levels of the Learn to Swim Program, Basic and
Emergency Water Safety courses.

200. Community Health. (2) Winter, 1995.

An investigation of various health care programs available in the community and various
health-related issues.

201. Community Recreation. (2) Spring, 1995.

An investigation of various recreation facilities available in the community.

210. Fitness for Life. (2) Fall, 1994.

A study of basic principles of physical conditioning, weight control, relaxation, and stress
management. Students will have the opportunity to devise and implement a personalized fit-
ness/weight control program tailored to individual needs and levels of fitness.

302. Organization and Administration of Recreational and Physical Education Programs.

(5) (On demand)
A study of the organization and administration of instructional, intramural, and interscholastic
activity programs. Special emphasis on the selection, purchase, and care of safe equipment
and facilities.

305. Psychology of Coaching. (5) (On demand)

An investigation of the techniques of coaching, with special attention given to personalities
and motivations.

306. Techniques of Sports Officiating. (5) Spring, 1995.

Techniques of officiating athletic events; knowledge of the rules of selected sports.

307. Movement Exploration. (3) (On demand)

A study of the perceptual-motor development of the young child. A variety of activities to
enhance this development included.

310. Skills for Teaching and Coaching Interscholastic Athletics. (5) Winter, 1 995.
Analysis of teaching skills and techniques of the different interscholastic sports in high schools.

313. Recreation Leadership. (5) Spring, 1995.

A study of the leadership skills necessary to implement recreation programs and to conduct

various recreational functions.

320. Methods in Health and Physical Education in the Elementary School. (5) Fall, 1 994.
A study of the objectives, materials, activities, and curricula appropriate for elementary school
physical education and health. Supervised observation and practical experiences in the ele-
mentary schools.

321. Methods in Health and Physical Education in the Secondary School. (5) (On demand)
A study of the objectives, materials, activities, and curricula appropriate for secondary school
physical education and health. Supervised observation in the secondary schools.

330. First Aid and Athletic Training. (5) Spring, 1995.

Examination of techniques of accident prevention and treatment of minor injuries. Practical

experience with prevention and treatment of athletic injuries.

Health, Physical Education, and Recreation / 1 47

331. Health Education. (5) Winter, 1995.

A study of basic issues and principles in health. Topics include fitness, diet and weight con-
trol, nutrition, human sexuality, stress management, death education, aging, and drug and
alcohol education.

340. Adapted Physical Education. (5) (On demand)

Identification of common handicapping conditions. Study and practical application of proce-
dures, organization, materials, and activities for corrective work with individuals in the class-
room setting.

350. Tests and Measurements in Physical Education. (5) (On demand)

Selection, administration, and interpretation of physical measurements and tests. Principles of
written and skill test construction are emphasized.

351. Sports Statistics. (5) Fall, 1994.

The study of keeping statistical charts and various scorebooks for athletic events.

390. Seminar and Lab Practice in Physical Education or Recreation. (1-5) Fall, 1994.
Leadership experience under staff supervision; problems seminar.

400. Field Placement in Recreational Management. (5-15) (On demand)
Directed observation and participation in recreational management and supervisory situations.
Prerequisites: Senior standing, recommendation by the Department Head in Health and
Physical Education.

1 48 / Health, Physical Education, and Recreation

Physical Education Activities

Physical education activities may be repeated if a student has completed
the general education curriculum (four different activity courses).

Dance may be used to fulfill requirements for physical education activi-
ties in the general education curriculum.

Physical education activities are waived for the following students:

A. Veterans who present to the office of the Registrar official evidence
of having completed the basic training program in some branch of
the Armed Forces. A maximum of four physical education activity
courses will be waived; one for each two months served in the
Armed Forces.

B. Transfer students who have satisfactorily completed requirements for
a Junior College degree or who have satisfactorily completed four
different physical education activity courses.

C. Students who are 30 years of age or older.

D. Married women with children.

Note: Waiver of the requirements for activity courses does not diminish
the overall requirements for graduation (195 quarter hours required for a
baccalaureate degree).

102. Beginning Archery. (1) Coed.

Basic competencies in archery techniques and safety with experiences in target shooting.

103. Badminton. (1) Coed.

Introduction to the skills, strategies, and rules of badminton.

104. Basketball. (1) Coed.

Basic competencies in the techniques, strategies, and rules of basketball.

105. jogging. (1) Coed.

Participation in progressive running programs designed to increase cardiovascular endurance.

106. Folk and Square Dance. (1) Coed.

Experiences in the techniques of various forms of folk and square dancing.

107. Bowling. (1) Coed.

Introduction to the basic skills and rules of bowling. Course conducted at local bowling lanes.

108. Physical Conditioning. (1) Coed.

Basic assessment, maintenance, and improvement of over-all physical fitness.

109. Beginning Golf. (1) Coed.

Introduction to the basic skills, strategies, and rules of golf. Field trips to city golf courses.

111. Softball. (1) Coed.

Basic competencies and knowledge of rules and strategies of slow-pitch softball.

112. Beginning Tennis. (1) Coed.

Introduction to the basic skills, strategies, and rules of tennis.

Health, Physical Education, and Recreation 1 1 49

114. Volleyball. (1) Coed.

Basic competencies in the techniques, strategies, and rules of volleyball.

116. Trimnastics. (1) Coed.

Introduction to diet and weight control techniques as well as assessment and maintenance of

personal fitness.

120. Karate. (1) Coed.

Basic competencies and skills in karate techniques.

121. Bicycling. (1) Coed.

Introduction to the basic equipment, safety, and techniques of cycling including training and
racing strategies. Weekend field trips.

122. Weightlifting/plyometrics. (1) Coed.

Introduction to exercises that are geared toward increasing speed, power, and jumping ability.
A basic overview of the physiological factors involved in the exercises will be included.

123. Beginning Swimming. (1) Coed.

Introduction to the aquatic environment with emphasis on competence in primary swimming
and safety skills and stroke readiness.

124. Intermediate Swimming. (1) Coed.

Development and refinement of key swimming strokes. Introduction to turns, surface dives,
and springboard diving.

Prerequisite: PED 1 23 or equivalent skills.

125. Advanced Swimming. (1) Coed.

Refinement of key swimming strokes. Develop competencies in advanced rescue and spring-
board diving.

Prerequisite: PED 124 or equivalent skills.

156. Canoeing. (1) Coed.

Fundamental canoeing skills emphasized. Field trips to lake facilities and overnight camping
experience are provided to give extensive opportunities for recreational canoeing.

157. Beginning Water Skiing. (1) Coed.

Extensive on-the-water experiences introduce students to the basic techniques and safety con-
siderations of water skiing.

158. Backpacking. (1) Coed.

Introduction to basic equipment, safety, and techniques of trail camping. Extensive field trips
to state and national trails.

159. Sailing. (1) Coed.

Basic sailing competencies and understanding with experiences in fundamental racing strat-
egy. Field trips to lake facilities.

160. Snow Skiing. (1) Coed.

Introduction to basic techniques, safety, and equipment of snow skiing. Field trip to area ski
facilities.

1 50 / Health, Physical Education, and Recreation

161. Rhythmic Aerobics. (1) Coed.

A conditioning course in which exercise is done to musical accompaniment for the purpose
of developing cardiovascular efficiency, strength, and flexibility.

162. Hiking, Orienteering, and Camping. (1) Coed.

Introduction to basic techniques of tent camping, map, and compass work. Field trips to
nearby campgrounds and forest lands.

164. Water Aerobics. (1) Coed.

Development of cardiorespiratory endurance, flexibility, body composition, and muscle
endurance/tone through vigorous water exercise. The resistance of the water makes this
course an excellent choice for the beginner as well as the well-conditioned athletes, and for
the swimmer as well as the non-swimmer.

/ 151

History

The faculty of the Department of History believe that all persons, what-
ever their selected role in life, require an understanding of their past in
order to prepare for their future. The faculty firmly believe that the liberal
arts preparation, which encompasses courses from the discipline of history,
provides the student with the most appropriate educational background for
life by integrating knowledge from the broadest range of disciplines. The
objective of the Department of History is to provide each student at
LaGrange College with knowledge of the historical forces which have
shaped civilization as we know it.

To achieve the objective set forth above, the faculty seek to:

(A) provide every student with a basic understanding of the historical
forces which have contributed to the development of civilization.

(B) develop in every student an understanding and appreciation of
his/her civilization which is a part of the world community.

The faculty of the department believe that students who select to com-
plete a major course of study in history should have the foundation knowl-
edge and understanding of the discipline, developed by classroom
instruction and individual study, necessary to provide them with the oppor-
tunity to:

(1 ) pursue graduate study within the discipline.

(2) pursue a professional degree in a selected field of study.

(3) pursue employment as a teacher in pre-collegiate education.

(4) seek employment in a field such as government, entry level historic
documentation and preservation, social or historic entry level
research, or a field where their liberal arts preparation can be benefi-
cially utilized.

Graduates of the Department of History may be found pursuing careers
in business, law, education, politics and government, broadcasting, jour-
nalism, the ministry and other fields of endeavor. In all of these endeavors
our graduates have found that their education has provided a foundation
for their careers and for their growth in life.

The Department of History offers the following major in history:

(A) From the general education curriculum:
HIS 101 and 102, World Civilization and
HIS 111 and 112, United States History
These are required courses for the major

We strongly encourage the history major to pursue the widest possible
liberal arts preparation by the careful selection of courses from the general
education structure.

(B) Two courses from:

HIS 307 Social and Intellectual History of the United States
HIS 308 American Diplomatic History

152/

HIS 310 Constitution History of the United States

Two courses from:

HIS 330 History of Rome

HIS 331 Middle Ages

HIS 332 Renaissance and Reformation

Two courses from:

HIS 372 Eighteenth Century European History

HIS 374 Nineteenth Century European History

HIS 375 Twentieth Century European History

HIS 490 Senior History Seminar is required of all majors

35 hours

(C) An additional fifteen hours of 300- and 400-level History courses are
required. The total major course requirements are 50 quarter hours
credit beyond 100-level courses.

The approved program of teacher certification in history consists of
History 101 and 102, 111 and 112, completion of the major, History 360
(social science methods), and the professional education sequence. All stu-
dents who plan to teach should take History 315, Georgia History. Teacher
certification requirements also require that at least one upper level course
be completed in two of the following disciplines: political science, eco-
nomics, sociology.

Success in achieving the objectives established for the major will be
demonstrated as follows:

(1 ) successful completion of each major course with a grade of C or better.

(2) successful completion of the senior history seminar and defense of
the senior thesis before the students and faculty of the department.

(3) for those seeking certification in secondary education in the social
sciences, attaining a satisfactory score on the teacher criterion refer-
ence test in social sciences.

(4) successful completion of a major field examination during their
senior year.

Those wishing to major in history are encouraged to declare their major
by the beginning of the winter quarter of their sophomore year. Successful
completion of History 101-102 and History 111-112 before entering the
major is highly desirable.

Upper level courses in history, those numbered 300 or above (with the
exception of HIS 490), are available to all students who have successfully
completed ten hours from the history offerings in the general requirements.

101. World Civilization: I. (5) Fall, Winter.

A survey course on the development of world civilization up to 1 660.

102. World Civilization II. (5) Winter, Spring.

A survey course on the development of world civilization from 1 660 to the present.

History/ 153

111. History of the United States to 1865. (5) Fall, Winter.

Emphasis on the Colonial, Revolutionary, early national, and Civil War periods.

1 1 2. History of the United States, 1 865 to the Present. (5) Winter, Spring.
Emphasis on Reconstruction, liberal nationalism, New Deal, and postwar periods.

201 . Ideas That Changed the World. (2)

A study of contributions of eight world figures whose lives changed their society and ours.

205. Men and Movements That Shaped American History. (2)

A biographical study of American History.

306. History of the South. (5) (On demand)

Emphasis on the antebellum, Civil War, Reconstruction, and New South periods.

307. Social and Intellectual History of the United States. (5) Spring, 1 996.

A review of ideas and patterns of thought, the role of social, ethnic, and racial groups, and the
major institutions of American society.

308. American Diplomatic History. (5) Winter, 1996.

Emphasis on the procedure for developing foreign policy as well as diplomatic history. (See
also Political Science 308.)

310. Constitutional History of the United States to Present. (5) Fall, 1995.

An analysis of fundamental constitutional development from 1776 to present. (See also

Political Science 310.)

Prerequisites: HIS 1 1 1 and 1 1 2.

312. Economic History of the United States. (5) Spring.

American economic development from colonial times to the present. (See also Economics 312.)

315. Georgia History. (5) Summer.

A study of Georgia History from the pre-colonial period to the present with emphasis on the
historical, social, economic and political development of the State. (Students seeking teacher
certification are urged to enroll.)

330. The History of Rome, 753B.C.-476A.D. (5) Fall, 1995.

This course is a comprehensive study of the history of Roman civilization from its origins in
the mid-eighth century B.C. to its decline and fall in the fifth century A.D.

331. The Middle Ages, 500-1350. (5) Winter, 1996.

This course offers a comprehensive study of the development of medieval civilization from
the late fifth century to the late fourteenth century.

332. The Renaissance and the Reformation, 1350-1600. (5) Spring, 1996.

This course offers a detailed study of the civilization of Renaissance and Reformation Europe.
Primary focus will be placed on the artistic and religious achievements of the period 1350 to
1600.

333. The Medieval Church and Papacy. (5) Fall, 1994.

This course will examine the institutional and cultural history of the medieval church, with
special emphasis on the role of the papacy, and its impact on medieval civilization.

1 54 / History

334. Medieval Kings and Queens. (5) Winter, 1995.

A survey of medieval kings and queens and their influence on the development of medieval
civilization.

335. Renaissance and Renascences. (5) Spring, 1995.

An examination of the great cultural revivals from the age of Charlemagne to the age of
Michelangelo.

340. Russia to 1801. (5) Fall, 1995.

A comprehensive survey of the Russian historical development from the appearance of the
Kievan State in the 9th century through the reign of Paul I in 1 801 .

341. Nineteenth Century Russia. (5) Winter, 1996.

An examination of the Imperial Russian state during the 1 801 -1914 period.

343. Twentieth Century Russia. (5) Spring, 1996.

An examination of the forces which resulted in the collapse of the Russian Autocracy as well

as the subsequent emergence and eclipse of the Soviet State. (See also Political Science 543.)

360. Social Science Methods. (5) (On demand)

A general survey course in methodology for the prospective secondary teacher. (Required for
students seeking teacher certification in history.)

361. History of England to 1689. (5) Fall, 1994.

The political, economic, social, and cultural history of England from 55 B.C. to 1689 A.D.

362. History of England from 1689 to Present. (5) Winter, 1995.

The political, economic, social and cultural history of England from 1689 to the present.

372. Eighteenth Century Europe: 1660-1815. (5) Fall, 1994.

A comprehensive survey of European History from the reign of Louis XIV through the French

Revolution and the Napoleonic era.

374. Nineteenth Century Europe: 1815-1914. (5) Winter, 1995.

A comprehensive survey of European History from the reconstruction of the European order in
1 81 5 to the outbreak of World War I.

375. Twentieth Century Europe: 1914 to Present. (5) Spring, 1995.

A comprehensive survey of European History from the outbreak of World War I to the present.

378. European Diplomatic History: 1890 to the Present. (5) (On demand)

A detailed examination of European international relations from 1890, the end of the

Bismarckian system to the present. (See also Political Science 378.)

416. Twentieth Century America. (5) (On demand)

An intensive study of the United States during the twentieth century.

478. Contemporary Europe. (5) (On demand)

An examination of European history focusing on major issues since 1945.

490. Senior History Seminar. (5) Spring.

A study of historiography and research methods and materials.

Prerequisites: Senior History Major or permission of the professor and the Chairman of the
Department. This course may only be attempted twice.

/155

Library Science

No major nor minor program is offered in Library Science.
Course Description

200. Library Orientation and Research. (2)

A systematic introduction to the William and Evelyn Banks Library including the cataloging
system, database research capabilities and other components of academic libraries.

156/

Mathematics

The goal of the mathematics department is to help students become crit-
ical thinkers and effective problem solvers while they are mastering a cer-
tain body of mathematical knowledge.

To be accepted as a major in the Mathematics Department, a student
must have an overall GPA of 2.25 or better, and a GPA of 2.5 or better in
all Mathematics courses numbered 122 or higher. Students can pursue the
Bachelor of Arts degree with a major in mathematics or a Bachelor of
Science degree with a major in mathematics. Students who pursue the
Bachelor of Arts degree have more options in selecting their courses. This
is the liberal studies degree in mathematics. Students who complete the
Bachelor of Arts degree usually seek careers in areas such as banking, gen-
eral business, and secondary education.

A more in-depth degree is earned by students in the Bachelor of Science
program. Students who complete the Bachelor of Science degree usually
enter graduate schools or pursue industrial positions.

The specific objectives for the respective degrees are as follows:

The Bachelor of Arts Degree

1 . Illustrate the concepts of function, limit, and continuity.

2. Define and illustrate the derivative, the integral, and the fundamen-
tal theorem of calculus.

3. Apply concepts and techniques of calculus to analyze functions and
solve problems.

4. Develop the concepts of sequences and series.

5. Employ the concepts and properties of two- and three-dimensional
spaces.

6. Illustrate the process of measurement.

7. Employ the standard algorithms using properties of the number sys-
tems involved.

8. Develop appropriate models.

9. Develop problem-solving strategies.

1 0. Apply the concepts and skills of programming in solving problems.

1 1 . Illustrate and analyze a wide variety of mathematical applications.

1 2. Describe data and make appropriate inferences.

Students develop these competencies by pursuing the following course
requirements for the Bachelor of Arts degree in mathematics:

Mathematics 122, 123, 124, 322

plus eight additional courses selected from Mathematics 305, 306, 310,
316, 323, 324, 333, 334, 335, 340, 342, 343, 344, 380, and 410, as
approved by advisor.

The support courses required are Computer Science 151 or 1 99.

Mathematics/ 157

Students who earn the Bachelor of Arts degree in mathematics will have
demonstrated their attainment of the specific objectives by the following:

1. satisfactory performance on a comprehensive calculus examination,
given at the end of Mathematics 322.

2. successful completion of a problem-solving course during their
senior year with a grade of C or better.

The Bachelor of Science Degree

Students who earn the Bachelor of Science degree in mathematics will
be able to:

1 . Illustrate the concepts of function, limit, and continuity

2. Define and illustrate the derivative, the integral, and the fundamen-
tal theorem of calculus

3. Apply concepts and techniques of calculus to analyze functions and
solve problems

4. Develop the concepts of sequences and series

5. Employ the concepts and properties of two- and three-dimensional
spaces

6. Illustrate the process of measurement

7. Employ the standard algorithms using properties of the number sys-
tem involved

8. Develop appropriate models

9. Develop problem-solving strategies

10. Apply the concepts and skills of programming in solving problems

1 1 . Illustrate and analyze a wide variety of mathematical applications

1 2. Describe data and make appropriate inferences

13. Give examples of abstract structures

-14. Demonstrate theorem-proving skills in abstract algebra and real

analysis.
Students develop these competencies by pursuing the following course
requirements for the Bachelor of Science degree in mathematics:

Mathematics 122, 123, 124, 316, 322, 323, 333, 334, 335, 342, 343,
380, plus one additional course selected from Mathematics 305, 306, 324,
344, and 410

The support courses are:

Physics 121 and 122. (recommended)
Computer Science 151 or 1 99.

Students who earn the Bachelor of Science degree in mathematics will
have demonstrated their attainment of the specific objectives by the following:

1. satisfactory performance on a comprehensive calculus examination,
given at the end of Mathematics 322.

2. successful completion of a problem-solving course during their
senior year with a grade of C or better.

1 58 / Mathematics

Students who plan to complete an approved program of teacher educa-
tion must include the following courses: Mathematics 122, 123, 124, 322,
306, 310, 316, 333, 335, 340, plus two additional mathematics courses as
approved by the department chairman; Psychology 149, 302, and 304;
Education 199, 362, 449, 459, and 490S; Computer Science 151 or 199;
and Speech 105.

A minor in mathematics consists of the following courses: Mathematics
122, plus five additional courses selected from Mathematics 123, 124,
306, 314, 316, 322, 323, 324, 333, 334, 335, 342, 343, 344, 360, and
380.

At least three of the six courses must be 300 level courses.

100. Basic Math. (3) Fall, Winter, Spring.

An overview of basic skills in mathematics including ratio and proportion, percent, use of

fractions and decimals, systems of measurements and linear equations.

110. Fundamentals of Mathematics I. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

A study of logic, relations, functions, measurement, finite difference, systems of equations,
probability, permutations, combinations, and an introduction to descriptive statistics.

111. Fundamentals of Mathematics II. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

A study of polynomial, algebraic, exponential, logarithmic and trigonometric function and an
introduction to coordinate geometry.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 11 or two units of college preparatory mathematics.

122. Analytic Geometry and Calculus I. (5) Fall, Winter.

A study of analytical geometry, iimits, continuity, the derivative with application.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 1 1 1 or three units of college preparatory mathematics.

123. Analytic Geometry and Calculus II. (5) Winter, Spring.

A study of additional topics in analytical geometry, definite and indefinite integrals, applica-
tions of integration.

Prerequisite: Mathematics 122.

124. Analytic Geometry and Calculus III. (5) Spring.

A study of differentiation of trigonometric logarithmic, and exponential functions, methods of
integration, improper integrals, and polar coordinates.
. Prerequisite: Mathematics 123.

152. Computer Programming I. (5) (On demand)
An introduction to computer programming.

Prerequisite: Mathematics 122.

153. Computer Programming II. (5) (On demand)

A continuation of Mathematics 152, with a study of problem formulation, computer simula-
tion and solutions of numerical and non-numerical problems.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 1 52.

200. Metric Mathematics. (2) (On demand)
A study of measurement using the metric system.

Mathematics 1 1 59

201. Business Mathematics. (2) (On demand)
A study of mathematics applications in business.

202. Techniques of Problem Solving. (2) (On demand)
A study of problem-solving methods.

260. Plane Trigonometry. (3) Winter.

A study of trigonometric functions, radian measure, identities, logarithmic functions, inverse
functions, graphs, and applications.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 1 22.

305. Theory of Numbers. (5) (On demand)
An introduction to number theory.

Prerequisite: Mathematics 122.

306. College Geometry. (5) Spring, 1995.

An introduction to non-Euclidean geometry and an extension of the Euclidean system.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 1 22.

310. Methods of Teaching Mathematics. (5) Fall, 1995.
A study of methods of teaching secondary mathematics effectively.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 122 and 333 or permission of instructor.

314. Statistics. (5) Winter.

A study of problems related to statistical procedures as applied to economics, education, the
social sciences, and the life sciences.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 1 22.

316. Probability and Statistics. (5) Winter.
An introduction to probability and statistical inference.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 122.

322. Analytic Geometry and Calculus IV. (5) Fall.

A study of indeterminate forms, vectors, solid analytic geometry, infinite series, and applica-
tions to physics.

Prerequisite: Mathematics 1 24.

323. Calculus V. (5) Winter.

A study of partial derivatives, multiple integrals, and vector analysis. Topics include functions
of two or more variables; limits, continuity, and differentiability; directional derivatives and
gradients; tangent planes; maxima and minimal of functions of two variables; Lagrange multi-
pliers; double and triple integrals with geometric and physical applications; vector fields; line
and surface integrals; Green's Theorem.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 322.

324. Differential Equations. (5) Spring.

A study of first and second order differential equations with applications, numerical methods,
and solution in series.

Prerequisite: Mathematics 323.

333. Modern Algebra I. (5) Fall.
An introduction to modern abstract algebra.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 1 23.

1 60 / Mathematics

334. Modern Algebra II. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of Modern Algebra I.

Prerequisite: Mathematics 333.

335. Linear Algebra. (5) Spring.

An introduction to linear algebra and matrix theory.

Prerequisite: Mathematics 333 or permission of instructor.

340. History of Mathematics. (5) Fall, 1996.
An historical development of mathematical concepts.

Prerequisite: Mathematics 1 23 or permission of instructor.

342. Complex Variables. (5) Fall, 1994.
An introduction to complex variables.

Prerequisite: Mathematics 322.

343. Analysis I. (5) Spring.
An introduction to real analysis.

Prerequisite: Mathematics 322.

344. Analysis II. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of Analysis I.

Prerequisite: Mathematics 343.

350. Problem Solving I. (1).

A study of problem solving in the area of pre-calculus mathematics.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

351. Problem Solving II. (1).

A study of problem solving in the areas of calculus and analysis.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

352. Problem Solving III. (1).

A study of problem solving in the areas of abstract and linear algebras.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

356. Algebra for Elementary Teachers. (5) (On demand)

A study of special topics in algebra relevant to elementary school mathematics.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 122.

357. Geometry for Elementary Teachers. (5) (On demand)

A study of special topics in geometry relevant to elementary school mathematics.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 122.

359. Problem Solving in School Mathematics. (5) (On demand)
Skills and strategies for solving mathematical problems are developed.

360. Finite Mathematics. (5) Spring.

A study of finite mathematics with business applications.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 122.

Mathematics / 161

380. Discrete Mathematics. (5) Winter.

An introduction to discrete mathematics. Topics include set theory, combinatorics, recurrence
relations, linear programming, and graph theory.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 122.

410. Numerical Methods. (5) (On demand)

An introduction to numerical analysis with computer solutions. Topics include Taylor series,

finite difference, calculus, roots of equations, solutions of linear systems of equations and

least-squares.

Prerequisites: Mathematics 124 and Computer Science 199.

162/

Modern Foreign Languages

INTRODUCTION

Modern Foreign Languages are offered at LaG range College in order to
assist students in dealing with and productively functioning within a world
of ever-decreasing size. The introductory courses provide a beginning
opportunity for the student to learn and use a language other than his/her
own native tongue and to provide an understanding of the richness and
diversity of another culture.

Students entering LaGrange College bringing with them two years of
high school foreign language will be placed in an intermediate level course
of that language; or if the student chooses he or she may start the study of
another language at beginning level.

Minors are offered in French and Spanish. Upon the completion of the
minor, the student should have an appropriate understanding of the four
basic language skills of reading, writing, speaking, and understanding.
Satisfactory performance on the ACTFL oral proficiency test in French or
Spanish is a requirement for the certification of the minor.

Course Descriptions

French

101. Elementary French. (5) (On demand)

A course for beginners with intensive practice in pronunciation, essentials of grammar, and
reading of simple prose.

102. Elementary French. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of French 101.

103. Intermediate French. (5) (On demand)

A continuation of French 102 with additional readings.

104. Introduction to French Civilization. (5) (On demand)

A study of the art, literature, history, and anthropology of France designed to increase reading
comprehension and speed.

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. This course, French 103, or consent of instructor prereq-
uisite to all 300-level French courses.

110. Introduction to French Culture. (5)

A course designed to create intercultural understanding through the study of French history
and achievements in the arts and sciences and a consideration of modern life in France. This
is a contractual option for general education limited to the non-traditional student.

Modern Foreign Languages 1 1 63

199. French Travel Seminar. (5) (On demand)

A travel-study seminar composed of preliminary academic study and cultural contact with
French history and contemporary French life through a program conducted in Paris, the Loire
Valley, Normandy, and the South region of France. Some knowledge of French desirable.
Students with proficiency in French must conduct their academic work in the language.

300. French Conversation and Composition. (5) (On demand)

A course stressing practice in speaking and writing French. Not open to students fluent in
French.

301. Survey of French Literature I. (5) (On demand)

A study of major writings from the Middle Ages through the eighteenth century.

302. Survey of French Literature II. (5) (On demand)

A continuation of French 301, covering the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. May be taken
before, or without, French 301 .

311. Lectures Expliquees. (5) (On demand)

A study of selected materials from various genres reflecting the history and culture of France.

321. French Phonetics. (5) (On demand)

A study of French sounds with intensive drills in pronunciation. Not open to student fluent in

French.

German

101. Elementary German. (5) (On demand)

A course for beginners with intensive practice in pronunciation, essentials of grammar, and
reading of simple prose.

102. Elementary German. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of German 1 01 .

103. Intermediate German. (5) (On demand)

A review of grammar and syntax with practice in reading selected texts.

104. Introduction to German Civilization. (3) (On demand)

A reading course designed to improve the student's proficiency in German through a study of
history, literature, and culture.

This course, or consent of instructor, prerequisite to all 300-level courses.

300. German Conversation and Composition. (5) (On demand)

A course stressing practice in speaking and writing German. Not open to students' fluent in
German.

301. Selected Readings in German Literature I. (5) (On demand)
A study of selected reading in German fiction, poetry, and drama.

302. Selected Readings in German Literature II. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of German 301 .

1 64 / Modern Foreign Languages

Spanish

101. Elementary Spanish. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

A course for beginners with intensive practice in pronunciation, essentials of grammar, and
reading of simple prose.

102. Elementary Spanish. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of Spanish 1 01 .

103. Intermediate Spanish. (5) (On demand)

A review of grammar and syntax with practice in reading selected texts.

104. Introduction to Hispanic Civilization. (5) (On demand)

A study of the art, literature, history, and anthropology of the Spanish-speaking world.

Prerequisite: Spanish 101, 102, or consent of the instructor. This course, or Spanish 103, or
consent of the instructor prerequisite to all 300-level courses.

110. Introduction to Hispanic Countries and Cultures. (5)

A course designed to develop inter-cultural understanding through study of the customs,
beliefs, and historical perspectives of Hispanic countries of the western hemisphere. This is a
contractual option for general education only for the nontraditional student.

199. Mexican Travel Seminar. (5-10) (On demand)

A travel-study seminar in cooperation with Interact Travel Seminars in Mexico to provide
valuable educational experience through close contact with Mexican contemporary life and
its ancient civilizations following basic preparation in history and culture. A program centered
in Mexico City, Puebla, Cholula, and Taxco with Mexican and U.S. teaching staff. Some
knowledge of Spanish desirable.

300. Spanish Conversation and Composition. (5) (On demand)

A course stressing practice in speaking and writing Spanish. Not open to students fluent in
Spanish.

301. Survey of Spanish Literature I. (5) (On demand)

A study of major writings from the Middle Ages through the seventeenth century.

302. Survey of Spanish Literature II. (5) (On demand)

A study of representative novels, plays, and poetry from the eighteenth century through the
present.

311. Lecturas Explicadas. (5) (On demand)

A study of selected materials from various genres reflecting the history and culture of Latin

America.

321 . Spanish Phonetics. (5) (On demand)

A study of Spanish sounds with intensive drills in pronunciation. Not open to students fluent

in Spanish.

Modern Foreign Languages 1 1 65

Language*

101. Beginning Language I. (5) (On demand)

A course for beginners with intensive practice in oral communications, pronunciation, essen-
tials of grammar, and where possible, reading of simple prose.

102. Beginning Language II. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of Language 1 01 .

Prerequisite: Language 101.

103. Intermediate Language. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of Language 1 02.

Prerequisite: Language 102.

104. Introduction to the Language Civilization. (5) (On demand)
A study of art, literature, history, and anthropology.

Prerequisite: Language 1 02.

110. Introduction to the Language Culture. (5) (On demand)

A course designed to create intercultural understanding through the study of the language his-
tory and achievements in the arts and sciences and a consideration of modern life in the
country. This is a contractual option for general education limited to the non-traditional stu-
dent, this course is in English and has no prerequisites.

199. Language Travel Seminar. (5) (On demand)
A travel-study seminar designed by the instructor.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

*Note: These courses are available so that a language other than French, German or Spanish
may be available from time-to-time. It is anticipated that in the 1994-95 school year Japanese
will be offered. Substitute the word "Japanese" where "language" appears in the course title
and course description.

166/

Music

Introduction

The Creative Music Technologies major is a Bachelor of Arts undergrad-
uate degree. Students of this program come from a wide variety of back-
grounds that include instrumental/vocal performance, song writing,
composition, electronic instruments, and computers. It is the belief of the
music faculty that the Creative Music Technologies degree is designed to
prepare students for an entry level position into the music industry. A wide
spectrum of musical opportunities exists for graduates that are capable of
working with the music tools of the modern world, and LaGrange College
has remained committed to keeping its technology, faculty, and facilities
state of the art.

LaGrange College music majors are required to complete the 75 hours
of course work that comprises the Creative Music Technologies core cur-
riculum. The curriculum is designed to compliment the four-year students'
general education needs, and it is strongly advised that CMT majors begin
the program as first term freshmen. Transfer students need to be evaluated
by the music faculty in order to be properly placed in the program.

A limited number of talent based scholarships are available for incoming
freshmen as well as transfer students who will be declaring the CMT major.
No music scholarships will be awarded to music minors.

Graduation Requirements for Creative Music Technologies

A student graduating with the Creative Music Technologies major must
meet all of the following criteria:

1. Complete satisfactorily all degree requirements as outlined in the
Bulletin.

2. Participate regularly in all departmental activities, including faculty
and visiting artists' recitals, master classes, workshops, and student
recitals.

. 3. Maintain an overall quality point average of 2.25 or better. Failure to
meet this minimum requirement will first result in probationary status.
Two consecutive quarters with QPA below 2.25 will result in the loss
of eligibility to remain in the CMT program for the student.
4. Complete satisfactorily a piano proficiency exam at the end of the
sophomore year. If additional applied lessons are needed by the stu-
dent to pass the piano proficiency exam, these credits will be
counted as general electives.

Music/ 167

Requirements for Major

MUS 101

Keyboard Harmony I

3 hrs.

MUS 102

Keyboard Harmony II

3 hrs.

MUS 103

Keyboard Harmony III

3 hrs.

MUS 112

*Music Survey I

5 hrs.

MUS 174

Freshman Composition/Arranging

1 hr.

MUS 208

Applied Music

6 hrs.

MUS 240

Choir

6 hrs.

MUS 250

Common Practice Theory

3 hrs.

MUS 251

20th Century Theory

3 hrs.

MUS 252

Jazz Theory

3 hrs.

MUS 254

Sophomore Composition/Arranging

6 hrs.

MUS 369

Introduction to Electronic Music

5 hrs.

MUS 370

Electronic Music I

5 hrs.

MUS 371

Electronic Music II

5 hrs.

MUS 380

Junior Recital

2 hrs.

MUS 465

Conducting

2 hrs.

MUS 470

Film Music

2 hrs.

MUS 474

Senior Recital

2 hrs.

MUS 481

Internship

2 hrs.

Total

75 hrs.

*MUS 114 must be taken to fulfill the general education fine arts requirement.
Music Minor

MUS 101

Keyboard Harmony I

3 hrs,

MUS 102

Keyboard Harmony II

3 hrs,

MUS 103

Keyboard Harmony III

3 hrs

MUS 208

Applied Music

6 hrs

MUS 240

Choir

6 hrs

Music electives chosen from the following:

9 hrs

112 or 114,

250,251,252,369

Total

30 hrs

Course Descriptions

100. Music Fundamentals. (1)

This course is designed to give a student, with no prior musical experience, the necessary
skills to begin study.

101. Keyboard Harmony I (3) Fall.

Fundamental keyboard and music theory skills with emphasis on methods of sight-reading and
musical analysis; scales, chord progressions, inversions, harmonization, and transposition.

1 68 / Music

102. Keyboard Harmony II. (3) Winter.
Continuation of MUS 1 01 .

Prerequisite: MUS 101 or by placement.

103. Keyboard Harmony III. (3) Spring.
Continuation of MUS 102.

Prerequisite: MUS 1 02 or by placement.

110. Beginning Class Voice. (2)

Group instruction in vocal performance with emphasis on basics of breathing, resonance,
placement, and song preparation.

111. Beginning Class Guitar. (2)

Group instruction in guitar performance with emphasis on the basics of reading, technique,
tone production and solo playing.

112. Music Survey I. (5) Fall.

A survey of music from the Medieval period through the Classic period. A class.

114. Music Survey II. (5) Winter, Spring.

A survey of music from the Romantic period through the twentieth century. A class.

1 74. Freshman Composition/Arranging. (1 )

Class instruction in composition/arranging. A projects course.

208. Applied Music. (2)

Individual instruction in piano, guitar, voice and other instruments as available. Check current
quarter class listings for instrumental/vocal offerings. Also includes weekly performance semi-
nar. May be repeated for credit. Private lessons. Placement by audition.

240. Chorus. (1) Fall, Winter, Spring.

A performance organization designed to give training in choral performance. May be repeated

for credit.

250. Common Practice Theory. (3) Fall.

Focus on theoretical practices of music from the Baroque to the Romantic periods. Includes
tertian harmonic structure and thematics materials, four part voice leading, form and analysis.
Also includes ear training and sight singing.

251. Twentieth Century Theory. (3) Winter.

Concentrated study in the techniques of 20th century composition. Topics include: impres-
sionism, atonality, serialism, pandiatonicism, neoclassicism, minimalism, chance music,
aleatoric music and also includes ear training and sight singing.

252. Jazz Theory. (3) Spring.

Theoretical foundations of Jazz harmony as well as the writing styles and techniques of Blues,
Fusion, Rock, Gospel, and Pop music. Jazz part writing, jazz arranging, ear training, and sight
singing.

274. Sophomore Composition/Arranging. (2)

Class instruction in composition/arranging. A projects course.

Music/ 169

369. Introduction to Electronic Music. (5) Fall.

Basic studio techniques, music sequencing, music printing, synthesizers, sampling, and digital
editing. No prior computer experience is required.

370. Electronic Music I. (5) Winter.

Creative work in the electronic music domain with an emphasis on current and experimental
styles.

371. Electronic Music II. (5) Spring.

Continued creative work in the electronic music domain with an emphasis on music to pic-
ture and interdisciplinary music techniques.

374. Junior Composition/Arranging. (2)

Class instruction in composition/arranging. A projects course.

380. Junior Recital. (2)

A performance of the student's creative work to be given during the junior year. Permission of
Music Department chair required.

390. Special Topics, (variable credit)

Private/class instruction for advanced students in topics not otherwise covered in the music
catalog. The subject matter of this course is dependent upon the approval of both the instruc-
tor and the Music Department chair.

465. Conducting. (2) Fall.

Conducting techniques, score reading, rehearsal techniques, and concert programming.

470. Film Music. (2) Winter.

A research course designed to deal with the musical esthetic and compositional concerns of
the film music world. Classic films along with current releases are musically analyzed from a
fine arts view point. Film music is approached from the platform that it is the highest level of
commercial music activity.

'474. Senior Composition/Arranging. (2)

Class instruction in composition/arranging. A projects course.

480. Senior Recital. (2)

A performance of the student's creative work to be given during the senior year. Permission of
Music Department chair required.

481. Internship. (2)

A supervised internship is coordinated by the department chair in one of the following off-
campus environments: Recording Studio, Broadcast Facility, Post-Production House,
Publishing Company, Independent Commercial Composer, Film Studio, Advertising Agency,
Church Music Program, Performing Arts Company, Interactive Technologies, Video
Production Facility, or other approved internship opportunities.

170/

Nursing

I. ASSOCIATE OF ARTS DEGREE

The purpose of the LaGrange College Associate Degree program is to
prepare individuals for careers in nursing with a Christian, liberal arts set-
ting. The graduate nurse is prepared to function on a beginning level in a
structured health care setting as a provider and manager of patient care,
patient teacher, communicator, and member within the profession of nurs-
ing. The graduate is eligible to become licensed as a registered nurse upon
successful completion of the National Council Licensing Examination
(NCLEX-RN). Completion of the Associate of Arts degree provides a founda-
tion for further studies leading to a higher degree in nursing or other areas.

The last class for the associate degree will enter in September 1994. A
Bachelor of Science in Nursing will be offered beginning September 1 995.

Progression Requirements:

*1 . Nursing courses are in sequence and a grade of C or higher must be
made in each nursing course in order to successfully complete the course
and continue the sequence (a C is defined as 75-79).

*2. A student who wishes to repeat a nursing course must first complete
an audit of the preceding nursing course. For successful completion of
audit, the student must adhere to the regular attendance policies excepting
clinical laboratory where attendance is not permitted.

*3. A student who fails to earn a C or higher more than once in any of the
clinical nursing courses is not permitted to continue in the nursing program.

4. A grade of C or higher must be earned in each required biological sci-
ence course. A student who earns two final course grades of D or F in any
required biological science is not permitted to enter or to continue in the
nursing program.

5. A grade of C or higher must be earned in English 101, 102, and 103
in order to successfully complete the nursing program.

6. A student must successfully complete each biological science course
by the prescribed quarter in order to continue in the nursing sequence.

7. All general college non-nursing courses must be successfully com-
pleted prior to the final quarter of the nursing program.

8. In order to progress to the sophomore level, a nursing student must
have a 2.0 cumulative grade point average.

*1, 2, and 3 under progression requirements also apply to a student who receives a WF (withdrawn fail-
ing) in a nursing course.

Nursing/ 1 71

Graduation Requirements:

1 . All curriculum requirements must be successfully completed.

2. An exit exam which covers each of the five clinical areas (Medical,
Surgical, Psychiatric, Pediatric, and Maternity Nursing) will be adminis-
tered to sophomore students during Spring Quarter. Each student is
required to achieve a passing score in each of the five areas. Required
passing scores are specified each year by the nursing faculty. If all areas of
the exit exam are not passed, the student must attend scheduled review
classes and re-take the previously failed area exams. A student not passing
the exit exams the second time will not be graduated at that time and must
complete additional nursing studies specified by the nursing faculty. After
completing the specified nursing studies, the student will be required to
retake and pass the exit exams before being allowed to graduate.

Curriculum:

The seven quarter curriculum consists of 58 hours of nursing, 28 hours
of the general education curriculum, and 20 hours of general college
courses. The nursing program is offered on a sequential basis beginning
each fall quarter and progressing from the simple to the more complex
aspects of nursing. A sample course progression is as follows:

FRESHMAN

Fall

Winter

Spring

Mathematics 110*

. .5

Nursing

111

. .6

Nursing 112

. .8

Nursing 110**. . .

. .6

Biology

149 . ...

. .5

Biology 320 or

Biology 148

. .5

Psycholc

}gy 1 49 .

. .5

Psychology 302 .

. .5

Col 101

. .2
18

16

English 101

. .3
16

Summer

Sociology 146. . .

. .5

Bio 320/Psy 302 .

. . 5

English 102

. .3

Computer

Science 163 . .

. .2
15

SOPHOMORE

Fall

Winter

Spring

Nursing 214 ....

. 12

Nursing

215 ....

. 12

Nursing 216 ... .

. 12

English 103

. .3
15

12

Nursing 21 7 ... .

. . 2
14

1 72 / Nursing

Total hours:

106

Nursing:

58

General Education:

28

Non-Nursing

20

*A higher level mathematics course may be substituted, based on placement testing.
**Prior to entering Nursing 110, a student must present proof of current certification in basic cardiopul-
monary resuscitation (CPR). Certification must be maintained throughout subsequent nursing courses.

II. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN NURSING

A nursing education program leading to the Bachelor of Science in
Nursing (BSN) degree will be offered beginning Fall quarter 1995. This pro-
gram of study will be grounded in a heritage of Christian liberal arts learn-
ing, emphasizing the integration of knowledge and student-faculty
collaboration in the educational process. The nursing faculty is committed
to a program which builds a sound foundation for professional nursing
practice, continuing personal development, and graduate study.

The Bachelor of Science in Nursing program, currently under develop-
ment, is being designed to meet all standards for full approval by the
Georgia Board of Nursing and for accreditation by the National League for
Nursing. A graduate of the approved program will be eligible for licensure
as a registered nurse upon successful completion of the National Council
Licensing Examination-RN.

A BSN degree completion option will be offered for registered nurses
who hold an Associate Degree or Diploma in Nursing. Previously com-
pleted nursing courses will be recognized on a transfer basis under the
requirements of the Georgia RN-BSN Articulation Agreement. Under this
option, the potential for part-time or full-time study will facilitate degree
completion by the employed registered nurse.

Students may declare their intent to pursue a nursing major at any time
and will be assigned a nursing academic advisor. However, prior to accep-
tance into nursing studies at the beginning of the student's junior year, a
substantial portion of the General Education Curriculum, described in this
Bulletin, and selected other coursework must be completed at a satisfac-
tory level. Space in the nursing program is necessarily limited, and accep-
tance is determined on a competitive basis. Applications to the nursing
program will be required of all students and may be submitted after
January 1 st of the student's sophomore year.

A full description of the BSN degree curriculum will appear in the 1995-
1996 LaGrange College Bulletin. Prior to publication, information is avail-
able in the office of the Division of Nursing.

Nursing/ 173

Courses:

110. Introduction to Nursing/Care of the Elderly. (4 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (6)

Fall.
A course which includes basic concepts and skills necessary in providing patient care.
Emphasis upon basic nutrition, the aging process, and introduction to communication skills
and mental health concepts. Clinical emphasis upon the care of the aged.
Co- or prerequisites: Biology 1 48; Mathematics 110, 1 1 1 , or 1 22.

111. Introduction to Medical-Surgical Nursing Care of the Adult. (4 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per
week) (6) Winter.

A course providing more advanced nursing concepts and skills. Emphasis upon basic pharma-
cology and the nursing process. Clinical focus upon the care of the less complex medical sur-
gical patient.

Prerequisite: Nursing 100. Co- or prerequisite: Biology 149.

112. Care of the Mother and Newborn. (6 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (8) Spring.

A course designed to correlate theoretical knowledge of the maternity cycle and growth and
development during the newborn period with clinical experiences in the care of these
patients. Course content includes comprehensive care of the family during the reproductive
years and of the newborn. Emphasis upon concepts, skills, and unique behavior patterns nec-
essary to provide individualized nursing care of maternity and infant patients as well as the
nurse's role as a health teacher.
Prerequisite: Nursing 111.

114. Nursing Concepts. (3) (Every other year)

A course for licensed practical nurses, designed as a transition course into the RN program. It
builds upon previous learning of the LPN, extending knowledge of basic nursing concepts.
Emphasis is placed on integration of learning within the nursing process and on communica-
tion theory. (Note: Successful completion of Nursing 114 exempts LPN students from Nursing
110 and Nursing 111.)
Prerequisite: MTH 1 1 0, BIO 1 48, COL 1 01 ; Co- or prerequisites: BIO 1 49, PSY 1 49.

214. Care of the Adult and Child I. (8 hrs. lee, 12 hrs. lab per week) (12) Fall.

A sequence of instructional courses with planned clinical experiences in meeting the medical,
surgical, and psychological needs of adults and children. Concepts of pharmacology, nutri-
tion, patient education, growth and development and psychomotor skills are integrated
throughout.

Prerequisite: Nursing 1 1 2.

21 5. Care of the Adult and Child II. (8 hrs. lee., 1 2 hrs. lab per week) (1 2) Winter.

A continuation of Nursing 214. Increasing knowledge and skills required for the care of the
hospitalized patient. Clinical emphasis is directed toward care of patients of all ages with
multi-system medical-surgical and/or psychosocial problems.
Prerequisite: Nursing 214.

216. Care of the Adult and Child III. (5 hrs. lee, 21 hrs. lab per week) (12) Spring.

A continuation of the study and care of hospitalized children and adults with multi-system
problems. Emphasis upon self-direction, management of the care of groups of patients, and
transition to the graduate nurse role.
Prerequisite: Nursing 215.

1 74 / Nursing

217. Nursing Seminar. (2) Spring.

A study of issues and trends in nursing practice, with emphasis on the legal, ethical, and pro-
fessional responsibilities of a registered nurse.

Prerequisite: Nursing 21 5. Corequisite: Nursing 216.

/ 175

Philosophy

No major program is offered in philosophy. Please see the section on
Religion.

149. Introduction to Philosophy. (5) (On demand)

A survey of the major fields of thought involving those principles which are basic in the mak-
ing of man's culture and history.

301. History of Philosophy I. (5) Fall, 1995.

A historical survey of Greek, Roman, and Medieval philosophy.

302. History of Philosophy II. (5) Winter, 1996.

A historical survey of the philosophies of the Renaissance, the Enlightenment, and modern
times.

303. History of Philosophy III. (5) (On demand)

A study of some contemporary movements in philosophy.

366. Philosophy of Religion. (5) Spring, 1996.

An investigation of the persistent problems of mankind in philosophy and religion.

176/

Physics

Introduction

The physics curriculum at LaGrange College serves two basic purposes:

1) an introduction to the physical sciences, oriented towards develop-
ing problem solving and reasoning skills suitable for the General
Requirements of the college.

2) support courses for programs in Mathematics, Chemistry, Biology,
Computer Science, Dual-degree in Engineering, Pre-Medicine,
Pharmacy and Education.

Course Descriptions

101. Introductory Physics I. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall.

A noncalculus-based introduction to elementary kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum,
fluids, and mechanical waves.
Prerequisite: MTH 111.

102. Introductory Physics II. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter.

A continuation of 101 and is an introduction to electric charge, Coulomb's Law, electric and
magnetic fields, and thermodynamics. Lab introduces the student to electronics.
Prerequisite: PHY 101.

103. Introductory Physics III. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) Spring.

A continuation of Physics 102, providing an introduction to geometric and wave optics, spe-
cial relativity and quantum physics.
Prerequisite: PHY 102.

121. General Physics I. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall.

A calculus-based introduction to particle dynamics, energy and momentum conservation, and
rotational dynamics, and hydrostatics.
Prerequisite: MTH 123.

122. General Physics II. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter.

A continuation of Physics 121 covering electricity and magnetism, heat and thermodynamics,
and simple circuits. Lab introduces the students to electronics.
Prerequisites: PHY 121, MTH 1 24.

123. General Physics III. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) Spring.

A continuation of Physics 122, providing an introduction to geometric and wave optics, spe-
cial relativity and quantum physics.
Prerequisite: PHY 122.

210. Modern Electronics Lab I. (2)

A "hands-on" approach to electronics designed to provide experience of use to students in the
sciences. Topics include diodes, transistors, and basic applications of these circuit elements.
Prerequisites: PHY 1 02 or PHY 1 22.

/ 177

Political Science

Introduction

The political science program offers liberal arts students an opportunity
to develop their capacity to analyze and interpret the significance of politi-
cal events and governmental processes. Students majoring in political sci-
ence are prepared for careers in fields such as law, business, public
administration, teaching, criminal justice, and journalism.

Objectives

Students majoring in political science at LaGrange College will acquire
basic knowledge of these areas:

1 . The values, processes, and institutions that affect collective decision-
making and contemporary politics in the United States.

2. The comparative analysis of the values, processes, and institutions
that affect collective decision-making and contemporary politics in
the United States and other countries.

3. The relations between and among states, especially those affecting
international conflict and international cooperation.

4. The ethical dimensions of public policy issues, political practices,
and constitutional and legal questions.

Students majoring in political science at LaGrange College will also
acquire the basic skills necessary to comprehend and perform modern
political analysis. These include:

1. Ability to analyze the foundations of and differences between nor-
mative and empirical inquiry.

2. Knowledge of the basic elements of research design and methods in
normative, empirical, and historical studies of politics.

3. Knowledge of basic data management and analysis and of the use of
computers in political research.

4. Ability to convey findings in both written and oral presentations.

Course of Study

The program in political science offers both a major and minor course
of study in political science. The program's major requires a mix'of both
general education and department courses. Those planning to pursue a
major in political science are encouraged to declare so by the beginning of
the second quarter of their sophomore year.

For a Major in Political Science.

1 . Demand Sequence from the General Education Curriculum

Political Science 101 United States Government
Economics 101 Contemporary Economic Issues

1 78 / Political Science

Those intending to major in political science must complete Political
Science 101 before attempting any courses in the program demand
sequence. Potential majors are encouraged to select a second history
sequence beyond general requirements (either History 101 and 102 or
History 111 and 112), Economics 201 and 203, Psychology 149, and
Sociology 146 to fulfill their general education requirements.
Total demand hours: 10

2. Demand Sequence from the Program in Political Science

Political Science 301 Research Methods in Political Science

Political Science 210 Comparative Politics

Political Science 220 International Politics

Political Science 451 Selected Topics in Political Science

Majors must also complete an additional thirty (30) hours of elective
courses chosen from the two, three, and four hundred level courses listed
for the program in this catalog.
Total demand hours: 50

For a Minor in Political Science

A minor in political science may be earned by taking thirty (30) hours of
elective courses approved by the program faculty. Students minoring in
political science must take Political Science 101 . At least fifteen (15) hours
of the elective courses must be in 300-level courses.

Assessment of Objectives

Assessment of the objectives of the program in political science is based
on successful completion of each major course with a grade of C or better
and successful completion of Political Science 451: Selected Topics in
Political Science. Political Science 451 includes completion of a major
research project and presentation of the resulting paper to interested faculty
and students. To enroll in Political Science 451, students must have com-
pleted Political Science 101, 210, 220, 301 and an additional fifteen (15)
hours of elective courses in the program demand sequence or have received
the- permission of program faculty and the chairman of the department.

Special Opportunities

The program in political science supervises a variety of internships in
local, state, and national government. Students interested in pursuing one
of these opportunities should consult with the program faculty.

Students wishing to combine studies of political science and criminal
justice may easily pursue a minor course of study in criminal justice. The
faculty of the two programs should be consulted to insure that require-
ments for both will be met.

Political Science/ 179

Course Offerings

101. United States Government. (5)

An introductory course on the U.S. political system through an analysis of historical and con-
temporary issues and events. The course focus is on governmental institutions and public policy.

200. Introduction to Political Science. (5)

An introductory course which focuses on the nature of the discipline of political science and
which deals with the ways political scientists study politics through an overview of the major
topics of the discipline.

210. Comparative Politics. (5)

An examination of the processes and forms of government and politics from a comparative
perspective.

220. International Politics. (5)

A survey of the discipline of international relations focusing on the functions and processes of
inter-state relations.

301. Research Methods in Political Science.

A study of basic social science research methods as applied in political science. Topics con-
sidered include: research design and data collection; measurement and causality; fitting mod-
els to data with various methods; graphic analysis; and the use of statistical software.

302. Social Change. (5)

An examination of the processes determining social change. (See also Sociology 302.)

308. American Diplomatic History. (5)

An emphasis upon the procedure for developing foreign policy as well as diplomatic history.
(See also History 308.)

309. Public Administration. (5)

An introduction to public administration in the United States. (See also Sociology 309.)

31 0. Constitutional History of the United States to the Present. (5)

An analysis of fundamental constitutional development from 1776 to the present. (See also
History 310.)

Prerequisite: History 111-112.

320. States and Politics in Developing Areas. (5)

A comparative study of the political systems of developing societies. Topics considered
include: basic comparative theory; modern history of developing societies; political systems
of selected states; and the interaction of political and economic factors in developing soci-
eties.

Prerequisite: PSC 21 or consent of instructor.

325. International Economics. (5)

A study of the different theories of international trade and evaluation of the effects of regional
economic integration and restrictions to world trade. An examination of the mechanisms of
international payments, the foreign exchange markets and balance of payments adjustments
under different exchange rate systems.

Prerequisite: ECO 201 , 203, or consent of instructor.

1 80 / Political Science

330. American Judicial Institutions. (5)

A study of the judicial institutions of the United States. Topics considered include: the struc-
ture and powers of national and state courts, judicial procedure, judicial politics, court
administration, and policy formation by judicial institutions.
Prerequisite: PSC 1 01 , or consent of instructor.

332. Public Finance. (5)

Analysis of the impact of governmental expenditures, taxation and credit upon production
and the distribution of income. Examination of the structures of the federal, state and local tax
systems.

Prerequisites: ECO 201 , 203, or consent of instructor.

340. Themes in Political Philosophy. (5)

An introduction to the basic ideas of political philosophy. Topics considered include: the
social and historical context of political theory; the development of major ideas in political
philosophy; critical analysis of important works; and the relation of political theory to con-
temporary politics.

342. Government and Business. (5)

A study of the interrelationships between the public and private sectors the relationship
between government and business, between government and labor, and government and agri-
culture. An examination of the reasons for, and the development of legislation, and case law
relating to the relationship between the public and private sectors. A study of the rise of
administrative law, and the regulatory agencies.

Prerequisites: ECO 201 , 203, or consent of instructor.

350. State and Local Government. (5)

An analysis of the partners in federalism with emphasis on Georgia state and local govern-
ments, as well as the Georgia Constitution.

378. European Diplomatic History: 1 890 to the Present. (5)

A detailed examination of European international relations from the end of the Bismarckian
political system to the present. (See also History 378.)

400. Political Science Internship. (5-15)

Available to selected students to provide an opportunity to work in a governmental agency or

setting.

451. Selected Topics in Political Science. (5) Annually

A seminar course on a major subject of national or international concern based on individual

research and assigned readings.

/ 181

Psychology

INTRODUCTION

The goal of this department is to acquaint the student with basic princi-
ples of behavior and the research methods necessary to understand them.

OBJECTIVES

A student who graduates from LaGrange College with a major in psy-
chology will:

1. recognize the importance of an EMPIRICAL approach in attempting
to understand behavior.

2. be familiar with the concepts, terms, and explanatory principles
characteristic of the following theorists: Freud, Rogers, Maslow,
Bandura, Allport, Erikson, Piaget, Thorndike, Pavlov, Guthrie,
Watson, Hull, Tolman, Skinner, and Kohlberg.

3. be able to evaluate CRITICALLY, through application of the princi-
ples of logico-empirical science, the various theorists listed above.

4. be able to identify and discuss examples of the major "types" of learn-
ing, to wit: classical, operant, observational, information processing.

5. be familiar with generalizations regarding physiological correlates
of behavior.

6. be familiar with the major historical developments in psychology.

7. be familiar with the terminology of the current edition of the
Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of the American Psychiatric
Association (DSM IV).

8. be familiar with the different theoretical approaches (including the
psychoanalytic, the humanistic, and social learning-behavioral) in
the description, etiology, and therapy of behavioral disorders listed
in DSM-III-R.

9. be able to list and discuss the various objective and projective per-
sonality assessment techniques including the Rorschach and
Holtzman inkblots, the Thematic Apperception Test, the MMPI, the
Q-sort, the 16-PF, behavioral interviews, behavioral sampling,
behavior survey schedules, the Taylor Manifest Anxiety Scale, The
Manifest Hostility Scale, and the Buss-Durkee Hostility Inventory.

10. recognize the basic philosophical (e.g., What is personality?) and
methodological issues in psychological research.

11 . be familiar with the sections of an APA style research report includ-
ing the kinds of information typically found in each.

12. be familiar with the standard procedures for summarizing data,
including the construction of frequency tables, the calculation of
measures of central tendency (means, medians, and modes), calcu-

1 82 / Psychology

lation of measures of dispersion (range, variance, and standard devi-
ation), and correlation coefficients.

13. be familiar with the logic of hypothesis testing including the state-
ment of research and statistical hypothesis, the notion of Type I and
Type II errors, the power and efficiency of a statistical test, and the
major inferential techniques used in psychology (especially t tests,
analysis of variance, and chi-square).

14. recognize the concepts and principles of psychology as exemplified
in everyday situations.

A major in psychology consists of 60 quarter hours (12 courses) beyond
the introductory course (PSY 149). Forty of these hours come from the cate-
gories below.

Methods (Both Required See Note 1 Below)
PSY 298, PSY 299

Experimental Content (Select Two)
PSY 455, PSY 465, PSY 470

Social/Personality/Development Content (Select Three See Note 2

Below)

PSY 321 , (PSY 302 or PSY 358), PSY 350, PSY 460

Advanced Special Topics (Required See Note 3 Below)
PSY 480

Notes:

1. Since this department views psychology as a research based disci-
pline, it is strongly recommended that the student complete PSY 298
and PSY 299 as soon as possible after the major is declared.

2. Students may take either PSY 302 or PSY 358 but not both to satisfy
this requirement. If a student takes both, one course counts toward
the 20 hours of major electives.

3. PSY 480 will be offered once per year and will involve advanced
study of a specialized topic. Topics will vary from year to year.

4. PSY 149, Introduction to Psychology, is the prerequisite to all 200 level
and above psychology courses. Some courses have other prerequisites.

Major Electives

An additional 20 hours of major courses will be selected by the student.
A student may select any 300 or 400 level psychology course beyond
those counted in the required areas. Up to three courses selected from
SOC 147, SOC 300, SOC 308, and BIO 148 may be applied toward the
major with the approval of the advisor.

Psychology/ 183

Assessment

The accomplishment of the psychology objectives will be demonstrated
by obtaining an acceptable score on a test administered by the department.
Normally, this test will be given during the student's final quarter at
LaGrange College.

Career Options

Students who complete the major in psychology have many career
options. Psychology is a very broad field which overlaps many different
areas. Some of the jobs taken by recent psychology graduates include man-
agement and supervisory positions in business and industry and positions
in community and state service agencies. A psychology major also serves
as good preparation for advanced study in law, social science, counseling,
and psychology.

Miscellaneous

No course with a grade below C may be applied toward a psychology
major.

It is strongly recommended that a psychology major complete the Biology
1 01 -1 02 sequence to satisfy the science portion of the general requirements.

A maximum of 10 hours of special topics courses may be applied to the
Psychology Major.

Course Descriptions

149. Introduction to Psychology. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

,A survey of major topics in psychology including basic neuroanatomy, motivation, learning,
perception, personality and abnormal behavior.

Prerequisite to all 200- 300- and 400-level psychology courses.

298. Behavioral Statistics. (5) Fall.

Introduction to the measurement of behavior and quantitative methods of data analysis. An
emphasis on parametric statistics and their application to the behavioral sciences. The course
also includes an introduction to the APA style of Scientific Writing.

299. Research Methods. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter.

A survey of various types of research design, including the strengths and weaknesses of each.
The laboratory includes practice in designing and conducting experiments, as well as analysis
and reporting of results.

Prerequisite: Psychology 298 or consent of professor.

302. Human Growth and Development. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

A study of normal life beginning with conception. Important development phenomena are

considered in the light of several major developmental theories.

1 84 / Psychology

304. Educational Psychology. (5) Fall, Spring.

Application of psychological principles and research to the teaching/learning process. Major
topics include behavioral and cognitive approaches to learning, classroom management, and
test construction and interpretation.

321. Social Psychology. (5) Fall.

A course dealing with behavior as affected by social influences. Major topics include social
perception, social communication (verbal and nonverbal), altruism, attitudes, aggression, and
prejudice. Also, applied areas such as forensic psychology are considered.

330. History and Systems of Psychology. (5) (On demand)

A study of the historical background of psychology, with emphasis upon the major schools of

thought.

341. Human Sexuality. (5) (On demand)

A research based study of the important issues in human relationships and sexuality.

350. Abnormal Psychology. (5) Fall, Spring.

A survey of the causes, characteristics, and current theories and treatments of deviant behavior.

351. Introduction to Counseling. (5) Winter.

An introduction to counseling approaches, methods, and assessment techniques. Emphasis is
placed on individual counseling.

Prerequisite: PSY 298 or consent of professor.

356. Microcomputer Applications in the Behavioral Sciences. (5) (On demand)

A study of the use of microcomputers with special emphasis on specific software programs
including data-base management, spread-sheets, word-processing, and statistical packages for
the behavioral scientist.

Prerequisite: CSC 1 63 or consent of professor.

357. Psychology of Religion. (5) (On demand)
Psychological interpretation of religious experience and growth.

358. Psychology of Aging. (5) Winter.

Human aging is examined from physiological (e.g., sensory and cardiovascular changes), psy-
chological (e.g., memory and intellectual changes), and sociological (e.g., adjusting to retire-
ment) perspectives. Also, death and disorders associated with aging such as Alzheimer's
Disease are explored.

380. Special Topics in Psychology. (On demand)

A course offered at the sophomore/junior level focusing on a specialized topic from the field

of psychology.

455. Cognitive Psychology. (5) (On demand)

An information processing analysis of topics in perception, thinking, learning, and memory.

460. Psychology of Personality. (5) Winter.

A critical study of major personality theories, principles and instruments of assessments, and

relevant empirical research.

Prerequisites: PSY 298 and PSY 299 or consent of professor.

Psychology 1 1 85

465. Physiological Psychology. (5) (On demand)

A study dealing with the interactions of various structures of the body (primarily the neural

and endocrine systems) affecting behavior.

470. Theories of Learning. (5) Spring.

Historical survey of the theories of Thorndike, Pavlov, Skinner, Hull, Guthrie, Tolman, and

Bandura.

Prerequisites: PSY 298 and PSY 299 or consent of professor.

480. Special Topics in Psychology. (On demand)

A course offered at the junior/senior level focusing on a specialized topic from the field of

psychology. A prerequisite may be required.

186/

Religion

Courses in religion have a twofold purpose: to afford students the oppor-
tunity to study and investigate the role of religion in human experience;
and to provide, for those interested, a basis for further study and for selec-
tion of positions in church-related vocations. The Department is aware of
the increasing demand that pre-theological students be prepared to enter
seminary at the graduate level in their studies and at the same time have a
broad cultural orientation. In addition, the Department is aware of the
need for an interdisciplinary preparation for persons interested in Christian
Education. To this end the Department offers a major in Christian
Education which allows for three concentrations: Director of Christian
Education; Youth Ministry; Outdoor Ministries.

Students who desire to substitute Religion 103 and 104 for the Religion
101 in the general education curriculum may do so. They should consult
with the chairman of the Department of Religion.

CHRISTIAN EDUCATION

Students earning a degree in Christian Education are expected to under-
stand the principles of Christian Education including objectives and teach-
ing methods related to their particular concentration, Christian personality
development, and to have a biblical and historical foundation in the
Christian faith.

A major in Christian Education consists of the following courses for a
concentration:

1. Director of Christian Education: Religion 150 or 341, 320 or 321,
330, 331, 332, 333, 334, 335, 350, 303 or 304 or 305, 313 or 314,
490 and 491. Prerequisite to the above courses is REL 101 or REL
103/104. In addition, selected courses from other departments may
be recommended. Candidates completing the Bachelor of Arts
degree with this concentration will have fulfilled two of the four cer-
tification studies for the Associate in Christian Education in the
United Methodist Church.

2. Youth Ministry: Religion 330, 332, 350, 323 (required of all
Methodists), 320 or 321 (non-Methodists), 303 or 304 or 305, 313 or
314, 490, and 491; HPE 152, 153, 313; PEd 106, 158, 162;
Psychology 306. Recommended: Psychology 341; Sociology 306;
Education 449.

3. Out-door Ministries: Religion 303 or 304 or 305, 313 or 314, 330,
336, 490, and 491; Biology 336; Psychology 321; HPE 152, 153,
313, 330; PED in addition to the three Gen. Req. P.E. courses, five
other activity courses from the following 1 03, 1 06, 111, 114, 157,
158, 159, 162. Recommended: BIO 334, 335; PSY 306, 358. In

Religion / 1 87

meeting General Requirements the following courses should be
taken: BIO 102; SPC 105; REL 110; PSY 149.

RELIGION

Students earning a degree in Religion are expected to have mastered
basic historical data pertaining to the Old Testament, the New Testament,
and the Church; to be familiar with basic issues in contemporary Christian
thought; to understand the fundamental issues in a mature religion includ-
ing its development through the educational program and its missional
propagation.

A major in Religion consists of the following courses: REL 304, 303 or
305, 313, 314, 320, 321, 329, 330, 341 or 150, 350, and a minimum of
two other five hour courses in the Department. Prerequisite to the above
course is REL 101 or REL 103/104. In addition, a minimum of 20 hours
should be taken in other disciplines as approved by the Department Head
and/or Advisor.

Beginning with the class of 1990 all persons graduating from the
Department of Religion and Philosophy will be expected to complete satis-
factorily an oral and a written examination. This examination will be taken
in the first or second quarter of the Senior year. Completion is necessary
before a student can participate in an internship.

Course Descriptions

101. Judaic-Christian Heritage. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

A study of the major thought patterns which have emerged from the Judaic-Christian tradition
and of their impact on the institutions of Western Society.

102. Christian Ethics. (5) (On demand)

A study of ethical issues from the Christian perspective.

103. Old Testament Survey. (5) (On demand)

A survey of the history and literature of the ancient Hebrew people. Should be taken before
Religion 104.

104. New Testament Survey. (5) (On demand)

Introduction to the New Testament through an examination of its historical setting and con-
tent, and the significant contributions it has made.

110. Religious Dimensions of Human Behavior. (5) (On demand)

A study of the religious element in human experiences with a special emphasis on Christian

faith and life.

150. Introduction to the Archaeology of Palestine. (5) Spring 1 995.

A study of the method and results of archaeology study in Palestine and related areas.

1 88 / Religion

199. Summer Study-Travel Seminar. (5 or 10) (On demand)

Section A Biblical Studies: a study of archaeology, biblical history, biblical literature, and

modern Israeli culture, to be considered in conjunction with a work program on a kibbutz in

Israel.

Section B Church History: a study of church history, to be combined with a three-week

visit to European centers related to that history.

Section C Missions: participation in the program of an established Mission which will

incorporate work on Station and lectures pertaining to the work of that specific area.

237. Religion and American Life: Its Way in Worship. (2) Quarterly.
The practicum is designed to enable students to explore theological reflection on actual wor-
ship experiences. The order and elements of worship will be analyzed for their effectiveness
as teaching tools and as corporate acts of worship.

303. Torah(Law). (5) Fall, 1995.

A detailed study of the first five books of the Old Testament.

304. Neviim (Prophets). (5) Winter, 1996.

A detailed study of prophetic movements in Israel and of the individual prophets, their histori-
cal background, lives, messages, and contributions to the religious life of Israel.

305. Ketuvin (Writings). (5) Spring, 1996.

An examination of Wisdom, Apocalyptic and poetic literature of the Old Testament.

310. Introduction to Biblical Greek I. (5) Fall, 1994.

A beginning course designed to teach the fundamentals of Biblical Greek.

311. Introduction to Biblical Greek II. (5) Winter, 1994.
A continuation of REL 301 .

313. Life and Teachings of Jesus. (5) Fall, 1994.

A study of the message of Jesus within the context of the synoptic gospels and its application
to contemporary society.

314. Apostolic Age. (5) Fall, 1995.

An examination of the origin and expansion of the early Christian church, with studies in the
Epistles and the Acts of the Apostles.

320. Church History I. (5) Winter, 1996.

A survey of the history of the Christian Church from the close of the Apostolic Age to the end
of the Middle Ages.

321. Church History II. (5) Spring, 1996.

A history of the Christian Church from the close of the Apostolic Age to the end of the Middle
Ages.

323. Methodism. (5) Winter, 1995.

A survey of the history and thought of Methodism.

329. Contemporary Christian Thought. (5) Spring, 1995.

A survey of the development of Christian thought, with particular attention to the nineteenth

and twentieth centuries.

Religion / 1 89

330. Introduction to Christian Education. (5) Fall, 1994.

An examination of goals, methods, and techniques used in the church-school educational
program.

331. Methods in Christian Education I (Children). (2) Fall, 1994.
A study and application of methods in Christian Education for children.

332. Methods of Christian Education II. (2) Winter, 1995.

A study and application of methods in Christian Education for youth.

333. Methods of Christian Education III. (2) Winter, 1995.

A study and application of the methods in Christian Education for adults.

334. Worship in the Church. (2) Fall, 1995.

A brief examination of worship in the church as an historical and a contemporary experience.

335. Curriculum in Christian Education. (2) Winter, 1996.

A study of the various curricula used in the educational programs of the church.

336. Out-door Ministry. (5) (On demand)

An examination of the goals and methods utilized in the various ministries out-of-doors.

338. Church Music. (5) Fall. (On demand)

A study of the history and types of Church Music and its use in the church.

341. Introduction to Mission. (5) (On demand)

A study of philosophy and program of Mission in the Church.

350. Psychology of Religion. (5) Winter, 1995.
Psychological interpretation of religious experience and growth.

360. World Religions. (5) (On demand)

A study of the literature and teachings of the great living religions and a comparison of the

non-Christian faiths with Christianity.

490. Seminar. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

A study of issues confronting those participating in a local church setting. Required of all stu-
dents in the Internship.

491. Internship. (10) Fall, Winter, Spring.
Supervised participation in the local church setting.

190/

Sociology/Social Work

The primary objective of the social work program is to provide students
with knowledge and skills necessary for employment in social service
agencies as well as preparation for graduate education. The curriculum is
designed to increase the student's awareness of the structure and function-
ing of society and the individual's role in our changing world. In addition
to theoretical knowledge, the student is given the opportunity for practical
application of his education working under supervision in a variety of com-
munity-based social agencies.

Students completing majors in social work will have a fundamental
knowledge of the role of social work in dealing with behavioral problems
and will have demonstrated the ability to apply this knowledge in a practi-
cal work experience setting.

A concentration in Criminal Justice within the B.A. Social Work program
may be obtained. In addition to social work skills, students electing this
option will have demonstrated a basic theoretical and practical under-
standing of the criminal justice system.

Course Requirements for the Major in Social Work are:

Sociology 1 46, 1 47, 1 53, 300, 301 , 490A and 490B 40 hours

Psychology 149, 302, 321, and 350 20 hours

Mathematics 314, Mathematics 316, or Psychology 298 5 hours

Five additional hours in Sociology or Criminal Justice to be chosen

by the student in consultation with the adviser 5 hours

Total 70 hours

Students electing the Criminal Justice concentration must satisfy all
social work requirements plus forty hours in Criminal Justice. For course
descriptions in Criminal Justice, see that section of this Bulletin.

The accomplishment of the Social Work major objectives will be demon-
strated by the following:

1 . Satisfaction of all course requirements including supervised practicum.

2. (A) A score of 75% or better on the State of Georgia Merit System

Exam in one of the following areas:

1 . Senior Caseworker

2. Behavior Technician

3. Course Service Worker

4. Probation/Parole Officer
OR

(B) An interview with an examination by a panel of Social Work/
Criminal Justice administrators.

OR

(C) An acceptable score on a test administered by the department.
Normally, this test will be given during the student's final quarter
at LaGrange College.

Sociology/Social Work/ 191

Students who complete the Social Work major have career options that
include the following:

1 . Social Services

2. Mental Health Services

3. Youth Services

4. Correction Services

The Criminal Justice concentration opens career option in Law Enforcement
and Probation/Parole.

Course Descriptions

146. Introduction to Sociology. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

An introduction to the scientific study of the structure and dynamics of human society. A pre-
requisite to all 300-level sociology courses.

147. The Family. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.

An analysis of contemporary marriage and family experiences.

148. Introduction to Anthropology. (5) Fall, Winter.

A general introduction to physical and cultural anthropology.

153. Social Problems. (5) Winter.

A study of selected social problems in American society which are related to deviant behav-
ior, value conflict, or social disorganization.

300. Introduction to Social Welfare and Social Work. (5) Fall.

A history of social welfare policy development and the role of social work in the United
States. Emphasis upon casework, group work, and community organization as practiced in
social work settings.

301. Social Theory. (5) Fall.

An analysis of the development, convergence and utilization of sociological theories.

302. Social Change. (5) (On demand)

An examination of the processes determining social change.

305. Sociology of Religion. (5) (On demand)

A sociological analysis of the interplay between religion and culture.

306. Juvenile Delinquency. (5) Winter.

An analysis of the nature and causes of juvenile delinquency and an evaluation of-treatment
or preventive programs in this area of behavior.

307. Criminology. (5) Spring.

A study of criminal behavior and its treatment. An overview of treatment of the offender by
means of imprisonment, probation, and parole.

308. Cultural and Social Anthropology. (5) Spring.

A study of comparative cultures and social structures with special emphasis upon the ethnog-
raphy of primitive people.

1 92 / Sociology/Social Work

309. Public Administration. (5) (On demand)

An introduction to public administration in the United States.

311. Introduction to Outdoor Therapy Methods I. (3) (On demand)

To provide a solid foundation in the area of outdoor therapy, including theory and practice.
Course will require off-campus trips lasting from one day to a full weekend.

312. Introduction to Outdoor Therapy Methods II. (3) (On demand)
A continuation of SOC 311.

Prerequisite: SOC 311.

490A. Seminar in Social Work Methods. (5) Winter, Spring.

Individual and group study of methods of social work practice-casework, group work and

community organization. To be taken concurrently with 490B.

490B. Field Placement in a Social Service Setting. (10) Winter, Spring.

Directed observation and participation in social service/criminal justice practice. To be taken

concurrently with 490A.

/ 193

Speech

INTRODUCTION

Communicating effectively in the oral tradition is a hallmark of a well-
educated person. Many courses at LaGrange College emphasize the devel-
opment of this skill. There is one course required of all students that begins
this process.

Course Description

105. Speech Fundamentals. (3) Fall, Winter. Spring.

A course emphasizing development of organizational and delivery skills through individual

speaking exercises in a variety of formats including informative, demonstrative and persuasive.

194/

Theater Arts

INTRODUCTION

The Department of Theater Arts offers a pre-professional training pro-
gram emphasizing the practical aspects of theater and the importance of
process. It is the belief of the faculty that the training process must simulate
the "real world" of theater. With the belief that theater is both an art form
and a business, the curriculum provides a strong undergraduate foundation
in theater performance, design/production, and literature. Classroom
instruction is enhanced through practical experiences in the form of fully
staged productions each quarter. Students may also participate in the
departments Summer Repertory Company, an intensive program in acting,
technical theater, stage management, and other production areas.

Offering a B.A. in Theater Arts, majors are required to complete a 52 hour
flexible core curriculum designed to allow students to create a generalist,
performance, or design/production emphasis. In addition, 20 hours of elec-
tees are required in theater.

OBJECTIVES

The following objectives are established as a basis for the training pro-
gram in Theater Arts. Upon application for graduation, the Theater Arts
major will be expected to:

1 ) have an understanding of the basic theoretical and evolutionary con-
cepts behind each of the three major divisions within the discipline:
performance, design/production, and literature.

2) have an artistic vocabulary especially in their specific area of con-
centration.

3) have the technical knowledge pertaining to the student's chosen area
of concentration, but not limited to it.

4) demonstrate an understanding of auditioning (actors) and or portfolio
presentation (designers/technicians) through a juried presentation.

5) be knowledgeable of various unions within the entertainment indus-
try, including but not limited to, Actors Equity Association (AEA),
United Scenic Artists (USA), and the Screen Actors Guild (SAG).

6) be knowledgeable of viable avenues of employment and sources
noting such information.

7) have an understanding of graduate study and opportunities in theater
and the performing arts.

Theater Arts/ 195

GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR
THE THEATER ARTS MAJOR

A student graduating with a major in Theater Arts must meet all of the
following criteria:

a. Satisfactory completion of all degree requirements as outlined in the
catalogue.

b. A minimum score of 70% on the Departmental Assessment Test, to
be administered prior to a student filing a petition to graduate. This
D.A.T. may be repeated as necessary.

c. Quarterly participation in all departmental production activities,
including auditions, set and costume construction, production crews
and production strikes.*

d. Attendance at all scheduled departmental meetings and activities.*

Student progress towards the above requirements will be evaluated by the faculty each spring.
Recommendations will be forwarded to the student. Departmental policies concerning student progress
are outlined in the Theater Arts Policy and Procedure manual.

ADMISSION TO THEATER ARTS MAJOR

In order to be admitted and to continue as a Theater Arts major, a stu-
dent must meet the following criteria:

A. Overall GPA of 2.25 or better

B. Writing proficiency a grade of C or better in English 101, 1 02 and
103

C. Oral or Theatrical Proficiency a grade of C or better in either SPC
105orTHA 110

D. Past Participation in Dept. production recommendation of super-
vising theater faculty member; transfer students: provide recommen-
dation from previous theater professor

E. Prognosis for Success: an evaluation during SPC 105 or THA 110
pertinent to:

1) attendance

2) attitude

3) cooperation

4) oral and written skills

5) enthusiasm and dedication to theater

A student that has not met all of the above criteria may be admitted pro-
visionally. The student admitted provisionally has two quarters in which to
meet all criteria.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

2 hrs.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

20 hrs.

196/ Theater Arts

REQUIREMENTS FOR MAJOR:

A total of 72 quarter hours are required for the Theater Arts major.

Core Requirements (37 hrs):

THA 102 Drama Survey II

THA 110 Essentials of Theater

THA 1 80 Stagecraft

THA 184 Acting I

THA 190 Theater History

THA 286 Makeup for the Stage

THA 330 Analysis of Drama

THA 370 Fundamentals of Directing

Core Option Three of the following (15 hrs):

THA 451 Auditioning

THA 351 Advanced Acting

THA 360 Principles of Theatrical Design

THA 381 Principles of Lighting Design

THA 420 Theater Management

Electives

Total 72 hrs.

Note: THA 101 Drama Survey I taken as general education fine arts requirement.

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE THEATER ARTS MINOR

THA 1 1 Essentials of Theater

THA 1 80 Stagecraft

THA 184 Acting I

THA 190 Theater History

Theater Electives*

Total 30 hrs.

Course Descriptions

101. Drama Survey I. (5)

A survey of Western theater from its beginning in Hellenistic Greece to the rise of Realism.
Selected plays will be read and discussed in terms of their theatrical importance and their
interaction with the societies in which they were written.

102. Drama Survey II. (5)

A survey of Western theater from the rise of Realism through contemporary drama. Selected
plays will be read and discussed in terms of their theatrical importance and their interaction
with the societies in which they were written.

Drama Survey II may be taken independently of Drama Survey I.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

5 hrs.

10 hrs.

Theater Arts / 197

1 1 0. Essentials of the Theater. (5)

A course designed to introduce the student to the various aspects of the theater. Topics
include acting, directing, design, production, and dramatic structure.

180. Stagecraft. (5)

A course designed to acquaint the student with the theories and techniques of stage scenery,
properties, and stage lighting. Students will be expected to participate in the mounting of a
departmental production.

184. Acting I. (5)

A course designed to introduce the fundamental techniques and principles of acting for the
stage. Students will work on both the physical and psychological aspects of acting.

190. Theater History. (5)

A survey of the development of theater from its beginnings to the modern period.

272. Creative Dramatics. (5)

A course which introduces the student to an improvisational, nonexhibitional, process-cen-
tered form of drama designed to promote personal growth and educational development in
young children. This course will combine workshop experiences with practical classroom
opportunities. Recommended for early childhood and primary education majors.

283. Stage Management and Play Production. (2)

A course designed to provide the student with an introduction to, and basic training in, the
areas of stage management and play production. The course includes discussion of manage-
ment and production theory and practical exercises.

285. Theater Practicum. (1)

A course designed to provide opportunities for participation in various aspects of dramatic
production including acting, scenery and costume construction, lights, box office, promotion,
and house management. (May be repeated four times for credit.)
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

286. Makeup for the Stage. (2)

A study in the theories and application of stage makeup. Topics may include corrective, old
age, and character makeup, as well as prosthetics.

300-301 -302. Summer Theater Repertory Company. (1 5)

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

310. Fundamentals of Playwriting. (5) (On demand)

A course designed to stimulate critical and creative faculties through the preparation of origi-
nal material for the theater. Students will be guided in the completion of writing a one-act
play.

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

330. Analysis of Drama. (5)

A study of the major genres of dramatic literature through the application of various interpre-
tive models. Tragedy, comedy, and tragi-comedy will be approached from the perspective of
the designer, actor, and director.

331. Oral Interpretation of Literature. (5)

A course designed to enable the student to communicate his interpretation of a literary work
to an audience through the development of appropriate skills.

198/ Theater Arts

343. Drama in the Schools. (5) (On demand)

A course designed to provide students in the performing arts, and elementary and secondary

education with leadership experience in dramatic activities designated for young audiences.

345. Musical Theater I. (5)

A study of the development, the music, the staging, and the scripts of musical theater.

346. Musical Theater II. (5)

A practical study of the basic techniques of musical theater, emphasizing stage movement and
singing and acting styles. May be taken independently of Musical Theater I.

351. Advanced Acting. (5)

A continuation of THA 1 84, with increased emphasis on the performer's development of tech-
niques for characterization. The course will focus in greater detail on individual character
analysis as it pertains to specific textual demands.
Prerequisite: THA 184.

360. Principles of Theatrical Design. (5)

A course that introduces the student to drawing and drafting skills in preparation for the task
of design. These skills include perspective drawing with highlight and shadow, the use of
color, and selected rendering materials and techniques.
Prerequisite: THA 1 80.

370. Fundamentals of Directing. (5)

A course designed to introduce students to the director's function in interpreting, planning,
and staging a play. The course includes theoretical discussion of directing techniques as well
as practical directing experiences.

Prerequisite: THA 1 1 0, 1 80, 1 84, 330 or consent of instructor.

371. Children's Theater. (2)

A study of the theories, principles, and techniques of producing dramatizations for children.
Students will be expected to participate in the staging of a theatrical production.

381 . Principles of Lighting Design. (5)

This course will provide the student with a series of practical design projects related to light-
ing for the stage.

385. Basic Costume Design and Pattern Drafting. (5)

A course that acquaints the student with the basic skills needed to design theatrical costumes
and to draft patterns for costumes.
Prerequisites: THA 1 1 0.

420. Theater Management. (5)

An introduction to economic and administrative aspects of American theater, especially as
they apply to repertory, community, and educational organizations.

451. Auditioning. (5)

A course designed for developing audition techniques and examining guidelines for audition
procedures, with emphasis on resume organization and audition material selection and per-
formance.

Prerequisite: THA 1 1 0, 1 84.

Theater Arts 1 1 99

470-1-2. Special Topics. (2-5 hours)

This series of courses provides the student with material not covered in courses presently
offered by the department, including but not limited to, Stage Combat and Period Styles of
Acting.

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

484. Production Seminar. (5)

A course designed to offer qualified juniors and seniors the opportunity to complete project
proposals in acting, directing, design (scenic, lighting, and costume), and playwriting. All pro-
posals must be approved by the Department Chair and are subject to scheduling and faculty
supervisory commitments.

200/

/201

Faculty, Trustees and
Administration

Faculty
SPRING 1994

Nancy Thomas Alford (1 969)
Assistant Professor of Health,
Physical Education and
Recreation; Dean of Student
Development

B.S., Georgia College at Milledgeville;
M.S., University of Tennessee

Sybil L.Allen (1976)
Professor of Education

B.S., Troy State University; University of
Georgia; M.Ed., Auburn University,
University of Missouri, State University
of New York; Ed.D., Auburn University

Ann Clark Bailey (1959)
Associate Professor of Modern
Foreign Languages
A.B., Wake Forest College; M.A., Emory
University; University of Georgia

Mary Kathryn Bates (1984)
Assistant Professor of Nursing
B.S.N., Florida Southern College;
M.S.N., Georgia State University

Charlene Baxter (1976)
Catalog Librarian
A.B., West Georgia College; M.L.S.,
George Peabody College for Teachers

Adolofo Benavides (1986)
Professor of Business
Administration and Economics,
Chair, Division of Business
Administration and Economics
B.B.A., University of Puerto Rico; M.A.,
Ph.D., Washington State University

Jon Birkeli (1987)
Associate Professor of Business
Administration and Economics
A.B., Lenoir-Rhyne College; Ph.D.,
University of South Carolina

Vernon S. Brown, Jr. (1982)
Associate Professor of Art and
Design

B.V.A., M.V.A., Georgia State University

Julia B. Burdett(1976)
Assistant Professor of Social
Work

A. A., Brewton Parker Jr. College; B.A.,
Tift College; M.R.E., Southern Baptist
Theological Seminary; M.S.W., Tulane
University

Joseph J. Cafaro (1984)
Associate Professor of History

A. A., Manatee Junior College; B.A.,
Florida Atlantic University; M.A., Ph.D.,
Florida State University

Janet P. Callahan (1993)
Assistant Professor of Business
Administration and Economics
B.S., Northland College; M.Ac.,
Northeast Missouri State University

Roland B. Cousins (1990)
Professor of Business
Administration

B.S., M.S., Virginia Polytechnic Institute;
D.B.A., Indiana University

Nina Dulin-Mallory (1989)
Instructor of English

B.A., Clemson University; M.Ed.,
LaGrange College; Auburn University

202 / Faculty, Trustees and Administration

George M. Dupuy (1989)
Fuller E. Callaway Professor of
Management

B.A., College of William and Mary;
M.B.A., Ph.D., University of North
Carolina Chapel Hill

SueM. Duttera (1990)
Associate Professor of
Chemistry/Physics
B.S., Ph.D., Duke University

Steven Earl Edwards (1992)
Assistant Professor of Theater
Arts

B.A., Texas Wesleyan University; M.A.,
University of Arkansas; Ph.D., Texas
Tech University

Steven Mark Ensley (1991)
Assistant Professor of Music

B.M., University of North Carolina;
M.M., M.F.A., University of Wisconsin;
Franz Schubert Institute

Charles H. Evans (1981)
Professor of Psychology
B.S., University of Georgia; M.S.,
University of Georgia; Ph.D., University
of Georgia

Michael C. Frassetto (1990)
Assistant Professor of History
B.A., LaSalle University; M.A., Michigan
State University; Ph.D., University of
Delaware

Santiago A. Garcia (1977)
Professor of Education
B,A., Tulane University; M.A., San Jose
State University; University of Maryland;
Ph.D., Georgia State University

Luke K.Gill, Jr. (1971)
Professor of Sociology/Social
Work, Assistant Dean for
Evening Studies
Georgia Southwestern College; B.B.A.,
University of Georgia; J.D., John
Marshall Law School; M.S.W., University
of Georgia; University of Georgia

Jill C.Guy (1991)
Assistant Professor of Nursing
B.S.N., Murray State University; M.S.N.,
University of Kentucky (on leave Spring
1994)

Richard Harrison (1992)
Assistant Professor of Theater
Arts

B.A., Ottawa University; M.F.A., North
Carolina School of the Arts

Patrick M. Hicks (1958)
Associate Professor of Science
B.S., M.S., Auburn University; University
of Georgia

Samuel G. Hornsby, Jr. (1966)
Professor of English, Chair,
Humanities and Fine Arts
Division

Oxford College of Emory University;
B.S.Ed., M.A., University of Georgia;
University of London; Ph.D., Auburn
University

John C. Hurd (1974)
Professor of Biology
B.S., Alabama College; M.S., Ph.D.,
Auburn University

Frank A. James (1982)
Professor of Chemistry, Vice
President and Dean of the
College

B.S., M.Ed., Ph.D., University of Georgia

Lee E.Johnson (1990)
Associate Professor of Music

B.A., Auburn University; M.M., Indiana
University

Sandra K.Johnson (1983)
Professor of Health, Physical
Education and Recreation
B.A., Concordia College; M.Ed.,
University of Arizona; Ed.D., University
of North Carolina-Greensboro

Tony A. Johnson (1978)
Professor of Psychology

B.A., M.S., Mississippi State University;
Ph.D., University of Mississippi

Faculty, Trustees and Administration I 203

Richard Donald Jolly (1961)
Professor of Mathematics, Chair,
Science and Mathematics
Division

B.A., University of Southern Mississippi;
M.S., University of Illinois; Tulane
University; Ed.D., Auburn University

Evelyn B.Jordan (1977)
Candler Professor of Eduction;
Chair, Division of Education

A. A., Middle George College; B.S.,
University of Georgia; M.Ed., Auburn
University; Ed.D., Auburn University

Charles P. Kraemer (1978)
Professor of Psychology, Chair,
Division of Social and
Behavioral Sciences
B.A., LaGrange College; M.S., University
of Georgia; Ph.D., University of Georgia

Sandra H. Kratina (1983)
Associate Professor of Nursing
Chair, Division of Nursing

B.S.N. , Florida State University; M.S.N. ,
University of Florida; Ph.D., Georgia
State University

John D. Lawrence (1970)
Professor of Art and Design and
Director of the Lamar Dodd Art
Center

B.F.A., Millsaps College; Atlanta College
of Art; M.F.A., Tulane University (on
leave Spring 1994)

Frank R. Lewis (1973)
Librarian

A.B., North Carolina Central University;
M.L.S., Atlanta University

Tracy L. R. Lightcap (1991)
Assistant Professor of History
and Political Science
A.B., University of the South; M.A.,
University of South Carolina; Ph.D.,
Emory University

Keith William Lindley (1992)
Instructor of Modern Foreign
Languages

B.A., University of South Florida; M.A.,
University of Florida

Sarah Beth Mallory (1993)
Assistant Professor of Biology
B.S., M.S., University of Georgia

Greg A. McClanahan (1988)
Associate Professor of
Mathematics

B.S., M.S., Auburn University; Ph.D.,
Clemson University

Ann C. McClelland 989)
Assistant Professor of Nursing
B.S.N., M.S.N., University of Alabama

Charles Franklin McCook (1961)
Professor of Religion
A.B., Emory University; S.T.B., S.T.M.,
Ph.D., Boston University; Hebrew Union
College, Hebrew University, Jerusalem,
Israel

William J. McCoy, IV (1991)
Associate Professor of
Chemistry/Physics
B.S., Yale University; Ph.D., University of
North Carolina

Frederick V.Mills (1967)
Professor of History
A.B., Houghton College; S.T.B., Temple
School of Theology; M.Th., Princeton
Theology Seminary; M.A., Ph.D.,
University of Pennsylvania

Forest W. Morrisett (1986)
Associate Professor of Biology
B.A., M.S., Arizona State University;
Ph.D., University of Arizona '

Walter Y. Murphy (1980)
Professor of Religion and
Philosophy; President
A.B., Emory University; M.Div., Candler
School of Theology; LL.D., Bethune-
Cookman College; D.D., LaGrange
College

204 / Faculty, Trustees and Administration

David L. Naglee(1966)
Professor of Religion and
Philosophy

A.B., Houghton College; Temple School
of Theology; M.Div., Crozer Theological
Seminary; M.A., Ph.D., Temple
University

MaynardL Reid(1973)
Professor of Education
B.S.E., M.S.E., Georgia Southern College;
Ed.D., Auburn University

Kevin C. Reidy(1990)
Assistant Professor of Business
Administration and Economics
B.A., Gettysburg College; J.D., State
University of New York at Buffalo; M.S.,
State University of New York at
Binghamton

Fay A. Riddle (1980)
Associate Professor of Computer
Science

B.S., H. Sophie Newcomb College of
Tulane University; M.S., Ph.D.,
University of Florida; University of South
Carolina

Maranah A. Sauter(1983)
Associate Professor of Nursing
A. A., B.S., Georgia Southwestern
College; M.S., Georgia State University

George Michael Searcy (1966)
Associate Professor of
Mathematics

A.B., LaGrange College; M.S., Auburn
University

Bailey Brooks Shelhorse, Jr. (1968)
Professor of Mathematics and
Computer Science
A.B., LaGrange College; M.A., Louisiana
State University; University of North
Carolina; M.Ed., Washington State
University; Ph.D., Georgia State
University; M.S., University of Evansville

JackC. Slay, Jr. (1992)
Assistant Professor of English

B.A., M.A., Mississippi State University;
Ph.D., University of Tennessee

Maria Dee Smith (1992)
Assistant Professor of Health,
Physical Education and
Recreation

B.S., William Jewell College; M.S.S.,
United States Sports Academy

Scott H.Smith (1988)
Associate Professor of English
B.A., Hobart College; M.A., Ph.D.,
University of Georgia

Perry A. Snyder (1990)
Vice President for Advancement
B.A., Southeastern Louisiana University;
M.A., Ph.D., Florida State University

Stephen W. Taft (1991)
Associate Professor of Theater
Arts

B.S.E., Central Missouri State University;
M.A., Southwest Missouri State
University; Ph.D., Texas Tech University

Timothy N. Taunton (1984)
Assistant Professor of Art and
Design

B.A., University of Arkansas-Little Rock;
M.F.A., Louisiana State University

Brenda W.Thomas (1989)
Assistant Professor of English
A.B., Samford University; M.A., Auburn
University; Ph.D., Georgia State
University

Randy N. Unger(1990)
Instructor of Health, Physical
Education and Recreation

B.S., Taylor University; M.Ed., Georgia
Southern College

Susan Ann Walsh (1994)
Assistant Professor of Nursing
B.S.N., William Paterson College; M.N.,
Emory University

Steve G. Weaver (1989)
Assistant Librarian
B.A., Warren Wilson College; M.S.L.S.,
University of North Carolina; M.A.,
University of Virginia

Faculty, Trustees and Administration / 205

John M.Williams (1989)
Instructor of English

B.A., M.A., Auburn University

Mary K.Williams (1978)
Assistant Professor of Nursing

B.S.N., Emory University; M.S.N.,
Georgia State University (on leave Spring
1994)

Phillip R.Williamson (1969)
Associate Professor of Health,
Physical Education, and
Recreation; Director of Athletics
B.S., M.S., Troy State University

Carol M.Yin (1991)
Instructor of Mathematics

B.S., M.A.N., Auburn University

Adjunct Faculty

Marcia Langham Brown
Assistant Professor of Art and
Design

B.F.A., Guilford College; M.F.A.,
University of Georgia; Pennsylvania
Academy of the Fine Arts

Lynn Harris

A.A., B.A., LaGrange College; B.S.N.,
M.S.N., Medical College of Georgia

Earl T. Kinzer
Associate Professor of Physics

B.E.P., M.S., Auburn University; Ph.D.
University of Virginia

Barbara S. Miller
Assistant Professor of Nursing
B.A., M.S., University of Alabama

Christiane B. Price
Assistant Professor of Modern
Foreign Languages

M.A., Freie Universitat; Ph.D., Emory
University; the Sorbonne; Barcelona
University; Madrid University

Part Time

Murli D. Buluswar

B.S., Bluffton College; M.S., Auburn
University

Ann Daniel
Clinical Instructor

B.S.N. , Valdosa State College

Randy Dye
B.S., Columbus College

Roger Hudson

B.A., The College of Charleston; M.M.,
Georgia State University

Guy Johnston

B.B.A., Georgia Southwestern College

Brian McNeil
B.A., Birmingham-Southern College;
M.A., University of Alabama

Hiroshi Mukai

B.A., Gakushuin University

Efren Munoz
University of Guadalajara

Levis Spradlin, Jr.
A. A., B.A., LaGrange College; M.S.,
Columbus College

206 / Faculty, Trustees and Administration

Faculty Members Holding the
Status of Professor Emeritus

Marcus N. Gewinner
Professor of Psychology
B.A., LaG range College; B.M., University
of Rochester, Eastman School of Music;
M.Ed., College of William and Mary;
Ed.D., Mississippi State University
(1971-1981)

Authur M. Hicks
Professor of Chemistry
A.B., M.S., Emory University; Rutgers
University; Ph.D., Auburn University
(1950-1986)

Walter Dickinson Jones
Professor of English
A.B., Huntingdon College; M.A., Auburn
University; Ph.D., University of Alabama
(1962-1982)

Robert Preston Price II
Fuller E. Callaway Professor of
Psychology

B.S., College of William and Mary in
Virginia; B.D., Emory University; Ph.D.,
Boston University (1971-1977)

John L. Shibley
Professor of Biology
B.S. University of Oklahoma; M.S.,
Ph.D., University of Georgia
(1950-1986)

Walter Malcolm Shackelford
Professor of Education

A.B., Mississippi College; M.Ed.,
Louisiana State University; University of
Kentucky; Ed.D., University of
Mississippi (1958-1982)

Zachary Taylor, Jr.
Professor of Economics and
Business Administration
B.A., University of Alabama; Ph.D.,
University of Illinois (1 956-1 991 )

Murial B. Williams
Professor of English
A.B., M.A., Ph.D., University of Alabama
(1963-1993)

Faculty, Trustees and Administration / 207

Board of Trustees

Officers

Chairman Charles D. Hudson

Vice Chairman E. Malone Dodson

Second Vice Chairman Walter Y. Murphy

Secretary and Treasurer Robert S. Morton

Members Class

Daniel P. Amos, Columbus, Georgia 1995

Ray C. Anderson, LaGrange, Georgia 1 995

tT. Scott Avary, Lanett, Alabama
Mrs. Carolyn M. Bernard, Tucker, Georgia 1996

*J. Kennerly Boatwright, LaGrange, Georgia 1994

* Arthur D. Bradfield, LaGrange, Georgia 1996

tDan F. Brewster, D.D., Nevvnan, Georgia

* Robert Carmichael, LaGrange, Georgia 1 996

* Larry Caywood, LaGrange, Georgia Ex Officio

*J. Philip Cleaveland, LaGrange, Georgia 1993

Lovick P. Corn, Columbus, Georgia 1 994

George "Buddy" Darden, Marietta, Georgia 1997

* E. Malone Dodson, Roswell, Georgia 1 995

* Charles A. Farr, LaGrange, Georgia Ex Officio

John J. Flynt, Jr., Griffin, Georgia 1 996

Clifford C. Glover, West Point, Georgia 1997

* Edmond C. Glover, West Point, Georgia 1 994

* Edwin M. Gore, LaGrange, Georgia 1 997

Mrs. Elizabeth Harris, Cartersville, Georgia 1995

* Pat H. Holder, LaGrange Georgia 1995

John E. Horton, Albany, Georgia 1 996

* Charles D. Hudson, LL.D., LaGrange, Georgia 1996

William H. Hurdle, D.D., Macon, Georgia Ex Officio

J. Lloyd Knox (Bishop), Atlanta, Georgia Ex Officio

tjoseph L. Lanier, Jr., Danville, VA

J. Smith Lanier II, West Point, Georgia 1997

Charles M. Miller, Cornelia, Georgia 1996

* Judge Lewis R. Morgan, LL.D., LaGrange, Georgia 1997

* Robert S. Morton, LaGrange, Georgia 1 997

*J. Gardner Newman, LaGrange, Georgia 1995

tO.F. Nixon, Jr., LaGrange, Georgia

Miss Margaret A. Pitts, L.H.D., Waverly Hall, Georgia 1994

President, Student Government Association Ex Officio

* S. Cliff Rainey, O.D., LaGrange, Georgia 1 995

Larry B. Roberts, Macon, Georgia Alumni Trustee

208 / Faculty, Trustees and Administration

* Charles W. Smith, LaGrange, Georgia 1997

tR. Woodrow Smith, LaGrange, Georgia

*John W. Stewart, Jr., LaGrange, Georgia 1994

J. Madison Sullivan, Americus, Georgia 1997

* L. Henderson Traylor, Jr., LaGrange, Georgia 1994

H. Averett Walker, Albany, Georgia 1 995

tCharles R. Williams, D.D., Newborn, Georgia
D. Randall Williamson, Avondale Estates, Georgia 1996

Member Executive Committee
tTrustee Emeritus

Alumni Representatives

William W. Markert
Winifred A. Nixon

Consultants

Wallace L. Bishop, Vice President & Controller

Frank A. James, Vice President & Dean of the College

John C. Hurd, Faculty Representative

Perry A. Snyder, Vice President for College Advancement

Legal Counsel

James R. Lewis

Financial Consultants

H. Speer Burdette, III
Fred L. Turner

Standing Committees LaGrange College Board of Trustees

Academic Affairs *Budget & Finance

Ray Anderson, Chairman John Stewart, Chairman

Winifred Nixon Ken Boatwright

Carolyn Bernard Edmund Glover

Larry Caywood Bobby Carmichael

Malone Dodson Wallace Bishop, Consultant
Frank James, Consultant

Faculty, Trustees and Administration / 209

Development

Edmund Clover, Chairman

Dan Amos

Larry Caywood

Philip Cleaveland

Lovick P. Corn

John Flynt, Jr.

John Horton

Lewis Morgan

Randall Williamson

Perry Snyder, Consultant

Winifred Nixon

Investment

Lovick P. Corn, Chairman
J. Smith Lanier
Charles M. Miller
Robert S. Morton
Gardner Newman
Wallace Bishop, Consultant

Nominating Committee

Gardner Newman, Chairman
Arthur D. Bradfield
Lewis Morgan

Student Affairs

Pat Holder, Chairman

Carolyn Bernard

Charles Farr

Elizabeth Harris

SGA President (Katy Pettis)

Nancy Alford, Consultant

Athletic Committee

Charles Smith, Chairman
Arthur Bradfield
Wayne Hunter

Audit

Ken Boatwright, Chairman
J. Phillip Cleaveland
Wayne Hunter

Buildings & Grounds

Edwin Gore, Chairman
Edmund Glover
Cliff Rainey
John Stewart
Henderson Traylor
Wallace Bishop, Consultant

Insurance

Edwin Gore, Chairman

Pat Holder

J. Smith Lanier

Charles Smith

Wallace Bishop, Consultant

Land Development

J. Matt Sullivan, Advisor

Long Range Planning

Robert Morton, Chairman

Nancy Alford

Charles Farr

Lee Johnson

Sandra Johnson

Cliff Rainey

Henderson Traylor

SGA President (Katy Pettis)

Wallace Bishop, Consultant

Mickey Grubb, Consultant

Frank James, Consultant

Perry Snyder, Consultant

'The Chairman of the Board of Trustees and the President are ex officio.

210/ Faculty, Trustees and Administration

Administrative Officers and Staff

Central Administration

Walter Y. Murphy (1980) President
A.B., Emory University; M.Div., Candler School of Theology; LL.D.,
Bethune-Cookman College; D.D., LaGrange College

Wallace L. Bishop (1982) Vice President and Controller
B.S., Pennsylvania State University

Frank A. James (1 982) Vice President and Dean of the College
B.S., M.Ed., Ph.D., University of Georgia

Perry A. Snyder (1990) Vice President for Advancement

B.A., Southeastern Louisiana University; M.A., Ph.D., Florida State
University

Nancy Thomas Alford (1 969) Dean of Student Development
B.S., Georgia College at Milledgeville; M.S., University of Tennessee

Phillip Lee Dodson (1 992) Director of Admission
B.A., LaGrange College

Hugh M. Grubb (1 990) Chaplain and Assistant to the President
B.A., LaGrange College; M.Div., Candler School of Theology, Emory
University

Jimmy G. Herring (1 974) Registrar and Coordinator of Institutional
Research
B.A., LaGrange College

Jeffrey B. Sargent (1993) Director of Institutional Relations
B.A., LaGrange College; M.S., Columbus College

Sylvia A. Smith (1 985) Director of Student Financial Planning
B.A., LaGrange College

Administrative Staff

Nancy T. Alford (1969) Dean of Student Development

Teresa Allen (1994) Secretary, Center for Communities Studies

Kay H. Austin (1991) Secretary, Institutional Relations

Charlene Baxter (1976) Assistant Librarian and Cataloger

Linda E. Benitz (1 991 ) Secretary, Business Administration and
Economics Division

Wallace L. Bishop (1982) Vice President and Controller

Dee Bradley (1992) Secretary, Education Division

Joneita Byce (1988) Residence Hall Director

Faculty, Trustees and Administration I 21 1

Charles A. Clearwater (1 993) Director of Career Planning and
Placement Services

Cheryl Clearwater (1993) Receptionist, Admission Office

Essie M. Cleaveland (1977) Receptionist

Austin P. Cook, III (1981) Postal Services

Angela Parmer Costa (1986) Systems Analyst

Margaret Davis (1 988) Assistant Director of Admission

Sandra Dennis (1 972) Student Accounts, Business Office

Gwendolyn S. Dixon (1992) Office Assistant, Business Office

Scott Emison (1 994) Assistant Soccer Coach

G. Jeffrey Geeter (1 990) Soccer and Tennis Coach

Luke K. Gill, Jr. (1 971 ) Assistant Dean for Evening Studies

Edi Glover (1990) Curator, Lamar Dodd Art Center

Hugh M. Grubb (1989) Chaplain and Assistant to the President

Amy Hall (1993) Secretary, Humanities and Fine Arts Division

Judith S. Hammerton (1 987) Director of Counseling and English as a
Second Language

Susan A. Hancock (1975) Secretary, Alumni Office

Lynn D. Harris (1 993) College Nurse

Cynthia D. Harvel (1994) Admission Counselor

Wylene Herndon (1974) Campus Traffic Control

Jimmy G. Herring (1 974) Registrar and Coordinator of Institutional
Research

Frank A. James (1 982) Vice President and Dean of the College

Gloria H. Jones (1992) Office Assistant, Business Office

Jennifer R. Johns (1992) Counselor, Admission Office

Margaret H. Keeble (1992) Coordinator, Nontraditional Student Services

Donna Kelley (1990) Secretary, Natural Sciences and Mathematics
Division

Iris L. Knowles (1 988) Assistant Business Manager

Anita Laney (1 974) Manager of Bookstore

Martha W. Lanford (1 994) Director of Advancement Services

Frank R. Lewis (1973) Librarian

Elizabeth C. Loftin (1989) Office Assistant, Registrar's Office

Dana M. Love (1992) Counselor, Admission Office

212/ Faculty, Trustees and Administration

Lisa K. Maddox (1 991 ) Acquisitions Assistant, Library

George J. Mastrovaselis (1992) Data Base Manager

Kirby H. McCartney (1983) Administrative Assistant, Student
Development Office

Catherine D. McConkey (1 993) Director for Community Studies

Margaret McCrary (1993) Secretary, Social and Behavioral Sciences
Division

Melissa McDonald (1983) Administrative Assistant, Registrar's Office

Stephanie Middleton ( 1991) Circulation Library Assistant/Systems
Manager

Yvonne Mills (1986) Periodicals Assistant, Library

Jackie L. Morman, Sr. (1 992) Maintenance Assistant

Emmett H. Mullins (1 992) Manager, Callaway Campus

Walter Y. Murphy (1980) President

Linh Nguyen (1993) Computer Programmer

Willette B. Phillips (1 968) Administrative Assistant, Office of Dean of
the College

Nancy Prescott-Kane (1993) Student Financial Planning Counselor

Jean Prophett (1993) Office Manager, Admission

Effie Rasnick (1984) Residence Hall Director

Stephan R. Reynolds (1993) Computer Services Network Manager

Lee Richter (1 993) Golf Coach

Patricia H. Roberts (1978) Student Financial Planning Assistant

Tammy Rogers (1992) Secretary, College Advancement

Edward W. Scharre, Jr. (1989) Associate Dean of Student Development

Lori Slay (1 992) Associate in English

Scott H. Smith Director of Testing for Institutional Effectiveness

Sylvia A. Smith (1985) Director, Student Financial Planning

Perry A. Snyder (1 990) Vice President for Advancement

Barbara Storie (1992) Secretary, Health, Physical Education and
Recreation Department

Patricia L. Talley (1 991 ) Director of Development

Brenda W. Thomas (1 989) Director of Writing Center

Brenda A. Thompson (1989) Executive Secretary to the President

Larry Thompson Jr. (1989) Volleyball, Softball Coach

Faculty, Trustees and Administration / 2 1 3

Emma S. Trammell (1992) Secretary, Admission Office

Clenda Turner (1993) Residence Hall Director

Margaret Underdown (1988) Secretary, Nursing Division

Randy Unger (1 990) Basketball Coach

Darlene R. Weathers (1 988) Assistant Manager of Bookstore

Steve G. Weaver (1989) Reference Librarian

Phillip R. Williamson (1969) Athletic Director, Baseball Coach

214/

Degrees Awarded

June 4, 1994

Associate of Arts

Loretta Allen
Brenda Diane Bagwell
Leslie Leigh Boettcher
Baniel L. Browning
Sarah Jean Carden
Pamela A. Conner
Vickey E. Corbin
Jennifer Dawn Dennis
Jennifer Leigh Denny
Ronald Greene Everitt
Tracy Cox Frailey
Tammy Renee Fuller
Patrick Luke Gill
Susan McConnell Hagerdon
Curtis Michael Hamby, Jr.
Angela Lynn Hand
Annette Echols Harrilson
Christina Leanne Harris
Sheila M. Hazelwood
Angela Kaye Hodge
Sally Cornelia Howard
Kellie Jacqueline Huff
Pamela Carter Hughie
James Palmer Hull
Robyn Valerie James
Jason Nicholas Jewett
James Matthew Lindsey
Donna Smith Lowrey
Georgeann Prestridge Mai lory
Paula Jean Maxwell
Sheila M. Mayfield
Elizabeth Yearwood Miller
Kelli Murray Murphy
Yumi Osanai
Lee Ann Cook Patton
Debbie West Phelps
Dana L. Pike

Donna Ruth Pittman
Toby Franklin Richardson
Veronda Lee Ross
Tracy Leigh Schuster
James Doyle Scott
Cheryl Hunt Smith
Deborah Gwyn Smith
Linda Delane Thornton Todd
Jacqueline Reid Towns
Norma Marie Tucker
Wendy Ann Williams

Bachelor of Arts

Christine Lori Acquista
John Fields Albright
Matthew Crawford Alford
Asbury Quillian Baldwin III
Christopher Michael Barnas
George McAdam Barrett
Donald Jeffrey Benefield
Jarret Lee Bennett
Martha Elizabeth Blackburn
Wesley Scott Bodge
Martha J. P. Boyd
Grant Bozeman
James Allen Bradfield
Darren Scott Brown
Rebecca Lynn Brown
Laura Ann Burns
Enid Ginnette Childs
Blaine Thorpe Chippendale
Jennifer LaTise Clark
Chris Barrett Crawford, Jr.
Wendi Gail Crotts
John Mark Crowe
Steven Joseph Crowe
Jenny Kathleen Delaney
Jennifer Dawn Dennis

Degrees Awarded / 2 1 5

Julie Patricia Dixon

Suzanne Carol Donald

David Lee Donnell

Deborah Rebecca Doster

Dora Elizabeth Dow

Hope Freeman Dykes

Bianca Cowart Estes

Julius Aslak Floeter

Jill Marie Fowler

Thomas Lafayette Gooch Jr.

Katherine Rimmer Hagler

Curtis Michael Hamby Jr.

Kevin Andre Hancock

Barbara Suzanne Hanner

Todd Edward Harrison

Joseph William Harville Jr.

UlfChirstoph Hayduk

Joanie Smith Henderson

Tess Hensley

Richard Edward Hood

Mark Alan Hopkins

James Palmer Hull

Yasuyuki Ishibuchi

Jeffrey Clark Jernigan

Julie Martin Johnson

Phillip Scott Johnson

Leslie Dolores Jones

James B. Kilburn

Michiko Kondo

Jennifer Louise Land

Jonathan C. Laney

Dawn Renee Levens

Bobby Harvey Lumpkin

Rhonda Ann Lusk

Angela Eileen Lynn

Kimberly Michelle Mannion

Ernest Lee Mapp Jr.

Stephanie Suzanne Noles Middleton

Edward James Moone

Anna Maria Moore

China Davis Morgan

Tomas Alfredo Mosquera

Scott William Nealy

Mary Frances Seay Newman

Tatsuya Noguchi

Manabu Owada
Fred Rocco Padovano
Chad Wesley Parker
Kimberly llene Parrish
Pamela Faith Parrish
Sebron Kenneth Partridge
Christopher White Paul
Mary Laurene Pauley
Kimberly Renee Plaisted
Ralph Price
Theresa W. Pruitt
Adair Baxter Rains
Terri Yvonne Reeves
Carol Barfield Richard
James McLane Riley
Melissa Ann Rossner
Gregory Allen Rushton
Vicky Carol Sams
Deborah Anne Scribner
Christopher Robert Selby
Phillip Wayne Shelton
Dana Michelle Sims
Wallace G. Skinner III
France Boivin Smith
Porter D. Smith
William Danny Spencer, II
Douglas Charles Steingraber II
Anna Elizabeth Stover
Susan Melissa Summerour
Tracye N. Taylor
Amy Michelle Thompson
V. Larry Thompson, Jr.
James Charles Thornton
James Brian Thurmond
Mike Ueda

Donna Renee Ussery ,
Brett Kimberlin Vescovo
Julie Kathryn White
Elizabeth Ann Whitson
Robert M.Wilson
Cynthia Leigh Winter
Todd Brian Wolsifer
Natalie Vonne Woodruff
Cynthia Curtis Woodson
Sandra Elizabeth Yeske

216/ Degrees Awarded

Bachelor of Business
Administration

Donna Lashley Brooks
Shelly Diane Collins
Amie Godshall Fann
James Grant Garrett
Nicole Hornung
Paula Anne Hull
Lee Anne Pless
Mark Boleyn Saye
Michael Jason Simmons
Jesse Deante Traylor

Bachelor of Science

Firas Abubaker
Darlene Marie Bedley
Walter Daniel Cummings
Beverly Lauren Hutcheson
Hirotaka Nakaguro
Benjamin Paul Peters
Holley Shae Ross
Geoffrey David Schmits
James Pate Williams, Jr.
Martin Eugene Wilson, Jr.

Master of Business
Administration

Paul Bryan Basham
Anthony James Bodnyk
Regina Marie Bradshaw
Melvin Escar Coe, Jr.
Douglas Alan Hester
Susan Jane Haak Hinson
Anthony J. Johnson
George William Kish
Ezekiel Roy Lambert III
Gale McGuffin Mote
Felecia Carrie Thornton

Master of Education

Joanie Crook Blanks
Deborah Page Clements
Stephanie Hulsey Falkenberry
Elizabeth Gail Knight
Deborah Greshman Lynn
Glen Melville Major
Jane Anne Mills Ridings
Diane Murray Sweat
Andrea Fowler Trainer

/ 21 7

Index

Associate Degree Requirements 73, 83

Abbreviations 98

Academic Calendar 4, 5

Academic Divisions 96

Academic Honors 79

Academic Load 82

Academic Programs 65

Academic Probation 78

Academic Petition 84

Academic Regulations and Procedures 77

Academic Standing 78

Acceleration 79

Accreditation 9

Administration 210

Administrative Regulations 77

Admission 17

Advisers 68, 71

Appeal 33, 63, 84

Aquatics 59

Assessment 68, 72

Athletic Associations 58

Athletics 58, 59

Attendance Regulations:

Class Attendance 78

Auditing Courses 24, 81

Awards & Recognitions 85

Baccalaureate Degree Requirements 65, 82

Calendar, Academic 4, 5

Career Planning 61

Change of Regulations 3

Communications Directory Inside Cover

Concentration 65

Conduct 60

Cooperative Programs 89

Continuing Education 75

Counseling 62, 68

Courses of Instruction

Art 99

Biology 103

Business Administration 106

Chemistry 114

Computer Science 1 20

Criminal Justice 125

Dance 127

Economics 1 28

Education 132

English 140

French 162

General Science 1 44

German 1 63

Health, Physical Education

& Recreation 1 45

History 151

Mathematics 1 56

Modern Foreign Language 1 62

Music 1 66

Nursing 1 70

Philosophy 175

Physics 1 76

Political Science 1 77

Psychology 181

Religion 1 86

Social Work (see Sociology) 1 90

Sociology 1 90

Spanish 1 64

Speech 193

Theater Arts 1 94

Course Repetition 79, 83

Credit-by-Examination and Exemption

Advanced Placement 70, 79

College Level Examination Program (CLEP) 70, 79

Credit through USAFI and Service Schools 80

Curriculum (See Courses of Instruction)

Day Clinic 61

Dean's List 79

Degree Requirements 65

Degrees Offered 66

Discipline 60

Divisions, Academic

Business Administration and Economics 96

Education 96

Humanities and Fine Arts 96

Nursing 96

Natural Sciences and Mathematics 97

Social and Behavioral Sciences 97

Early Admission 18

Endowed Lectureships 85

Expenses and Fees 23

Faculty (Spring 1994) 201

Fees 24

Financial Aid 27

Financial Information 23

Financial Planning 27

Fraternities:

Honorary 57

Social 57

Freshmen Seminar 71

General Education Curriculum

B.A., B.S., B.B.A., B.S.N 69

A.A 73

General Information 7

Grade Points 82

Grades and Credits 81

Graduates 1994 214

Graduation Petitions 84

Graduation Rates 85

Graduation Requirements 84

Grants-in-Aid 51

History of the College 8

Holidays (See Academic Calendar)

Honor Societies 57

Honors, Prizes, and Awards 85

Housing Requirements 56

Incomplete Grade 81

Independent Study 68

Infirmary (See Day Clinic)

Intercollegiate Athletics 58

Intramural Sports 59

International Students 20, 80, 141

Joint Enrollment 19

Languages 1 62

Lectures 60, 85

Library 11

Loans 37, 47, 48

Location of College 8

Majors 65

Master of Business Administration Degree 67, 106

Master of Education Degrees 32

Medical Care 25, 61

Minors 75

218/ Index

Mission 7

Non-traditional student 72

Non-typical student 72

Officers:

Administration 210

Board of Trustees 207

On-Trial 19

Organizations:

Honorary 57

Religious 57

Service 57

Special Interests 58

Students 57

Talent 58

Orientation (Freshman Seminar) 71

Overload 79, 82

Petition, Academic 84

Physical education exemption 148

Placement (Course) 70

Placement Service 61

Philosophy of College 7

Pre-professional Programs 89

Probation, Academic 78

Publications 58, 101, 142

Purpose 7

Quality Points 82

Quarter Hours 82

Quarter on Trial 19

Refund Policy 26

Registration and Academic Advisers 68, 71, 77

Religion-in-Life Lectures:

Thompson Lectureship 85

Religious Life 59

Requirements:

Admission 17

Degree 65, 82

Graduation 84

Residence Requirements 83

Room and Board 56

Scholarships 38

Social Life 57

Sororities, Social 57

Special Institutes 75

Special Studies 68

Staff 210

Student Affairs 55

Student Conduct 60

Student Government 57

Student:

Aid 27

Classification 83

Housing 56

Organizations 57

Publications 58

Review of Decisions 33, 63, 84

Summer School 10

Summer Theater Laboratory 1 97

Suspension 78

Teacher Education and Certification 1 32

Testing 62, 68, 72

ACT 62

CEEB (SAT) 1 8, 62

CLEP 70, 79

COMP 72

GRE 62

Miller Analogies 62

Testing Fee 24

Time Restrictions:

Major 65

General Education 69

Transcripts 84

Transfer, Admission of 19

Transient Student to and from

LaGrange College 1 9, 83

Trustees, Board of 207

Tuition and Fees:

General Summary 25

Withdrawal 78, 81

Writing Center 1 40

Work Opportunities 30, 61

on T 1

D f- m

JO ^ n

3 ^ t

- ^ K

<= ? ">

c O O

21 5 ft)
5' 3.
ST =' 3 1

c "
300

If I

V ft-

-< n o

09

r~

c

QJ

n

*

O

r-

OOQ

'

G> fl>

00

22 C)

1
O

r-

P 0)

O)

ro

Q_

rocra

Ln

m

^ 5T

rD

OJ

nD

O
ho

H

-^

n

r- 1

>

O

r -1

&

r- 1

>

m

Z

O

O

m

en

no

m ;>

n ^

m ng

2

O -H

lu m
ho "^

6 >
o